2017 Nissan Juke | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

User Manual: 2017-juke

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 416 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2017 Nissan Juke Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information
OM17E0 0F15U0
Table of Contents

2017 JUKE

OWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of

driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. Additionally, a separate

Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S.

only) will explain how to resolve any

concerns you may have with your vehicle,

as well as clarify your rights under your

state’s lemon law.

In addition to factory installed options, your

vehicle may also be equipped with additional

accessories installed by NISSAN or by your

NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is important

that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

warnings, cautions and instructions concerning

proper use of such accessories prior to operat-

ing the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recom-

mended you see a NISSAN dealer for details

concerning the particular accessories with

which your vehicle is equipped.

Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best.

When you require any service or have any

questions, we will be glad to assist you with the

extensive resources available to us.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s

Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with

controls and maintenance requirements, assist-

ing you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

.NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.

.ALWAYS observe posted speed lim-

its and never drive too fast for

conditions.

.ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle

features or taking other actions that

could distract you.

.ALWAYS use your seat belts and

appropriate child restraint systems.

Pre-teen children should be seated

in the rear seat.

.ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety

features to all occupants of the

vehicle.

.ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man-

ual for important safety information.

On-pavement and off-road driv-

ing

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger

car because it has a higher center of

gravity. As with other vehicles with fea-

tures of this type, failure to operate this

vehicle correctly may result in loss of

control or an accident. Be sure to read

“Avoiding collision and rollover” and

“Driving safety precautions” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Foreword

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHI-

CLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its performance,

safety or durability, and may even violate

governmental regulations. In addition,

damage or performance problems result-

ing from modification may not be covered

under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-

agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses

the port during normal driving, for

example remote insurance company

monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,

telematics or engine reprogramming,

may cause interference or damage to

vehicle systems. We do not recommend

or endorse the use of any aftermarket

OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically

approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-

ranty may not cover damage caused by

any aftermarket plug-in device.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all

features and equipment available on this

model. Features and equipment in your

vehicle may vary depending on model, trim

level, options selected, order, date of

production, region or availability. There-

fore, you may find information about

features or equipment that are not in-

cluded or installed on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change

specifications, performance, design or compo-

nent suppliers without notice and without

obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may

update or revise this manual to provide Owners

with the most accurate information currently

available. Please carefully read and retain with

this manual all revision updates sent to you by

NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate

and up-to-date information regarding your ve-

hicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner’s

Manuals and any updates can also be found in

the Owner section of the NISSAN website at

https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/naviga-

tion/manualsGuide. If you have questions con-

cerning any information in your Owner’s Manual,

contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See the

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page

in this Owner’s Manual for contact information.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause death or

serious personal injury. To avoid or

reduce the risk, the procedures must

be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause minor or

moderate personal injury or damage to

your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,

the procedures must be followed care-

fully.

SIC0697

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not

do this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to those above in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to the front

of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

above indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

above call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and certain vehicle components

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive

harm. In addition, certain fluids con-

tained in vehicles and certain products

of component wear contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer and birth defects

or other reproductive harm.

CANADA’S PRODUCTS CONTAINING

MERCURY REGULATIONS

The xenon headlights (if so equipped) on

your vehicle contain mercury. If these

parts require disposal, the repair facility

vehicle dismantler or recycler should

make sure they are recycled or disposed

of as hazardous waste in accordance

with applicable laws. For information on

safe handling procedures, disposal and

recycling options in accordance with

Canada’s Products Containing Mercury

Regulations, go to http://www.ec.gc.ca/

mercure-mercury/.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-

SORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-

teries, may contain perchlorate material.

The following advisory is provided: “Per-

chlorate Material - special handling may

apply, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Bluetooth



is a trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and

licensed to Visteon Corporation

and Robert Bosch GmbH.

SiriusXM



services require a

subscription after trial period

and are sold separately or as a

package. The satellite service is

available only in the 48 contig-

uous USA and DC. SiriusXM



satellite service is also available

in Canada: see www.siriusxm.ca.

C2016 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or

by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-

copying, recording or otherwise, without the

prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co.,

Ltd.

NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are

our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you

would like to provide NISSAN directly with

comments or questions, please contact the

NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using

our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for

the following information:

.Your name, address, and telephone number

.Vehicle identification number (attached to

the top of the instrument panel on the

driver’s side)

.Date of purchase

.Current odometer reading

.Your NISSAN dealer’s name

.Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.

com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and

thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE

PROGRAM

Illustrated table of contents 0
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
Instruments and controls
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Starting and driving
In case of emergency
Appearance and care
Do-it-yourself
Maintenance and schedules
Technical and consumer information
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Table of
Contents
Index 11

0 Illustrated table of contents
Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) ............................................................................ 0-2
Exterior front ............................................................................... 0-3
Exterior rear ................................................................................ 0-4
Exterior (NISMO models) ........................................................ 0-5
Passenger compartment ......................................................... 0-6
Cockpit ........................................................................................ 0-7
Instrument panel ....................................................................... 0-8
Meters and gauges .................................................................. 0-9
Engine compartment ............................................................ 0-11
MR16DDT engine .......................................................... 0-11
Warning and indicator lights .............................................. 0-12

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

JVC0533X

1. Rear head restraints (Page 1-5)

2. Child restraint anchor points (for top tether strap

child restraint) (P.1-30, P.1-34)

3. Front head restraints (P.1-5)

— Front-seat Active Head Restraints* (P.1-9)

4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bags (P.1-38)

5. Seat belts (P.1-10)

6. Front seats (P.1-3)

7. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-38)

8. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-

dren) system (P.1-20)

9. Rear seats (P.1-4)

— Child restraints (P.1-18)

10. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bags (P.1-38)

11. Seat belt with pretensioners (P.1-52)

12. Occupant classification sensors (weight sen-

sors)

— Advanced Air Bag System (P.1-44)

13. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-46)

*: if so equipped

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

JVC0977X

1. Hood (P.3-15)

2. Windshield wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P.2-36)

— Blade replacement (P.8-15)

— Window washer fluid (P.8-9)

3. Parking lights, turn signal lights and front side

marker lights

— Switch operation (P.2-39)

— Bulb replacement (P.8-26)

4. Moonroof* (P.2-52)

5. Power windows (P.2-50)

6. Outside mirrors (P.3-22)

7. Side turn signal lights

— Switch operation (P.2-43)

— Bulb replacement (P.8-26)

8. Front view camera* (P.4-13)

9. License plate installation (P.10-13)

10. Fog lights*

— Switch operation (P.2-44)

— Bulb replacement (P.8-26)

11. Headlights

— Switch operation (P.2-39)

— Bulb replacement (P.8-23)

12. Tires

— Wheels and tires (P.8-28, P.10-9)

— Flat tire (P.6-3)

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(P.2-18, P.5-3)

13. Side view camera* (P.4-13)

14. Doors

— Keys (P.3-2)

— Door locks (P.3-4)

— Intelligent Key system (P.3-6)

— Security system (P.2-33)

*: if so equipped

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR FRONT

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

JVC0745X

1. Liftgate (P.3-16)

— Intelligent Key system (P.3-6)

2. Rear window wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P.2-37)

— Window washer fluid (P.8-9)

3. High-mounted stop light (P.8-23)

4. Antenna (P.4-75)

— Satellite radio antenna* (P.4-35)

5. Rear window defroster (P.2-38)

6. Fuel-filler door

— Operation (P.3-18)

— Fuel information (P.10-4)

7. Rear view camera

— RearView Monitor* (P.4-8)

— Around View



Monitor* (P.4-13)

8. Rear combination lights

— Bulb replacement (P.8-26)

9. Child safety rear door lock (P.3-6)

*: if so equipped

EXTERIOR REAR

JVC0978X

For NISMO models, the vehicle parts listed

below require special care or caution for

cleaning. Refer to the additional information in

each section.

1. Front bumper (P.3-17)

2. Daytime running light (P.2-42, P.3-17, P.8-23,

P.8-26)

3. Side sill extensions (P.3-17)

4. Rear spoiler (P.3-17, P.7-3)

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

EXTERIOR (NISMO models)

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

JVC0184X

1. Cargo area

— Cargo cover* (P.2-49)

— Cargo light (P.2-55, P.8-23)

2. Coat hook (P.2-48)

3. Sun visors (P.3-21)

4. Microphone (P.4-80, P.4-89)

5. Moonroof switch* (P.2-52)

6. Room light and map lights (P.2-54)

7. Inside rearview mirror (P.3-21)

8. Door armrest

— Power window switch (P.2-50)

— Power door lock switch (P.3-5)

*: if so equipped

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

JVC0725X

1. Outside mirror remote control switch (P.3-22)

2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

— Headlight (P.2-40)

— Turn signal light (P.2-43)

— Fog light* (P.2-44)

3. Paddle shifter* (P.5-16)

4. Steering wheel

— Electric power steering (P.5-34)

— Horn (P.2-44)

— Driver’s supplemental air bag (P.1-38)

5. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-36)

6. Shift lever

— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

(P.5-14)

— Manual Transmission (MT) (P.5-19)

7. Fuse box cover (P.8-19)

8. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

(P.5-37)

9. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) switch* (P.5-29)

10. Tilting steering wheel lever (P.3-20)

11. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

— Audio control (P.4-73)

— Siri



Eyes Free (P.4-76)

— Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System con-

trol (P.4-80, P.4-89)

— NISSAN Voice Recognition System (with

navigation system)* (P.4-96)

12. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)

— Cruise control switches (P.5-26)

13. Heated seat switch* (P.2-45)

*: if so equipped

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

COCKPIT

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

JVC0607X

1. Meters and gauges (P.2-5)

2. Center ventilator (P.4-27)

3. Audio system* or Navigation system** (P.4-35)

4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.6-2)

5. Integrated Control System* (P.2-24)

— Drive mode (P.5-22)

— Heater and air conditioner control (P.4-28)

— Defroster switch (P.2-38)

5. Heater and air conditioner control (models

without Integrated Control System) (P.4-28)

— Defroster switch (P.2-38)

6. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-38)

7. Side ventilator (P.4-27)

8. Fuel-filler door release handle (P.3-18)

9. Hood release handle (P.3-15)

10. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-9)

11. Auxiliary input jack/USB connection port*

(P.4-38)

12. Parking brake (P.5-25)

13. Cup holder (P.2-47)

14. Power outlet (P.2-46)

15. Glove box (P.2-48)

*: if so equipped

**: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual.

INSTRUMENT PANEL

JVC0850X

Type A (if so equipped)

1. Tachometer (P.2-9)

2. Vehicle information display (P.2-11)

— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-7)

— Trip computer (P.2-13)

— Torque vectoring AWD (AWD model)

(P.2-14)

— Outside air temperature (P.2-12)

3. Fuel gauge (P.2-11)

4. Speedometer (P.2-7)

5. Warning/indicator lights (P.2-15)

6. Instrument brightness control knob (P.2-43)

7. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-

tion indicator* (P.2-12)

8. RESET switch for trip odometer (P.2-7)/Trip

computer mode switch (P.2-13)

*: if so equipped

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

METERS AND GAUGES

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

SIC4601

Type B (if so equipped)

1. Tachometer (P.2-9)

2. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-10)

3. Vehicle information display (P.2-11)

— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-7)

— Trip computer (P.2-13)

— Torque vectoring AWD (AWD model)

(P.2-14)

— Outside air temperature (P.2-12)

4. Fuel gauge (P.2-11)

5. Speedometer (P.2-7)

6. Warning/indicator lights (P.2-15)

7. Instrument brightness control knob (P.2-43)

8. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-

tion indicator* (P.2-12)

9. RESET switch for trip odometer (P.2-7)/Trip

computer mode switch (P.2-13)

*: if so equipped

JVC0747X

MR16DDT ENGINE

1. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-5)

2. Radiator filler cap (P.8-5)

— Vehicle overheat (P.6-11)

3. Brake and clutch* fluid reservoir (P.8-9)

4. Air cleaner (P.8-14)

5. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-9)

6. Engine drive belt location (P.8-12)

7. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-5)

8. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-5)

9. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-17)

10. Battery (P.8-10)

— Jump starting (P.6-9)

*: for Manual Transmission (MT) models

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

Warning

light Name Page

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning

light (yellow) (AWD model) 2-16

Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light 2-16

Brake warning light 2-16

Charge warning light 2-17

Door open warning light 2-17

Electric power steering warning

light 2-17

Engine oil pressure warning

light 2-17

High temperature warning light

(if so equipped) 2-18

Intelligent Key system warning

light 2-18

Low fuel warning light 2-18

Low tire pressure warning light 2-18

Low washer fluid warning light

(if so equipped) 2-20

P position selecting warning

light 2-20

Warning

light Name Page

Seat belt warning light 2-20

Supplemental air bag warning

light 2-20

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light 2-21

Indicator

light Name Page

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) indica-

tor light (green) (AWD model) 2-21

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)-V indi-

cator light (green) (AWD model) 2-21

Continuously Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) indicator light (if

so equipped)

2-21

Cruise indicator light 2-21

Engine start operation indicator

light 2-21

Exterior light indicator 2-22

Front fog light indicator light (if

so equipped) 2-22

Front passenger air bag status

light 2-22

High beam indicator light 2-22

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) 2-22

Security indicator light 2-23

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights 2-23

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off indicator light 2-23

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
Seats ............................................................................................ 1-2
Front seats ............................................................................ 1-3
Rear seats ............................................................................. 1-4
Head restraints/headrests ....................................................... 1-5
Adjustable head restraint/headrest components ........ 1-6
Non-adjustable head
restraint/headrest components ........................................ 1-7
Remove .................................................................................. 1-7
Install ...................................................................................... 1-7
Adjust ..................................................................................... 1-8
Front-seat Active Head Restraints (if
so equipped) ........................................................................ 1-9
Seat belts ................................................................................. 1-10
Precautions on seat belt usage .................................... 1-10
Pregnant women .............................................................. 1-12
Injured persons ................................................................. 1-12
Three-point type seat belt .............................................. 1-12
Seat belt extenders .......................................................... 1-15
Seat belt maintenance .................................................... 1-15
Child safety .............................................................................. 1-16
Infants .................................................................................. 1-17
Small children .................................................................... 1-17
Larger children .................................................................. 1-17
Child restraints ....................................................................... 1-18
Precautions on child restraints ................................... 1-19
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
System (LATCH) ............................................................ 1-20
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH ................................................................... 1-23
Rear-facing child restraint installation using the
seat belts .......................................................................... 1-25
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH ................................................................... 1-28
Forward-facing child restraint installation using the
seat belts .......................................................................... 1-30
Booster seats .................................................................. 1-34
Supplemental restraint system ........................................... 1-38
Precautions on supplemental restraint system ....... 1-38
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats) ..................................................................... 1-44
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag systems ..................... 1-51
Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) ............. 1-52
Supplemental air bag warning labels ....................... 1-54
Supplemental air bag warning light .......................... 1-54
Repair and replacement procedure .......................... 1-55

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0133

WARNING

.Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined. This

can be dangerous. The shoulder belt

will not be against your body. In an

accident, you could be thrown into it

and receive neck or other serious

injuries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

.For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat properly. See “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage”(P.1-

10).

.After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely

locked.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

.To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of

the vehicle and/or its systems, do

not leave children, people who re-

quire the assistance of others or

pets unattended in your vehicle.

Additionally, the temperature inside

a closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

.The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when

the passenger sits well back and

straight up in the seat. If the seat-

back is reclined, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and being injured

is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

SEATS

SSS0792

Type A (if so equipped)

JVR0342X

Type B (if so equipped)

FRONT SEATS

Front manual seat adjustment

Forward and backward:

Pull the lever *

1up and hold it while you slide

the seat forward or backward to the desired

position. Release the lever to lock the seat in

position.

Reclining (Type A) (if so equipped):

To recline the seatback, pull the lever *

2up and

lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull

the lever up and lean your body forward. Release

the lever to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage”

(P.1-10).) Also, the seatback can be reclined to

allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is

stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)

position or N (Neutral) position with the parking

brake fully applied.

Reclining (Type B) (if so equipped):

To recline the seatback, turn the adjusting dial

2toward the rear of the vehicle and lean back.

To bring the seatback forward, turn the adjusting

dial toward the front of the vehicle and lean your

body forward.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage”

(P.1-10).) Also, the seatback can be reclined to

allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is

stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)

position or N (Neutral) position with the parking

brake fully applied.

NOTE:

.Depending on the passenger’s seat

sliding position when the passenger

seat is unoccupied while driving, a

noise may be heard as the side part

of the passenger’s seat contacts the

seat belt tongue. In this case, move the

seat to the rearmost position to avoid

interference.

.If you are having difficulty turning the

adjusting dial, park the vehicle and

then open the door or get out of the

vehicle to operate the dial.

SSS1129

Seat lifter (for driver’s seat):

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to

adjust the seat height until the desired position

is achieved.

SSS1142

REAR SEATS

Folding

Before folding the rear seats:

Secure the seat belts on the seat belt hooks on

the side wall. (See “Seat belt hooks” (P.1-15).)

To fold the seatback, pull the adjusting knob *

To return the seatback to the seating position, lift

up each seatback and push it to the upright

position until it is latched.

CAUTION

When folding or returning the seatback-

(s) to the upright position, to avoid

injury to yourself and others:

.Make sure that the seat path is clear

before moving the seat.

WARNING

.Do not fold down the rear seats

when occupants are in the rear seat

area or any objects are on the rear

seats.

.Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seats

when they are in the fold-down

position. Use of these areas by

passengers without proper re-

straints could result in serious injury

in an accident or sudden stop.

.Properly secure all cargo with ropes

or straps to help prevent it from

sliding or shifting. Do not place

cargo higher than the seatbacks. In

a sudden stop or collision, unse-

cured cargo could cause personal

injury.

.When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched

position. If they are not completely

secured, passengers may be injured

in an accident or sudden stop.

WARNING

Head restraint/headrest supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They

may provide additional protection

against injury in certain rear end colli-

sions. Adjustable head restraints/head-

rests must be adjusted properly, as

specified in this section. Check the

adjustment after someone else uses

the seat. Do not attach anything to the

head restraint/headrest stalks or re-

move the head restraint/headrest. Do

not use the seat if the head restraint/

headrest has been removed. If the head

restraint/headrest was removed, rein-

stall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position. Failure to

follow these instructions can reduce the

effectiveness of the head restraint/

headrest. This may increase the risk of

serious injury or death in a collision.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0051X

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with head restraint/headrest.

Indicates the seating position is equipped

with a head restraint.

Indicates the seating position is equipped

with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped

with a head restraint or headrest.

.Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be integrated,

adjustable or non-adjustable.

.Adjustable head restraints/headrests have

multiple notches along the stalk to lock them

in a desired adjustment position.

.The non-adjustable head restraints/head-

rests have single locking notch to secure

them to the seat frame.

.Proper Adjustment:

— For the adjustable type, align the head

restraint/headrest so the center of your

ear is approximately level with the center

of the head restraint/headrest.

— If your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

.If the head restraint/headrest has been

removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and

locked in place before riding in that desig-

nated seating position.

SSS0992

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

JVR0203X

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RE-

STRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

SSS1037

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the head

restraint/headrest.

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the

highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from

the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in

a secure place so it is not loose in the

vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant uses

the seating position.

SSS1038

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with

the holes in the seat. Make sure that the

head restraint/headrest is facing the correct

direction. The stalk with the adjustment

notch *

1must be installed in the hole with

the lock knob *

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest

before an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0997

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center

is level with the center of your ears. If your ear

position is still higher than the recommended

alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at

the highest position.

JVR0259X

For non-adjustable head restraint/head-

rest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

SSS1035

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

SSS1036

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

SSS0508

FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD RE-

STRAINTS (if so equipped)

The Active Head Restraint moves forward

utilizing the force that the seatback receives

from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The

movement of the head restraint helps support

the occupant’s head by reducing its backward

movement and helping absorb some of the

forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for colli-

sions at low to medium speeds in which it is said

that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain

rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head

restraints return to their original positions.

The front head restraints have multiple adjust-

ment notches.

Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as

described in this section.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well

back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your

chances of being injured or killed in an accident

and/or the severity of injury may be greatly

reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and

all of your passengers to buckle up every time

you drive, even if your seating position includes a

supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SSS0136

SSS0134

SEAT BELTS

SSS0016

SSS0014

WARNING

.Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be prop-

erly restrained in the rear seat and,

if appropriate, in a child restraint.

.The seat belt should be properly

adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do

so may reduce the effectiveness of

the entire restraint system and in-

crease the chance or severity of

injury in an accident. Serious injury

or death can occur if the seat belt is

not worn properly.

.Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your

chest. Never put the belt behind

your back, under your arm or across

your neck. The belt should be away

from your face and neck, but not

falling off your shoulder.

.Position the lap belt as low and

snug as possible AROUND THE

HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt

worn too high could increase the

risk of internal injuries in an acci-

dent.

.Be sure the seat belt tongue is

securely fastened to the proper

buckle.

.Do not wear the seat belt inside out

or twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

.Do not allow more than one person

to use the same seat belt.

.Never carry more people in the

vehicle than there are seat belts.

.If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ON with all doors closed and

all seat belts fastened, it may in-

dicate a malfunction in the system.

Have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

.No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do

not modify the seat belt, add mate-

rial, or install devices that may

change the seat belt routing or

tension. Doing so may affect the

operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the

seat belt system may result in

serious personal injury.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

.Once a seat belt pretensioner has

activated, it cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

.All seat belt assemblies, including

retractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN recommends that all seat

belt assemblies in use during a

collision be replaced unless the

collision was minor and the belts

show no damage and continue to

operate properly. Seat belt assem-

blies not in use during a collision

should also be inspected and re-

placed if either damage or improper

operation is noted.

.All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the

restraint manufacturer’s inspection

instructions and replacement re-

commendations. The child restraints

should be replaced if they are

damaged.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,

and always position the lap belt as low as

possible around the hips, not the waist. Place

the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across

your chest. Never put the lap/shoulder belt over

your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for

specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with

your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

.Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times.

.Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined. This

can be dangerous. The shoulder belt

will not be against your body. In an

accident, you could be thrown into it

and receive neck or other serious

injuries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

.For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat belt properly.

.Do not allow children to play with

the seat belts. Most seating posi-

tions are equipped with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat

belts. If the seat belt becomes

wrapped around a child’s neck with

the ALR mode activated, the child

can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes

tight. This can occur even if the

vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat

belt to release the child. If the seat

belt can not be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child

by cutting the seat belt with a

suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” (P.1-2).)

SSS0292

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle until

you hear and feel the latch engage.

.The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact.

A slow pulling motion permits the

belt to move and allows you some

freedom of movement in the seat.

.If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then

smoothly pull the belt out of the

retractor.

SSS0290

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the

shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder

and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating

positions three-point seat belts have two modes

of operation:

.Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

.Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

allows the seat belt to extend and retract to

allow the driver and passengers some freedom

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat

belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during certain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for

child restraint installation.

When ALR mode is activated the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional

information, see “Child restraints” (P.1-18).

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is

activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be

certain that seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

SSS0326

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the

buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

SSS0351A

Shoulder belt height adjustment (for front

seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. (See

“Precautions on seat belt usage” (P.1-10).)

To adjust, pull the adjustment button *

1, and

then move the shoulder belt anchor to the

desired position *

2, so that the belt passes

over the center of the shoulder. The belt should

be away from your face and neck, but not falling

off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment

button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into

position.

The range of height adjustment of the shoulder

belt may vary depending on the model.

WARNING

.After adjustment, release the ad-

justment button and try to move the

shoulder belt anchor up and down

to make sure it is securely fixed in

position.

.The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the position

best for you. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in an

accident.

JVR0439X

Seat belt hooks

When the rear seat belts are not in use and

when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear

seat belts on the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with

the installed seat belts is available that can be

purchased. The extender adds approximately 8

in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either

the driver or front passenger seating position. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

assistance with purchasing an extender if an

extender is required.

WARNING

.It is recommended that only

NISSAN seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made

the original equipment seat belts,

be used with NISSAN seat belts.

.Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use

could result in serious personal

injury in the event of an accident.

.Never use seat belt extenders to

install child restraints. If the child

restraint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

.To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are completely

dry.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

.If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

.Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt

assembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the

seat belt becomes wrapped around a

child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-

vated, the child can be seriously injured

or killed if the seat belt retracts and

becomes tight. This can occur even if

the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat

belt to release the child. If the seat belt

can not be unbuckled or is already

unbuckled, release the child by cutting

the seat belt with a suitable tool (such

as a knife or scissors) to release the

seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

.Rear-facing child restraint

.Forward-facing child restraint

.Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less

than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-

facing child restraints. Forward-facing child

restraints are available for children who outgrow

rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1

year old. Booster seats are used to help position

a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-

tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not

fit them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly

fitting seat belt could cause serious or

fatal injury. Always use appropriate

child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children. See

CHILD SAFETY

“Child restraints” (P.1-18).

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle

by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle

seat belt. See “Child restraints” (P.1-18) for

more information.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat.

Studies show that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in

the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”

(P.1-38).

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-

mends that infants be placed in child restraints

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for installation and

use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at

least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing

child restraint as long as possible up to the

height or weight limit of the child restraint.

Children who outgrow the height or weight limit

of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least

1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness. Refer to the

manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommendations.

NISSAN recommends that small children be

placed in child restraints that comply with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You

should choose a child restraint that fits your

vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness until they reach the

maximum height or weight limit allowed by the

child restraint manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit

of the harness-equipped forward-facing child

restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be

placed in a commercially available booster seat

to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit

properly, the booster seat should raise the child

so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle portion of

the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross

the neck or face and should not fall off the

shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across

the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen.

A booster seat can only be used in seating

positions that have a three-point type seat belt.

The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the child

can pass the seat belt fit test below:

.Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

.Is the child able to sit without slouching?

.Do the child’s knees bend easily over the

front edge of the seat with feet flat on the

floor?

.Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap

belt low and snug across the hips and

shoulder belt across mid-chest and

shoulder)?

.Is the child able to use the properly adjusted

head restraint/headrest?

.Will the child be able to stay in position for

the entire ride?

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0473X

If you answered no to any of these questions,

the child should remain in a booster seat using a

three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow

different guidelines. Check local and state

regulations to confirm your child is using

the correct restraint system before travel-

ing.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the

cargo area. The child could be seriously

injured or killed in a sudden stop or

collision.

SSS0099

SSS0100

CHILD RESTRAINTS

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE-

STRAINTS

WARNING

.Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use and in-

stallation of child restraints could

result in serious injury or death of a

child or other passengers in a

sudden stop or collision:

— The child restraint must be used

and installed properly. Always

follow all of the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for

installation and use.

— Infants and children should

never be held on anyone’s lap.

Even the strongest adult cannot

resist the forces of a collision.

— Do not put a seat belt around

both a child and another pas-

senger.

— NISSAN recommends that all

child restraints be installed in

the rear seat. Studies show that

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seat than

in the front seat. If you must

install a forward-facing child

restraint in the front seat, see

“Forward-facing child restraint

installation using the seat belts”

(P.1-30).

— Even with the NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System, never install a

rear-facing child restraint in the

front seat. An inflating air bag

could seriously injure or kill a

child. A rear-facing child re-

straint must only be used in the

rear seat.

— Be sure to purchase a child

restraint that will fit the child

and vehicle. Some child re-

straints may not fit properly in

your vehicle.

— Child restraint anchor points are

designed to withstand loads

from child restraints that are

properly fitted.

— Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts or harnesses.

— A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the

front passenger seat.

— Keep seatbacks as upright as

possible after fitting the child

restraint.

— Infants and children should al-

ways be placed in an appropri-

ate child restraint while in the

vehicle.

.When the child restraint is not in

use, keep it secured with the LATCH

system or a seat belt. In a sudden

stop or collision, loose objects can

injure occupants or damage the

vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing a

child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint anchor system, referred to as the

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-

dren) system. Some child restraints include rigid

or webbing-mounted attachments that can be

connected to these anchors.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

For details, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren System (LATCH)” (P.1-20).

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and small children of various sizes. When

selecting any child restraint, keep the following

points in mind:

.Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

.Check the child restraint in your vehicle to

be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s

seat and seat belt system.

.If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

.If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you

may use either the LATCH anchors or the

seat belt to install the child restraint (not

both at the same time).

.If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower

anchors) to install the child restraint.

.Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on forward-facing child

restraints be secured to the designated

anchor point on the vehicle. SSS0801

LATCH label location

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

System (LATCH)

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with LATCH (Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system

compatible child restraints. This system may

also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX

compatible system. With this system, you do not

have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the

child restraint unless the combined weight of the

child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5

kg). If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the

vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for

installation.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

.Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown in the illustration.

.Do not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using

the LATCH lower anchors. The child

restraint will not be secured prop-

erly.

.Inspect the lower anchors by insert-

ing your fingers into the lower

anchor area. Feel to make sure

there are no obstructions over the

anchors such as seat belt webbing

or seat cushion material. The child

restraint will not be secured prop-

erly if the lower anchors are ob-

structed.

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child

restraint will not be properly installed

using the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision. SSS0637

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located at the

rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A

label is attached to the seatback to help you

locate the LATCH lower anchors.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0643

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH lower

anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this

system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat

belt to secure the child restraint. Check your

child restraint for a label stating that it is

compatible with LATCH. This information may

also be in the instructions provided by the child

restraint manufacturer.

SSS0644

LATCH rigid attachment

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING

Properly secure cargo and do not allow

it to contact the top tether strap when it

is attached to the top tether anchor.

Cargo that is not properly secured or

cargo that contacts the top tether strap

may damage the top tether strap during

a collision. If the cargo cover (if so

equipped) contacts the top tether strap

when it is attached to the top tether

anchor, remove the cargo cover from

the vehicle or secure it on the cargo

floor below its attachment location. If

the cargo cover is not removed, it may

damage the top tether strap during a

collision. Your child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision if the child

restraint top tether strap is damaged.

JVR0198X

Top tether anchor point locations

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child

restraint will not be properly installed

using the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

Anchor points are located on the back side of

the seatbacks.

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing child restraints with the LATCH

lower anchor attachments or seat belts.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap child restraint on the rear

seat, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN-

STALLATION USING LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” and “Child restraints” sections before

installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint

exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint is

greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s

seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0648

Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is

properly attached to the lower anchors.

SSS0649

Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

SSS0639

Rear-facing — step 3

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

SSS0650

Rear-facing — step 4

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the child restraint

near the LATCH attachment path. The child

restraint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH

attachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint or try

installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if

applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN-

STALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front

passenger air bag. See “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light”(P.1-46).

SSS0100

Rear-facing — step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” (P.1-16) and “Child restraints” (P.1-18)

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint

exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint is

greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s

seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

SSS0654

Rear-facing — step 2

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for belt routing.

SSS0655

Rear-facing — step 3

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

SSS0656

Rear-facing — step 4

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

SSS0657

Rear-facing — step 5

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while

pulling up on the seat belt.

SSS0658

Rear-facing — step 6

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the child restraint

near the seat belt path. The child restraint

should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),

from side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten

the seat belt as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1

through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” and “Child restraints” sections before

installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint

exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint is

greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s

seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

SSS0645

Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is

properly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. See “Installing top tether strap” (P.1-

30). Do not install child restraints that

require the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a top

tether anchor.

SSS0646

Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

3. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint to obtain the correct child restraint

fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in

a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint when the child restraint

is removed. See “Head restraints/head-

rests” (P.1-5) for head restraint adjustment

information.

If the seating position does not have a head

restraint and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating position

or a different child restraint.

SSS0647

Forward-facing — step 4

4. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

SSS0638

Forward-facing — step 6

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the child restraint

near the LATCH attachment path. The child

restraint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH

attachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint. Not all

child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 6.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0274X

Installing top tether strap

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child

restraint will not be properly installed

using the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions

only).

1. Remove the head restraint and store it in a

secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head

restraint when the child restraint is removed

(rear outboard seat positions).

See “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-5) for

head restraint adjustment, removal and

installation information.

Position the top tether strap over the top of

the seatback.

2. Secure the top tether strap to the tether

anchor point on the back of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

3. Refer to the appropriate child restraint

installation procedure steps in this section

before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, consult your NISSAN

dealer for details.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front

passenger air bag. See “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light”(P.1-46).

SSS0640

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” and “Child restraints” sections before

installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint

exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint is

greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s

seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the

rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move the

seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and, therefore,

must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint to obtain the correct child restraint

fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in

a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint when the child restraint

is removed. See “Head restraints/head-

rests” (P.1-5) for head restraint adjustment,

removal and installation information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint and it is interfering

with the proper child restraint fit, try another

seating position or a different child restraint.

SSS0360B

Forward-facing — step 3

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point (rear seat installation only). See

“Installing top tether strap” (P.1-34). Do

not install child restraints that require the

use of a top tether strap in seating positions

that do not have a top tether anchor.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0651

Forward-facing — step 4

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

SSS0652

Forward-facing — step 5

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

SSS0653

Forward-facing — step 6

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

SSS0641

Forward-facing — step 8

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the child restraint

near the seat belt path. The child restraint

should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),

from side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten

the seat belt as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2

through 8.

SSS1135

Forward-facing — step 10

10. If the child restraint is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light should illuminate. If this light

is not illuminated, see “Front passenger air

bag and status light” (P.1-46). Move the

child restraint to another seating posi-

tion. Have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child

restraint mode) is canceled.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0274X

Installing top tether strap

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child

restraint will not be properly installed

using the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with the seat

belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

1. Remove the head restraint and store it in a

secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head

restraint when the child restraint is removed

(rear outboard seat positions).

See “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-5) for

head restraint adjustment, removal and

installation information.

Position the top tether strap over the top of

the seatback.

2. Secure the top tether strap to the tether

anchor point on the back of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

3. Refer to the appropriate child restraint

installation procedure steps in this section

before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured in a sudden stop or collision

greatly increases:

.Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the stomach.

.Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the child’s

arm.

.A booster seat must only be in-

stalled in a seating position that has

a lap/shoulder belt.

LRS0455

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

.Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

.Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

LRS0453

.Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat *

1is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat *

2should be used.

.If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with

your child. Always follow all recommended

procedures.

LRS0464

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

when using a booster seat with the seat

belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster seats”

sections earlier in this section before installing a

child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

SSS0640

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a forward-facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions.

LRS0454

Front passenger position

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint to obtain the correct booster seat

fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in

a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint when the booster seat is

removed. See “Head restraints/headrests”

(P.1-5) for head restraint adjustment, re-

moval and installation information.

If the seating position does not have a head

restraint and it is interfering with the proper

booster seat fit, try another seating position

or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions for adjusting the seat belt

routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in “Seat belts” (P.1-10).

SSS1135

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light may or may not illuminate

depending on the size of the child and the

type of booster seat used. See “Front

passenger air bag and status light” (P.1-46).

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

section contains important information concern-

ing the following systems:

.Driver and passenger supplemental front-

impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System)

.Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag

.Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag

.Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head and

chest of the driver and front passenger in certain

frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system: This system can help

cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic

area of the driver and front passenger in certain

side impact collisions. The side air bag is

designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle

is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system: This

system can help cushion the impact force to the

head of occupants in front and rear outboard

seating positions in certain side impact or

rollover collisions. In a side-impact, the curtain

air bags are designed to inflate on the side

where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the

curtain air bags on both sides are designed to

inflate. Under both side-impact and rollover

situations, the curtain air bags will remain

inflated for a short period of time.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-

signed to supplement the crash protection

provided by the driver and passenger seat belts

and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts

should always be correctly worn and the

occupant seated a suitable distance away from

the steering wheel, instrument panel and door

finishers. (See “Seat belts” (P.1-10) for instruc-

tions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

After the ignition is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the systems are operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

SSS0131

SSS0132

WARNING

.The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower se-

verity frontal collision. Always wear

your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

.The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the front passenger air bag

status light is lit or if the front

passenger seat is unoccupied. See

“Front passenger air bag and status

light”(P.1-46).

.The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are

sitting well back and upright in the

seat with both feet on the floor. The

front air bags inflate with great

force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System, if you are

unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-

ting sideways or out of position in

any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may

also receive serious or fatal injuries

from the front air bag if you are up

against it when it inflates. Always sit

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

back against the seatback and as

far-away as practical from the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel. Al-

ways use the seat belts.

.The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with

sensors that detect if the seat belts

are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag

System monitors the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage then

inflates the air bags. Failure to

properly wear seat belts can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury

in an accident.

.The front passenger seat is

equipped with occupant classifica-

tion sensors (weight sensors) that

turn the front passenger air bag

OFF under some conditions. This

sensor is only used in this seat.

Failure to be properly seated and

wearing the seat belt can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an

accident. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light”(P.1-46).

.Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could in-

crease the risk that they are injured

if the front air bag inflates.

SSS0007

SSS0006

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100

WARNING

.Never let children ride unrestrained

or extend their hands or face out of

the window. Do not attempt to hold

them in your lap or arms. Some

examples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the illustrations.

.Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side

air bags or curtain air bags inflate if

they are not properly restrained.

Pre-teens and children should be

properly restrained in the rear seat,

if possible.

.Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating front air bag could

seriously injure or kill your child.

See “Child restraints”(P.1-18) for

details.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0059A

Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0188A

SSS0140

SSS0162

SSS0159

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-

plemental air bags and roof-mounted

curtain side-impact and rollover supple-

mental air bags:

.The side air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a frontal

impact, rear impact, rollover or low-

er severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce

the risk or severity of injury in

various kinds of accidents.

.The curtain air bags ordinarily will

not inflate in the event of a front

impact, rear impact, or lower sever-

ity side collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

.The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. The side air bag

and curtain air bag inflate with great

force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side

air bag on the side of the seatback

of the front seat or near the side

roof rails. Do not allow anyone

sitting in the front seats or rear

outboard seats to extend their hand

out of the window or lean against

the door. Some examples of dan-

gerous riding positions are shown

in the previous illustrations.

.When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you

may be seriously injured. Be espe-

cially careful with children, who

should always be properly re-

strained. Some examples of danger-

ous riding positions are shown in

the illustrations.

.Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0272X

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bag modules

4. Occupant classification sensors (weight sen-

sors)

5. Occupant classification system control unit

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bag inflators

7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bags modules

8. Seat belt with pretensioners

9. Satellite sensors

10. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS-

TEM (front seats)

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the

passenger’s advanced air bag system,

please observe the following items.

.Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket.

.Do not place heavy loads heavier

than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback,

head restraint or in the seatback

pocket.

.Do not store luggage behind the

seat that can press into the seat-

back.

.Confirm the operating condition

with the front passenger air bag

status light.

.If you notice that the front passen-

ger air bag status light is not

operating, it is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer to check the

occupant classification system.

.Until you have confirmed with your

dealer that your passenger seat

occupant classification system is

working properly, position the occu-

pants in the rear seating positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is designed

to meet certification requirements under U.S.

regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. All of

the information, cautions and warnings in

this manual apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is

mounted in the instrument panel above the glove

box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in

higher severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher severity

frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain

frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is

not always an indication of proper front air bag

operation.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has

dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors

information from the Air bag Control Unit (ACU),

seat belt buckle sensors and the occupant

classification sensors (weight sensors). Inflator

operation is based on the severity of a collision

and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front

passenger, the occupant classification sensors

are also monitored. Based on information from

the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in

a crash, depending on the crash severity and

whether the front occupants are belted or

unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air

bag may be automatically turned OFF under

some conditions, depending on the information

provided by the occupant classification sensors.

If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the front

passenger air bag status light will be illuminated

(if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be

illuminated, but the air bag will be off). (See

“Front passenger air bag and status light” (P.1-

46) for further details.) One front air bag inflating

does not indicate improper performance of the

system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer to obtain information about the system. If

you are considering modification of your vehicle

due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in

the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate

a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get fresh

air promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the head

and chest of the front occupants. They can help

save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,

an inflating front air bag may cause facial

abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do

not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the driver

and passenger seated upright as far as practical

away from the steering wheel or instrument

panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order

to help protect the front occupants. Because of

this, the force of the front air bag inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against, the air bag module during

inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

After the ignition is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1135

Front passenger air bag status light

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protection.

Failure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats,

seat belts and child restraints can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

Status light:

The front passenger seat is equipped with the

occupant classification sensors (weight sen-

sors) that turn the front passenger air bag on or

off depending on the weight applied to the front

passenger seat. The status of the front passen-

ger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front

passenger air bag status light which is

located on the instrument panel. After the

ignition switch is placed in the "ON" position,

the front passenger air bag status light illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or

illuminates depending on the front passenger

seat occupied status. The light operates as

follows:

.Unoccupied passenger seat: The light

is OFF and the front passenger air bag is

OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

.Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,

child or child restraint as outlined in this

section: The light illuminates to indicate

that the front passenger air bag is OFF and

will not inflate in a crash.

.Occupied passenger seat and the passen-

ger meets the conditions outlined in this

section: The light is OFF to indicate that

the front passenger air bag is operational.

In addition to the above, certain objects placed

on the front passenger seat may also cause the

light to operate as described above depending

on their weight.

For additional information related to the normal

operation and troubleshooting of this occupant

classification sensor system, please refer to

“Normal operation” (P.1-48) and “Troubleshoot-

ing” (P.1-48) in this section.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as described

below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the

front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate

in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags

in your vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be

automatically turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensors (weight

sensors) are on the seat cushion frame under

the front passenger seat and are designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the seat. For

example, if a child is in the front passenger seat,

the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to

turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance

with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of

the type specified in the regulations is on the

seat, the occupant classification sensors can

detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as

outlined in this manual should not cause the

passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,

however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat

properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by

sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise

being out of position), this could cause the

sensors to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure

to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly

for the most effective protection by the seat belt

and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-

dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.

NISSAN also recommends that appropriate

child restraints and booster seats be properly

installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the

occupant classification sensors are designed to

operate as described above to turn the front

passenger air bag OFF for specified child

restraints. Failing to properly secure child

restraints and to use the Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode)

may allow the restraint to tip or move in an

accident or sudden stop. This can also result in

the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead

of being OFF. (See “Child restraints” (P.1-18)

for proper use and installation.)

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a

crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object being detected by the occupant

classification sensors. Other conditions could

also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle

occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status light,

you can monitor when the front passenger air

bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat

occupied. The light will not illuminate when the

front passenger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front

passenger air bag status light is illuminated

(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be

that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting

on the seat properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the front passenger air bag status light may or

may not be illuminated, depending on the size of

the child and the type of child restraint being

used. If the front passenger air bag status light is

not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might

inflate in a crash), it could be that the child

restraint or seat belt is not being used properly.

Make sure that the child restraint is installed

properly, the seat belt is used properly and the

occupant is positioned properly. If the front

passenger air bag status light is not illuminated,

reposition the occupant or child restraint in a

rear seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light will not

illuminate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, the system may be sensing

an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the

system is OFF by using a special tool. However,

until you have confirmed with your dealer that

your air bag is working properly, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and front passenger air bag

status light will take a few seconds to register a

change in the passenger seat status. However, if

the seat becomes unoccupied, the front pas-

senger air bag status light will remain off.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges area,

will blink. Have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

this service.

Normal operation:

In order for the occupant classification sensor

system to classify the front passenger based on

weight, please follow the precautions and steps

outlined below:

Precautions:

.Make sure that there are no objects weigh-

ing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg) hanging on the seat

or placed in the seatback pocket.

.Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear of the

seatback.

.Make sure that a rear passenger is not

pushing or pulling on the back of the front

passenger seat.

.Make sure that the front passenger seat or

seatback is not forced back against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

.Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

Steps:

1. Adjust the seat as outlined. (See “Seats”

(P.1-2).) Sit upright, leaning against the

seatback, and centered on the seat cushion

with your feet comfortably extended to the

floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined. (See “Seat

belts” (P.1-10).)

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds

allowing the system to classify the front

passenger before the vehicle is put into

motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by checking the

front passenger air bag status light.

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification sen-

sor system locks the classification during

driving so it is important that you confirm

that the front passenger is properly classi-

fied prior to driving. Also, the occupant

classification sensor system may recalcu-

late the weight of the occupant when the

vehicle comes to a stop (i.e. stop light, stop

sign, etc.), so the front passenger seat

occupant should continue to remain

seated as outlined above.

Troubleshooting:

If you think the front passenger air bag status

light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with no front passenger and no

objects on the front passenger seat:

This may be due to the following conditions that

may be interfering with the weight sensors:

.An object weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

.A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

.A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

.Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

.An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

.An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any

of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, it is recom-

mended that the vehicle should be checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the

front passenger seat:

.Occupant is a small adult — the front

passenger air bag status light is functioning

as intended. The front passenger air bag is

suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small adult,

then this may be due to the following conditions

that may be interfering with the weight sensors:

.Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on the

seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably

extended to the floor.

.A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

.A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

.Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

.An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

.An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any

of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person should

be advised not to ride in the front passenger

seat and it is recommended that the vehicle

should be checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon

as possible.

3. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or child

restraint occupying the front passenger seat.

This may be due to the following conditions that

may be interfering with the weight sensors:

.Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with his/her feet

comfortably extended to the floor.

.The child restraint is not properly installed,

as outlined. (See “Child restraints” (P.1-

18).)

.An object weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

.A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

.A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

.Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

.An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

.An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any

of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult,

child or child restraint should be repositioned in

the rear seat and it is recommended that the

vehicle should be checked by a NISSAN dealer

as soon as possible.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Other supplemental front-impact air bag

precautions

WARNING

.Do not place any objects on the

steering wheel pad or on the instru-

ment panel. Also, do not place any

objects between any occupant and

the steering wheel or instrument

panel. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if the front air bags inflate.

.Do not place objects with sharp

edges on the seat. Also, do not

place heavy objects on the seat that

will leave permanent impressions in

the seat. Such objects can damage

the seat or occupant classification

sensors (weight sensors). This can

affect the operation of the air bag

system and result in serious perso-

nal injury.

.Do not use water or acidic cleaners

(hot steam cleaners) on the seat.

This can damage the seat or occu-

pant classification sensors. This can

also affect the operation of the air

bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

.Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components

will be hot. Do not touch them; you

may severely burn yourself.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the supplemental air bag system.

This is to prevent accidental infla-

tion of the supplemental air bag or

damage to the supplemental air bag

system.

.Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end

structure. This could affect proper

operation of the front air bag sys-

tem.

.Tampering with the front air bag

system may result in serious perso-

nal injury. Tampering includes

changes to the steering wheel and

the instrument panel assembly by

placing material over the steering

wheel pad and above the instrument

panel or by installing additional trim

material around the air bag system.

.Removing or modifying the front

passenger seat may affect the func-

tion of the air bag system and result

in serious personal injury.

.Modifying or tampering with the

front passenger seat may result in

serious personal injury. For exam-

ple, do not change the front seats by

placing material on the seat cushion

or by installing additional trim ma-

terial, such as seat covers, on the

seat that is not specifically designed

to assure proper air bag operation.

Additionally, do not stow any ob-

jects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback.

Such objects may interfere with the

proper operation of the occupant

classification sensors.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the seat belt system. This may

affect the front air bag system.

Tampering with the seat belt system

may result in serious personal in-

jury.

.It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and

around the front air bag. It is also

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. The Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS) wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or

disconnected. Unauthorized electri-

cal test equipment and probing

devices should not be used on the

air bag system.

.A cracked windshield should be

replaced immediately by a qualified

repair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

SSS0978

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM-

PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND

ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IM-

PACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLEMEN-

TAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

The side air bags are located in the outside of

the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air

bags are located in the side roof rails. All of the

information, cautions and warnings in this

manual apply and must be followed. The

side air bags and curtain air bags are designed

to inflate in higher severity side collisions,

although they may inflate if the forces in another

type of collision are similar to those of a higher

severity side impact. They are designed to inflate

on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They

may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in

certain types of rollover collisions or near

rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements

(for example, during severe off-roading) may

cause the curtain air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain air

bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed

by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation

and choking. Those with a history of a breathing

condition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest

and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain

air bags help to cushion the impact force to the

head of occupants in the front and rear outboard

seating positions. They can help save lives and

reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating

side air bag or curtain air bag may cause

abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and

curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the

lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the side air bags. Rear seat

passengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roof

rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate quickly in order to help protect the

occupants. Because of this, the force of the

side air bags and curtain air bags inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against, these air bag modules

during inflation. In a rollover, the curtain air bags

on both sides are designed to inflate. Under

both side-impact situations, the curtain air bags

will remain inflated for a short period of time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

After turning the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the systems are operational.

WARNING

.Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door

finisher and the front seat. Such

objects may become dangerous

projectiles and cause injury if a side

air bag inflates.

.Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain air bag system

components will be hot. Do not

touch them; you may severely burn

yourself.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the side air bag and curtain air

bag systems. This is to prevent

damage to or accidental inflation

of the side air bag and curtain air

bag systems.

.Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel.

This could affect proper operation

of the side air bag and curtain air

bag systems.

.Tampering with the side air bag

system may result in serious perso-

nal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing

material near the seatbacks or by

installing additional trim material,

such as seat covers, around the side

air bag.

.It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and

around the side air bag and curtain

air bag. It is also recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for installa-

tion of electrical equipment. The

Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not

be modified or disconnected. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not be

used on the side air bag or curtain

air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to

the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS

(front seats)

WARNING

.The pretensioners cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

.If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but a pretensioner is not

activated, be sure to have the pre-

tensioner system checked and, if

necessary, repaired. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the pretensioner system. This is

to prevent damage to or accidental

activation of the pretensioners.

Tampering with the pretensioner

system may result in serious perso-

nal injury.

.It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and

around the pretensioner system. It

is also recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for installation of

electrical equipment. Unauthorized

electrical test equipment and prob-

ing devices should not be used on

the pretensioner system.

.If you need to dispose of a preten-

sioner or scrap the vehicle, it is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Correct pre-

tensioner disposal procedures are

set forth in the appropriate NISSAN

Service Manual. Incorrect disposal

procedures could cause personal

injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the

supplemental air bag system in certain types of

collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, it

helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle

becomes involved in certain types of collisions,

helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt

retractor. These seat belts are used the same

way as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. The

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get fresh

air promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow

the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to

reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light is

used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner

system. See “Supplemental air bag warning

light” (P.1-54). If the operation of the supple-

mental air bag warning light indicates there is a

malfunction, have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1020

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle

as shown in the illustration.

1SRS air bag

The warning labels are located on the surface of

the sun visors.

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, display-

ing in the instrument panel, monitors the

circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioners

and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off.

This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the air

bag and/or pretensioner systems need servi-

cing:

.The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

.The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

.The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the air bag and/or

pretensioner systems may not operate properly.

They must be checked and repaired. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO-

CEDURE

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags

and pretensioners are designed to activate on a

one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is

damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light

will remain illuminated after inflation has oc-

curred. These systems should be repaired and/

or replaced as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain

air bags and pretensioners and related parts

should be pointed out to the person performing

the maintenance. The ignition switch should

always be in the LOCK position when working

under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

.Once a front air bag, side air bag or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again

and must be replaced. Additionally,

the activated pretensioners must

also be replaced. The air bag mod-

ule and pretensioner should be

replaced. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice. However, the air bag modules

and pretensioner system cannot be

repaired.

.The front air bag, side air bag and

curtain air bag systems, and preten-

sioner system should be inspected

if there is any damage to the front

end or side portion of the vehicle. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

.If you need to dispose of a supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner or

scrap the vehicle, it is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer. Correct

supplemental air bag and preten-

sioner system disposal procedures

are set forth in the appropriate

NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect

disposal procedures could cause

personal injury.

.If there is an impact to your vehicle

from any direction, your Occupant

Classification Sensor (OCS) should

be checked to verify it is still

functioning correctly. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. The OCS

should be checked even if no air

bags deploy as a result of the

impact. Failure to verify proper

OCS function may result in an

improper air bag deployment result-

ing in injury or death.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

1-56 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

1-58 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO

2 Instruments and controls
Cockpit ........................................................................................ 2-3
Instrument panel ........................................................................ 2-4
Meters and gauges ................................................................... 2-5
Speedometer and odometer ............................................ 2-7
Tachometer ........................................................................... 2-9
Engine coolant temperature gauge (Type B) (if
so equipped) ..................................................................... 2-10
Fuel gauge ......................................................................... 2-11
Vehicle information display (Type A) (if
so equipped) ..................................................................... 2-11
Vehicle information display (Type B) (if
so equipped) ..................................................................... 2-12
Outside air temperature .................................................. 2-12
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position
indicator (if so equipped) ............................................... 2-12
Trip computer .................................................................... 2-13
Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders ................................................................... 2-15
Checking lights ................................................................. 2-16
Warning lights ................................................................... 2-16
Indicator lights ................................................................... 2-21
Audible reminders ............................................................ 2-23
Integrated control system (if so equipped) ..................... 2-24
Drive mode ......................................................................... 2-24
Setup function ................................................................... 2-25
Drive information ............................................................ 2-30
Eco information ............................................................... 2-31
Security systems ................................................................... 2-33
Vehicle Security System ............................................... 2-33
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ........................ 2-34
Wiper and washer switch ................................................... 2-36
Rear window wiper and washer switch .......................... 2-37
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch ....... 2-38
Headlight and turn signal switch ....................................... 2-39
Xenon headlights (if so equipped) ............................ 2-39
Headlight switch ............................................................ 2-40
Turn signal switch .......................................................... 2-43
Fog light switch (if so equipped) .............................. 2-44
Horn .......................................................................................... 2-44
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch .................... 2-44
Heated seats (if so equipped) ........................................... 2-45
Power outlet ............................................................................ 2-46
Storage .................................................................................... 2-47
Cup holders ..................................................................... 2-47
Cargo floor box ............................................................... 2-48
Glove box ......................................................................... 2-48
Coat hook ........................................................................ 2-48
Cargo cover (if so equipped) ..................................... 2-49
Windows ................................................................................. 2-50
Power windows .............................................................. 2-50

Moonroof (if so equipped) ................................................... 2-52

Power moonroof ............................................................... 2-52

Interior lights .......................................................................... 2-54

Map lights (if so equipped) ........................................... 2-54

Map light control switch (if so equipped) ............... 2-55

Cargo light ....................................................................... 2-55

JVC0725X

1. Outside mirror remote control switch

2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

— Headlight

— Turn signal light

— Fog light*

3. Paddle shifter*

4. Steering wheel

— Electric power steering

— Horn

— Driver’s supplemental air bag

5. Wiper and washer switch

6. Shift lever

— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

— Manual Transmission (MT)

7. Fuse box cover

8. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

9. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) switch*

10. Tilting steering wheel lever

11. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

— Audio control

— Siri



Eyes Free

— Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System con-

trol

— NISSAN Voice Recognition System (with

navigation system)*

12. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)

— Cruise control switches

13. Heated seat switch*

*: if so equipped

Instruments and controls 2-3

COCKPIT

2-4 Instruments and controls

JVC0607X

1. Meters and gauges

2. Center ventilator

3. Audio system* or Navigation system**

4. Hazard warning flasher switch

5. Integrated Control System*

— Drive mode

— Heater and air conditioner control

— Defroster switch

5. Heater and air conditioner control (models

without Integrated Control System)

— Defroster switch

6. Front passenger supplemental air bag

7. Side ventilator

8. Fuel-filler door release handle

9. Hood release handle

10. Push-button ignition switch

11. Auxiliary input jack/USB connection port*

12. Parking brake

13. Cup holder

14. Power outlet

15. Glove box

*: if so equipped

**: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual.

INSTRUMENT PANEL

JVC0850X

Type A (if so equipped)

1. Tachometer

2. Vehicle information display

— Odometer/twin trip odometer

— Trip computer

— Torque vectoring AWD (AWD model)

— Outside air temperature

3. Fuel gauge

4. Speedometer

5. Warning/indicator lights

6. Instrument brightness control knob

7. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-

tion indicator*

8. RESET switch for trip odometer/Trip computer

mode switch

*: if so equipped

The needle indicators may move slightly

after the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF or LOCK position. This is not a

malfunction.

Instruments and controls 2-5

METERS AND GAUGES

2-6 Instruments and controls

SIC4601

Type B (if so equipped)

1. Tachometer

2. Engine coolant temperature gauge

3. Vehicle information display

— Odometer/twin trip odometer

— Trip computer

— Torque vectoring AWD (AWD model)

— Outside air temperature

4. Fuel gauge

5. Speedometer

6. Warning/indicator lights

7. Instrument brightness control knob

8. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-

tion indicator*

9. RESET switch for trip odometer/Trip computer

mode switch

*: if so equipped

The needle indicators may move slightly

after the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF or LOCK position. This is not a

malfunction.

CAUTION

.For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dam-

pened with water. Never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or

any kind of solvent or paper towel

with a chemical cleaning agent.

They will scratch or cause discolora-

tion to the lens.

.Do not spray any liquid such as

water on the meter lens. Spraying

liquid may cause the system to

malfunction.

SIC4504

Speedometer

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in

miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour

(km/h).

JVI1323X

Odometer/twin trip odometer

Odometer/twin trip odometer (Type A) (if

so equipped)

The odometer and twin trip odometer *

1are

displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

The odometer records the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the reset switch *

2located on the

meter panel changes the display as follows:

ODO ?TRIP A ?TRIP B ?Trip computer

mode ?ODO

For trip computer information, see “Trip compu-

ter” (P.2-13).

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the reset switch *

2for approximately 1

second resets the trip odometer to zero.

Instruments and controls 2-7

2-8 Instruments and controls

SIC4571

Odometer/twin trip odometer

Odometer/twin trip odometer (Type B) (if

so equipped)

The odometer *

1/twin trip odometer *

2are

displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

The odometer records the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the reset switch *

3located on the

meter panel changes the display as follows:

TRIP A ?TRIP B ?Trip computer mode ?

TRIP A

For trip computer information, see “Trip compu-

ter” (P.2-13).

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the reset switch *

3for approximately 1

second resets the trip odometer to zero.

SPA2809

Loose fuel cap warning message

Push the reset switch *

Afor more than 1

second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

message after the fuel cap has been tightened.

For additional information see “Fuel-filler cap”

(P.3-18) of this manual.

JVI1372X

Check tire pressure warning message

The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning

message is displayed when the low tire pressure

warning light is illuminated and low tire

pressure is detected. Check and adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label. The CHECK TIRE PRES

warning message turns off when the low tire

pressure warning light turns off.

The low tire pressure warning light remains

illuminated until the tires are inflated to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK

TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each

time the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position as long as the low tire pressure warning

light remains illuminated.

The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message can

be turned off by pushing the reset switch *

For more information see “Low tire pressure

warning light” (P.2-18), “Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing System (TPMS)” (P.5-3), and “Wheels and

tires” (P.8-28).

Extended storage fuse warning message

The SHIP PHASE On/PUSH FUSE In warning

message may be displayed if the extended

storage fuse switch is not pushed in (switched

on). When this message is displayed, push in

(switch on) the extended storage fuse switch to

turn off the message. For more information, see

“Extended storage fuse switch” (P.8-20).

SIC4506

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the

engine into the red zone *

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce

engine speed. Operating the engine in

the red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

Instruments and controls 2-9

2-10 Instruments and controls

SIC4123

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE (Type B) (if so equipped)

The gauge *

1indicates the engine coolant

temperature.

The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range when the gauge is within the zone

2shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant

temperature near the hot (H) end of the

normal range, reduce vehicle speed to

decrease temperature. If gauge is over

the normal range, stop the vehicle as

soon as safely possible. If the engine is

overheated, continued operation of the

vehicle may seriously damage the en-

gine. See “If your vehicle overheats”

(P.6-11) for immediate action required.

JVI1324X

Type A (if so equipped)

SIC4124

Type B (if so equipped)

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge *

1indicates the approximate fuel

level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge

registers 0 (empty).

The low fuel warning light illuminates when

the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably

before the gauge reaches 0. There will be a

small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel

gauge reaches 0.

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the front passenger’s side of the

vehicle.

CAUTION

.If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator light (MIL)

may come on. Refuel as soon as

possible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

.For additional information, see

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”

(P.2-22).

JVI1325X

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

(Type A) (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the vehicle information display shows

the following information:

1. Outside air temperature

2. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-

tion indicator (if so equipped)

3. Twin trip odometer/Odometer/Trip computer/

Instrument brightness control display

Instruments and controls 2-11

2-12 Instruments and controls

SIC4531

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

(Type B) (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the vehicle information display shows

the following information:

1. Outside air temperature

2. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi-

tion indicator (if so equipped)

3. Odometer/Instrument brightness control display

4. Twin trip odometer/Trip computer

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

The outside air temperature is displayed in 8For

8C.

When the outside air temperature becomes

378F(38C) or lower, the outside air temperature

display blinks to give a warning. The display will

stop blinking after 1 minute or when the outside

air temperature becomes 398F(48C) or above.

The display may differ from the actual outside

temperature displayed on various signs or bill-

boards.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-

MISSION (CVT) POSITION INDICATOR

(if so equipped)

The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

position indicator indicates the shift lever posi-

tion when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

JVI1326X

Type A (if so equipped)

SIC4532

Type B (if so equipped)

TRIP COMPUTER

The switch for the trip computer is located on

the meter panel.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, modes of the trip computer can be

selected by pushing the trip computer mode

switch *

Each time the trip computer mode switch *

Ais

pushed, the display will change as follows:

For Type A (if so equipped):

ODO ?(TRIP A ?TRIP B) ?Current fuel

consumption ?Distance to empty (dte) ?

Average fuel consumption ?Torque vectoring

AWD (AWD model) ?ODO

For Type B (if so equipped):

(TRIP A ?TRIP B) ?Current fuel consumption

?Distance to empty (dte) ?Average fuel

consumption ?Elapsed time ?Torque vector-

ing AWD (AWD model) (?TRIP A)

Current fuel consumption

The current fuel consumption mode shows the

current fuel consumption.

Distance to empty (dte — mls or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The dte is constantly

being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in

the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warning

feature. When the fuel level is low, the dte mode

is automatically selected and the dte display will

blink. Push the trip computer mode switch *

to return to the mode that was selected before

the warning occurred.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte

display will change to “----”.

.If the amount of fuel added is small, the

display just before the ignition switch is

turned off may continue to be displayed.

.When driving uphill or rounding curves, the

fuel in the tank shifts, which may momenta-

rily change the display.

Average fuel consumption (mpg or l

(liter)/100 km)

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pushing the trip computer

mode switch *

Afor approximately 1 second.

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At

about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the

display shows “---”.

Elapsed time (Type B) (if so equipped)

The elapsed time mode shows the time since

the last reset. The displayed time can be reset

by pushing the trip computer mode switch *

for approximately 1 second.

Instruments and controls 2-13

2-14 Instruments and controls

JVI1327X

Type A (if so equipped)

SIC4600

Type B (if so equipped)

Torque vectoring AWD (AWD model)

The Torque vectoring mode shows the current

amount of torque distributed to each wheel.

Each torque indicator is displayed as a bar

graph *

1divided into 3 segments. The upper

indicator displays the current amount of torque

distribution (left and right) for the front wheels.

The lower indicator displays the current amount

of torque distribution (left and right) for the rear

wheels. The number of segments shows the

amount of torque currently distributed to each

wheel.

Resetting displays

For Type A (if so equipped):

When the average fuel consumption or TRIP B

is displayed, push the trip computer mode

switch *

Afor longer than 3 seconds. The

average fuel consumption and trip odometer

(TRIP B only) displays will be reset at the same

time.

For Type B (if so equipped):

When the average fuel consumption, elapsed

time or TRIP B is displayed, push the trip

computer mode switch *

Afor longer than 3

seconds. The average fuel consumption,

elapsed time and trip odometer (TRIP B only)

displays will be reset at the same time.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light (AWD

model) (if so equipped) Low fuel warning light Engine start operation indicator light

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light

Low tire pressure warning light Exterior light indicator

Low washer fluid warning light (if so

equipped) Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped)

Brake warning light

P position selecting warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Seat belt warning light High beam indicator light

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Door open warning light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light Security indicator light

Electric power steering warning light All-Wheel Drive (AWD) indicator light (AWD

model) (if so equipped) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light All-Wheel Drive (AWD)-V indicator light

(AWD model) (if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator

light

High temperature warning light (if so

equipped)

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

indicator light (if so equipped)

Intelligent Key system warning light Cruise indicator light

Instruments and controls 2-15

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-16 Instruments and controls

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake,

fasten the seat belts and place the ignition

switch in the ON position without starting the

engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will

come on:

, or , , , ,

The following lights (if so equipped) come on

briefly and then go off:

, , or , , , , ,

, ,

If any light does not come on or operates in a

way other than described, it may indicate a

burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. It

is recommended you have the system checked

by a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING LIGHTS

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning

light (AWD model)

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light will

illuminate. It will turn off soon after the engine is

started.

If the AWD system malfunctions or the revolu-

tion or radius of the front and the rear wheel

differs, the AWD warning light will either remain

illuminated or blink. (See “All-Wheel Drive

(AWD)” (P.5-29).)

or Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates

the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running, or while driving, it may

indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-

tance. (See “Brake system” (P.5-35).)

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake

and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light illuminates when the parking brake is

applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the

light illuminates while the engine is running with

the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle

and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid is

necessary, add fluid and have the system

checked. It is recommended you have this

service performed by a NISSAN dealer.

(See “Brake and clutch fluid” (P.8-9).)

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked. It is recommended

you have this service performed by a

NISSAN dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator:

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

brake system checked, and if necessary re-

paired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. (See “Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warning light” (P.2-16).)

WARNING

.Your brake system may not be

working properly if the warning light

is on. Driving could be dangerous. If

you judge it to be safe, drive care-

fully to the nearest service station

for repairs. Otherwise, have your

vehicle towed because driving it

could be dangerous.

.Pressing the brake pedal with the

engine stopped and/or low brake

fluid level may increase your stop-

ping distance and braking will re-

quire greater pedal effort as well as

pedal travel.

.If the brake fluid level is below the

minimum or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Charge warning light

If the light illuminates while the engine is running,

it may indicate the charging system is not

functioning properly. Turn the engine off and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,

broken, missing or if the light remains on, have

your vehicle serviced immediately. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the alternator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light illuminates when any of the doors and/

or liftgate are not closed securely while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

Electric power steering warning

light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the electric power steering warning light illumi-

nates. After starting the engine, the electric

power steering warning light turns off. This

indicates the electric power steering is opera-

tional.

If the electric power steering warning light

illuminates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the electric power steering is not

functioning properly and may need servicing.

Have the electric power steering checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

When the electric power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running, the power

assist to the steering will cease operation but

you will still have control of the vehicle. At this

time, greater steering efforts are required to

operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp

turns and at low speeds.

See “Electric power steering” (P.5-34).

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light flickers or illuminates during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other

authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is

not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See

“Engine oil” (P.8-5).)

Instruments and controls 2-17

2-18 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause

serious damage to the engine almost

immediately. Such damage is not cov-

ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as

soon as it is safe to do so.

High temperature warning light (if

so equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the high temperature warning light illuminates

and then turns off. This indicates that the high

temperature sensor in the engine coolant system

is operational.

CAUTION

.If the high temperature warning

light illuminates while the engine

is running, it may indicate the en-

gine temperature is extremely high.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as

possible. If the vehicle is over-

heated, continuing vehicle opera-

tion may seriously damage the

engine. (For the immediate action

required, see “If your vehicle over-

heats” (P.6-11).)

Intelligent Key system warning light

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds

and then turns off.

This light illuminates or blinks as follows:

.The light blinks in yellow when the door is

closed with the Intelligent Key left outside

the vehicle and the ignition switch in the

ACC or ON position. Make sure that the

Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

.The light blinks in green when the Intelligent

Key battery is running out of power. Replace

the battery with a new one. (See “Intelligent

Key battery replacement” (P.8-20).)

.The light illuminates in yellow when it warns

of a malfunction with Intelligent Key system.

If the warning light illuminates in yellow while the

engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start

the engine. If the light comes on while the engine

is running, you can drive the vehicle. However in

these cases, it is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as possible.

Low fuel warning light

This light illuminates when the fuel in the tank is

getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,

preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the 0

(empty) position.

There will be a small reserve of fuel

remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge

reaches the 0 position.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire

pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about 1 second

and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A

CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning mes-

sage is also displayed in the vehicle information

display.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label. The low tire pressure warning

light does not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to

the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

The low tire pressure warning light remains

illuminated until the tires are inflated to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK

TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each

time the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position as long as the low tire pressure warning

light remains illuminated.

For additional information, see “Check tire

pressure warning message” (P.2-9), “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-3) and

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6-

3).

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. The CHECK TIRE PRES

warning message is not displayed if the low tire

pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a

TPMS malfunction. Have the system checked. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

For additional information, see “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-3).

WARNING

.If the light does not illuminate with

the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, have the vehicle checked.

It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service as

soon as possible.

.If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle

speed, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop the vehicle as

soon as possible. Driving with un-

der-inflated tires may permanently

damage the tires and increase the

likelihood of tire failure. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low

tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light still illuminates while driv-

ing after adjusting the tire pressure,

a tire may be flat or the TPMS may

be malfunctioning. If you have a flat

tire, replace it with a spare tire as

soon as possible. If no tire is flat

and all tires are properly inflated, it

is recommended you consult a

NISSAN dealer.

.Since the spare tire is not equipped

with the TPMS, when a spare tire is

mounted or a wheel is replaced, the

TPMS will not function and the low

tire pressure warning light will flash

for approximately 1 minute. The

light will remain on after 1 minute.

Have your tires replaced and/or

TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for these

services.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

Instruments and controls 2-19

2-20 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

.The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure

to check the tire pressure regularly.

.If the vehicle is being driven at

speeds of less than 16 MPH (25

km/h), the TPMS may not operate

correctly.

.Be sure to install the specified size

of tires to the four wheels correctly.

Low washer fluid warning light

(Canada only)

This light illuminates when the washer fluid is at

a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. (See

“Window washer fluid” (P.8-9).)

P position selecting warning light

The warning light blinks in red when the ignition

switch is pushed to stop the engine with the

shift lever in any position except the P (Park)

position.

If this warning appears, move the shift lever to

the P (Park) position or push the ignition switch

to the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound.

See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-6).

Seat belt warning light

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat

belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, and will

remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is

fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound

for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt

is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the front

passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not

fastened when the front passenger’s seat is

occupied. For about 5 seconds after the ignition

switch is in the ON position, the system does

not activate the warning light for the front

passenger.

See “Seat belts” (P.1-10) for precautions on

seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning light

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning

light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the

supplemental front air bag and supplemental

side air bag, curtain air bag systems and/or

pretensioner seat belt are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and

pretensioner systems need servicing.

.The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

.The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

.The supplemental air bag warning light does

not illuminate at all.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental

Restraint Systems and/or the pretensioners may

not function properly.

For additional information, see “Supplemental

restraint system” (P.1-38).

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning

light illuminates and then turns off.

The light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system or the traction control

system is operating, thus alerting the driver that

the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road

surface may be slippery.

If the VDC warning light illuminates while the

VDC system is on, this light alerts the driver to

the fact that the VDC system’s fail-safe mode is

operating, for example the VDC system may not

be functioning properly. Have the system

checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. If a malfunction occurs in

the system, the VDC system function will be

canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For

additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” (P.5-37) of this manual.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) indicator

light (AWD model)

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) indicator light

illuminates and then turns off.

When selecting AWD mode while the engine is

running, the AWD indicator light illuminates.

(See “All-Wheel Drive (AWD)” (P.5-29).)

All-Wheel Drive (AWD-V) indicator

light (AWD model)

When selecting AWD-V mode while the engine

is running, the AWD-V indicator light illuminates.

(See “All-Wheel Drive (AWD)” (P.5-29).)

Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion (CVT) indicator light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

indicator light illuminates and then turns off.

Cruise indicator light

Cruise main switch indicator:

This light illuminates when the cruise control

main switch is pushed. The light turns off when

the main switch is pushed again. When the

cruise indicator light illuminates, the cruise

control system is operational.

Cruise malfunction:

If the cruise indicator light blinks while the

engine is running, it may indicate the cruise

control system is not functioning properly. Have

the system checked. It is recommended you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

See “Cruise control” (P.5-26).

Engine start operation indicator

light

This light appears when the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position (Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion (CVT) models) or N (Neutral) position

(Manual Transmission (MT) models). This light

means that the engine will start by pushing the

ignition switch with the brake pedal (CVT

models) or clutch pedal (MT models) depressed.

You can start the engine directly in any position.

Instruments and controls 2-21

2-22 Instruments and controls

Exterior light indicator

This indicator illuminates when the headlight

switch is turned to the AUTO (if so equipped),

or position and the front parking lights,

instrument panel lights, rear combination lights,

license plate lights or headlights are on. The

indicator turns off when these lights are turned

off.

Front fog light indicator light (if so

equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illuminates

when the front fog lights are on. (See “Fog light

switch” (P.2-44).)

Front passenger air bag status light

The front passenger air bag status light (located

on the center of the instrument panel) will be lit

and the passenger front air bag will be OFF

depending on how the front passenger seat is

being used.

For front passenger air bag status light opera-

tion, see “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)” (P.1-44) of this manual.

High beam indicator light

This light illuminates when the headlight high

beam is on and goes out when the low beam is

selected.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes on

steady or blinks while the engine is running, it

may indicate a potential emission control and/or

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) mal-

function.

The malfunction indicator light may also illumi-

nate steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check

to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and

closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3

US gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds

and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine

is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not

ready for an emission control system inspection/

maintenance test. (See “Readiness for Inspec-

tion/Maintenance (I/M) test” (P.10-21).)

Operation:

The malfunction indicator light will come on in

one of two ways:

.Malfunction indicator light illuminated steady

— An emission control system and/or CVT

malfunction has been detected. Check the

fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning message is displayed on the twin

trip odometer. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The light

should turn off after a few driving trips. If the

light does not turn off after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

.Malfunction indicator light blinking — An

engine misfire has been detected which may

damage the emission control system.

To reduce or avoid emission control system

damage:

1) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

2) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

3) Avoid steep uphill grades.

4) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop

blinking and remain on.

Have the vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service. You do not need to have your

vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

and/or CVT system checked and re-

paired as necessary could lead to poor

driveability, reduced fuel economy, and

possible damage to the emission con-

trol system.

Security indicator light

The light blinks when the ignition switch is in the

ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This function

indicates the security system equipped on the

vehicle is operational.

If the security system is malfunctioning, this light

will remain on while the ignition switch is in the

ON position. For additional information, see

“Security systems” (P.2-33).

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch

lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

indicator light

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator

light illuminates and then turns off.

The light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This

indicates that the VDC system and traction

control system are not operating.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

A chime will sound if the driver side door is

opened while the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC position.

Make sure the ignition switch is pushed to the

OFF position, and take the Intelligent Key with

you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

The light reminder chime will sound when the

driver side door is opened with the headlight

switch in the or position, and the

ignition switch is in the ACC, OFF or LOCK

position.

Turn the light switch off when you leave the

vehicle.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-

ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it

will make a high pitched scraping sound when

the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will

first occur only when the brake pedal is

depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,

the sound will always be heard even if the brake

pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the warning

sound is heard.

Parking brake reminder chime

The parking brake reminder chime will sound if

the vehicle is driven at more than 4 MPH (7

km/h) with the parking brake applied. Stop the

vehicle and release the parking brake.

Instruments and controls 2-23

2-24 Instruments and controls

Seat belt warning chime

The seat belt warning chime will sound for about

6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is

securely fastened.

The Integrated Control System is located below

the audio system or navigation system (if so

equipped). Two Integrated Control System

modes can be selected: Drive mode and

Climate Control mode.

Depending on which Integrated Control System

mode is selected (Drive mode or Climate

Control mode), the screen display and some

button functions will change.

.Drive mode

In the Drive mode, three types of driving

modes can be selected: NORMAL, SPORT

and ECO. See “Drive mode” (P.5-22). In

addition, while in the Drive mode, SETUP,

Drive information and ECO information can

be displayed and adjusted. See “Drive

mode” (P.2-24).

.Climate Control mode

In the Climate Control mode, the climate

control can be set and adjusted. See

“Automatic air conditioner (with Integrated

Control System)” (P.4-32).

DRIVE MODE

When the Drive mode select button is pressed,

the display and buttons appear as shown.

INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

SIC4623

1. Drive mode select button

2. SETUP button

3. Drive mode NORMAL button

4. Drive mode SPORT button

5. Drive mode ECO button

6. Display screen

7. Drive information button

8. ECO information button

9. ENTER button/Selection dial

SETUP FUNCTION

While in the Drive mode, the following items can

be set up by pressing the SETUP button.

.Display Brightness

.Button Brightness

.Clock Time Setting

.Select Language

.Select Units

.Auto Interior Illumination

.Selective Door unlock

.Auto Headlight Sensitivity (if so equipped)

.CLIMATE ECO

NOTE:

.The SETUP function cannot be ad-

justed while driving.

.When the battery is disconnected, the

SETUP memory is erased and reverts to

the default settings. If necessary, reset

the SETUP memory after reconnecting

the battery.

Instruments and controls 2-25

2-26 Instruments and controls

SIC4617

Setting Display Brightness and Button

Brightness

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Display Bright-

ness” or “Button Brightness” then press the

ENTER button.

SIC4557

4. Turn the Selection dial to + to increase

brightness or to íto decrease brightness,

then press the ENTER button to apply the

selection.

Display Brightness and Button Brightness can

be manually adjusted during the day (when the

headlight switch is off) or at night (when the

headlight switch is on).

When the bar is at the minimum or maximum

brightness level, the brightness level is the same

as the daytime level (headlight switch is on) or

nighttime level (headlight switch off).

Clock Time Setting

NOTE:

Clock Time Setting is used for displaying

the ECO information. See “Eco informa-

tion”(P.2-31).

SIC4558

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Clock Time

Setting”, then press the ENTER button.

SIC4559

4. Turn the Selection dial to select the day of

the week, then press the ENTER button to

apply the selection.

5. Turn the Selection dial to select the hour and

AM or PM, then press the ENTER button to

apply the selection.

6. Turn the Selection dial to select the minutes,

then press the ENTER button to apply the

selection.

SIC4560

Select Language

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Select Lan-

guage”, then press the ENTER button.

Instruments and controls 2-27

2-28 Instruments and controls

SIC4561

4. Turn the Selection dial to select the pre-

ferred language, then press the ENTER

button to apply the selection.

SIC4580

Select Units

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Select Units” then

press the ENTER button.

SIC4581

4. Turn the Selection dial to select “US” or

“METRIC”, then press the ENTER button to

apply the selection.

SIC4605

Auto Interior Illumination

Select to turn the illumination of the interior

lights on or off when any door is unlocked.

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Auto Interior

Illumination” then press the ENTER button

to switch on or off.

SIC4606

Selective Door Unlock

When this item is turned on, only the driver’s

door is unlocked after the door unlock operation

is performed once. All of the doors can be

unlocked if the door unlock operation is per-

formed again within 1 minute.

When this item is turned off, all the doors will be

unlocked after the door unlock operation is

performed once.

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Selective Door

Unlock” then press the ENTER button to

switch on or off.

SIC4607

Auto Headlight Sensitivity (if so

equipped)

Select to adjust the sensitivity of the automatic

headlight.

1. Press the Drive Mode Select button.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the Selection dial to “Auto Headlight

Sensitivity” then press the ENTER button.

Instruments and controls 2-29

2-30 Instruments and controls

SIC4583

4. Turn the Selection dial to + to increase

sensitivity or to íto decrease sensitivity,

then press the ENTER button to apply the

selection.

JVI0324X

DRIVE INFORMATION

While in the Drive mode, push the Drive

information button to display elapsed time,

average speed and trip distance. Pressing the

Drive information button a second time will

display the G (gravity)-Force screen.

Elapsed time

The elapsed time shows the time since the last

reset.

Average speed (km/h or MPH)

The average speed shows the average vehicle

speed since the last reset.

Trip distance (km or MILES)

The trip distance shows the distance driven

since the last reset.

To reset the elapsed time, average speed and

trip distance, push the ENTER button for more

than one second. All three drive information

displays will reset at the same time.

SIC4618

G-Force screen

The G (gravity)-Force screen displays the

current acceleration and deceleration (front-to-

rear) and cornering (side-to-side) G-Force on

the vehicle.

ECO INFORMATION

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display controls while

driving so that full attention may given

to vehicle operation.

The following ECO INFO mode will appear on

the display by pushing the ECO information

button, then turning the selection dial to scroll

through the different screens.

While driving, only one ECO information screen

is displayed. The vehicle must be stopped to

scroll through the different screens.

Instruments and controls 2-31

2-32 Instruments and controls

JVI1165X

Daily Reset

Records of up to the past 4 days of fuel

consumption can be shown on the display.

Weekly Reset

Records of up to the past 4 weeks of each

week’s fuel consumption can be shown on the

display.

NOTE:

When the clock is not set, the ECO

information (daily and weekly) cannot be

used.

Reset at Start

Records of up to the past 4 times of each time of

ignition switch ON fuel consumption can be

shown on the display.

Manual Reset

Records of up to the past 4 times of resetting

fuel consumption can be shown on the display.

The displayed ECO INFO can be reset by

pushing the ENTER button for longer than 1

second.

JVI1163X

Your vehicle has two types of security systems,

as follows:

.Vehicle security system

.NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by the

security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors,

or liftgate when the system is armed. It is not,

however, a motion detection type system that

activates when a vehicle is moved or when a

vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior

or exterior vehicle components in all situations.

Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle,

and always lock it when unattended. Be aware

of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit

areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection,

such as component locks, identification markers,

and tracking systems, are available at auto

supply stores and specialty shops. Your

NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment.

Check with your insurance company to see if

you may be eligible for discounts for various

theft protection features.

SIC2045

How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the

windows are open.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position

and remove the Intelligent Key from the

vehicle.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors

can be locked with:

.the LOCK button on the Intelligent

Key

.any request switch

.the power door lock switch

Instruments and controls 2-33

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-34 Instruments and controls

.the mechanical key

4. Confirm that the security indicator light

illuminates. The security indicator light stays

on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle

security system is now pre-armed. After

about 30 seconds the vehicle security

system automatically shifts into the armed

phase. The security light begins to flash

once every approximately 3 seconds. If,

during this 30-second pre-arm time period,

the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or ON position, the

system will not arm.

Even when the driver and/or passengers

are in the vehicle, the system will activate

with all doors locked with the ignition

switch in the LOCK position. When placing

the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the follow-

ing alarm:

.The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

.The alarm automatically turns off after

approximately 50 seconds. However, the

alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered

with again.

The alarm is activated by:

.Unlocking the door without using the

Intelligent Key, the request switch or the

key. (Even if the door is opened by releasing

the door inside lock knob, the alarm will

activate.)

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by

pushing the UNLOCK button on the

Intelligent Key, pushing the request switch or

using the key. The alarm will not stop if the

ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON

position.

If the system does not operate as de-

scribed above, have it checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-

TEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using the registered

key, it may be due to interference caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automated payment device on the key

ring. Restart the engine using the following

procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position and wait approximately 10

seconds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If this procedure allows the engine to start,

NISSAN recommends placing the regis-

tered key on a separate key ring to avoid

interference from other devices.

Statement related to section 15 of FCC

rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System (CONT ASSY-BCM. ANT ASSY-

IMMOBILISER)

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation

of the device.

SIC2045

Security indicator light

The security indicator light is located on the

meter panel. It indicates the status of the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.

The light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in

the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function

indicates the security systems equipped on the

vehicle are operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, seek service for the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as

soon as possible. Please bring all regis-

tered keys that you have. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Instruments and controls 2-35

2-36 Instruments and controls

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the windshield

and obscure your vision which may lead

to an accident. Warm windshield with

the defroster before you wash the

windshield.

CAUTION

.Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

.Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

.Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based washer fluid

concentrates may permanently stain

the grille if spilled while filling the

window washer reservoir tank.

.Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s

recommended levels before pouring

the fluid into the window washer

reservoir tank. Do not use the

window washer reservoir tank to

mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

If the windshield wiper operation is inter-

rupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop

moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,

turn the wiper switch to the OFF position

and remove the snow or ice that is on and

around the wiper arms. In approximately 1

minute, turn the switch on again to operate

the wiper. JVI1010X

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

1Intermittent — intermittent operation can be

adjusted by turning the knob toward *

(Slower) or *

B(Faster).

2Low — continuous low speed operation

3High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up *

4to have one sweep

operation of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you *

5to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several

times.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Pulling up the wiper arm:

The windshield wipers must be in the service

position in order to replace the wiper blades.

To move the wiper blades to the service position,

follow this procedure:

.When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position or within 60 seconds of placing the

ignition switch to the “OFF” position, lift the

lever up *

4two times in less than 0.5

seconds. The windshield wipers will move to

the service position automatically, and the

wiper blades can now be replaced. To

replace the wiper blades, see “Windshield

wiper blades” (P.8-15).

To move the wiper blades back to the original

position:

.Lift the lever up *

4or push the lever down

to operate at any wiper speed.

CAUTION

.This function can be operated even

if the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position. However, to prevent an

accident or damage when pulling

up the wiper arm, be sure to observe

the following precautions.

— Make sure the shift lever is in

the P (Park) position (Continu-

ously Variable Transmission

models).

— Make sure the shift lever is in

the N (Neutral) position, with the

parking brake fully applied

(Manual Transmission models).

— Never allow the passengers to

operate the windshield wiper

switch inadvertently.

.Do not operate the windshield wiper

while the wiper arm is pulled up. The

wiper arm may be damaged.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the rear window

glass and obscure your vision. Warm

the rear window with the defroster

before you wash the rear window.

CAUTION

.Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

.Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

.Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based washer fluid

concentrates may permanently stain

the grille if spilled while filling the

window washer reservoir tank.

.Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s

recommended levels before pouring

the fluid into the window washer

reservoir tank. Do not use the

Instruments and controls 2-37

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH

2-38 Instruments and controls

window washer reservoir tank to

mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

If the rear window wiper operation is

interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may

stop moving to protect its motor. If this

occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF

position and remove the snow or ice that is

on and around the wiper arms. In approxi-

mately 1 minute, turn the switch on again

to operate the wiper.

SIC3666

The rear window wiper and washer operate

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position

to operate the wiper.

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation (not

adjustable)

2Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward *

3to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several

times.

SIC4520

Type A (if so equipped)

SIC4519

Type B (if so equipped)

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and

outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine

and push the switch *

1on. The indicator light

2will illuminate. Push the switch again to turn

the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approximately 15

minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window defroster.

XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so equipped)

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

.When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent

an electric shock, never attempt to

modify or disassemble. It is recom-

mended to have your xenon head-

lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer.

.Xenon headlights provide consider-

ably more light than conventional

headlights. If they are not correctly

aimed, they might temporarily blind

an oncoming driver or the driver

ahead of you and cause a serious

accident. If headlights are not aimed

correctly, it is recommended to take

your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and

have the headlights adjusted cor-

rectly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on,

its brightness or color varies slightly. However,

the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

.The life of xenon headlights will be

shortened by frequent on-off opera-

tion. It is generally desirable not to turn

off the headlights for short intervals

(for example, when the vehicle stops at

a traffic signal).

.If the xenon headlight bulb is close to

burning out, the brightness will drasti-

cally decrease, the light will start

blinking, or the color of the light will

become reddish. If one or more of the

above signs appear, it is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Instruments and controls 2-39

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

2-40 Instruments and controls

SIC3668

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

1Turn the switch to the position:

The front parking, side marker, tail, license plate,

instrument lights will come on. However, the

daytime running light (for NISMO models and

Canada) will turn off.

2Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the other lights

remain on. However, the daytime running light

(for NISMO models and Canada) will turn off.

SIC3669

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to be

set so they turn on and off automatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position *

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the

headlights on and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch

to the OFF, or position.

The autolight system can turn on the headlights

automatically when it is dark and turn off the

headlights when it is light.

The headlights will also be turned on automa-

tically at twilight or in rainy weather (when the

windshield wiper is operated continuously).

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position and one of the doors is opened and this

condition is continued, the headlights remain on

for 5 minutes.

SAA1232

Be sure not to put anything on top of the

photo sensor *

1located on the top of the

instrument panel. The photo sensor con-

trols the autolight; if it is covered, the

photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the

headlights will illuminate.

Automatic headlights off delay

You can keep the headlights on for up to 45

seconds after you place the ignition switch in the

OFF position and open any door then close all

the doors.

SIC3670

Headlight beam select

1To select the low beam, put the lever in the

neutral position as shown.

2To select the high beam, push the lever forward

while the switch is in the position. Pull it

back to select the low beam.

3Pulling the lever toward you will flash the

headlight high beam even when the headlight

switch is in the OFF position.

Battery saver system

.When the headlight switch is in the or

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position, the lights will automatically

turn off within a period of time after the

ignition switch has been placed in the OFF

position.

.When the headlight switch remains in the

or position after the lights auto-

matically turn off, the lights will turn on when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

CAUTION

.When you turn on the headlight

switch again after the lights auto-

matically turn off, the lights will not

turn off automatically. Be sure to

turn the light switch to the OFF

position when you leave the vehicle

for extended periods of time, other-

wise the battery will be discharged.

.Never leave the light switch on

when the engine is not running for

extended periods of time even if the

headlights turn off automatically.

Instruments and controls 2-41

2-42 Instruments and controls

Daytime running light system (for NISMO

models and Canada)

The daytime running lights automatically illumi-

nate when the engine is started with the parking

brake released. The daytime running lights

operate with the headlight switch in the OFF

position. Turn the headlight switch to the

position for full illumination when driving at night.

(The daytime running lights will turn off.)

If the parking brake is applied before the engine

is started, the daytime running lights do not

illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate

once the parking brake is released. The daytime

running lights will remain on until the ignition

switch is placed in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system

is active, tail lights on your vehicle are

not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on

your headlights. Failure to do so could

cause an accident injuring yourself and

others.

JVI1342X

Type A (if so equipped)

JVI1343X

Type A (if so equipped)

SIC4517

Type B (if so equipped)

SIC4129

Type B (if so equipped)

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the control knob *

Ato adjust the bright-

ness of the instrument panel lights. The bright-

ness indicator *

Bwill be shown briefly in the

vehicle information display when the control is

turned.

When the brightness level reaches the maximum

or minimum, a beep will sound.

SIC3671

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

1Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning

direction. When the turn is completed, the turn

signals cancel automatically.

2Lane change signal

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal

begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to

signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane

change is completed.

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal

begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and

release the lever. The turn signal will automati-

cally flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane

change based on road and traffic conditions.

Instruments and controls 2-43

2-44 Instruments and controls

SIC3672

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the position, then turn the switch

to the position. To turn them off, turn the

switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on for the fog lights to

operate. The fog lights automatically turn off

when the high beam headlights are selected.

SIC4521

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of

the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system.

Tampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury.

SIC4544

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most

driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.

If maximum engine power is needed to free a

stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator light will illuminate.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine to turn on the system. (See “Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-37).)

HORN VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occupants

cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

body parts that contact the seat. Use of

the seat heater by such people could

result in serious injury.

CAUTION

.The battery could run down if the

seat heater is operated while the

engine is not running.

.Do not use the seat heater for

extended periods or when no one

is using the seat.

.Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a

blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.

Otherwise, the seat may become

overheated.

.Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in

damage to the heater.

.Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately

with a dry cloth.

.When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar

materials.

.If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice. SIC2770

The seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The

switches located on the center console can be

operated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

1For high heat, push the HI (High) side of

the switch.

2For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of

the switch.

The indicator light in the switch *

3will

illuminate when the heater is on.

3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to

the level position. Make sure the indicator

light goes off.

Instruments and controls 2-45

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

2-46 Instruments and controls

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or

before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn

off the switch.

SIC4525

The power outlet is located in the instrument

panel.

CAUTION

.The outlet and plug may be hot

during or immediately after use.

.Do not use with accessories that

exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power

draw. Do not use double adapters or

more than one electrical accessory.

.Use power outlet with the engine

running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

.Avoid using power outlet when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear

window defroster is on.

.This power outlet is not designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit.

.Push the plug in as far as it will go.

If good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

.Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical acces-

sory being used is turned OFF.

.When not in use, be sure to close

the cap. Do not allow water or any

liquid to contact the outlet.

POWER OUTLET

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

.Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used

to prevent spilling the drink. If the

liquid is hot, it can scald you or your

passenger.

.Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

SIC4527

Center console

SIC4528

Door (front and rear)

Soft bottle holders

CAUTION

.Do not use bottle holder for any

other objects that could be thrown

about in the vehicle and possibly

injure people during sudden braking

or an accident.

.Do not use bottle holder for open

liquid containers.

Instruments and controls 2-47

STORAGE

2-48 Instruments and controls

SIC4529

CARGO FLOOR BOX

1. To open the cargo floor box, pull the board

SIC4526

GLOVE BOX

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving

to help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

To open the glove box, pull the handle.

To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.

The glove box light illuminates when the head-

light switch is turned on.

SIC3505

COAT HOOK

The coat hook is located above the rear side

window.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 2

kg (4 lb) to the hook.

CARGO COVER (if so equipped)

WARNING

.Never put anything on the cargo

cover, no matter how small. Any

object on it could cause an injury

in an accident or sudden stop.

.Do not leave the cargo cover in the

vehicle with it disengaged from the

holder.

.The child restraint top tether strap

may be damaged by contact with

the cargo cover or items in the

luggage area. Remove the cargo

cover from the vehicle or secure it

and any luggage. Your child could

be seriously injured or killed in a

collision if the top tether strap is

damaged.

The cargo cover keeps the luggage compart-

ment contents hidden from the outside.

SIC4584

To install the cargo cover:

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Fix the clip *

Aon the liftgate lower garnish.

3. Fix the clip *

Bon the liftgate side garnish.

4. Hook the rope on the clip located on the

liftgate side garnish.

To remove the cargo cover:

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove the rope from the liftgate side

garnish.

3. Remove the clip *

Bfrom the liftgate side

garnish.

4. Remove the clip *

Afrom the liftgate lower

garnish.

Instruments and controls 2-49

2-50 Instruments and controls

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

.Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before

closing the windows. Use the win-

dow lock switch to prevent unex-

pected use of the power windows.

.To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of

the vehicle and or its systems,

including entrapment in windows

or inadvertent door lock activation,

do not leave children, people who

require the assistance of others or

pets unattended in your vehicle.

Additionally, the temperature inside

a closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is in the ON position, or for about 45

seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position. If the driver’s or front passenger’s

door is opened during this period of about 45

seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

SIC4533

1. Window lock button

2. Driver side window

3. Rear left passenger side window

4. Front passenger side window

5. Rear right passenger side window

Main power window switch (driver’s

side)

To open or close the window, push down *

Aor

pull up *

Bthe switch and hold it. The main

switch (driver side switches) will open or close

all the windows.

WINDOWS

Locking passengers’ windows

When the lock button *

Cis pushed in, only the

driver side window can be opened or closed.

Push it in again to cancel.

SIC4523

Passenger side power window switch

The passenger side switch will open or close

only the corresponding window. To open or

close the window, push down or pull up the

switch and hold it.

SIC4524

Automatic operation

The automatic operation is available for the

switch that has an mark on its surface.

To fully open or close the window, completely

push down or pull up the switch and release it;

the switch need not be held. The window will

automatically open or close all the way. To stop

the window, just push or lift the switch in the

opposite direction.

A light push or pull on the switch will cause the

window to open or close until the switch is

released.

Instruments and controls 2-51

2-52 Instruments and controls

Auto-reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

window.

If the control unit detects something caught in

the window as it is closing, the window will be

immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be activated when

the window is closed by automatic operation

when the ignition switch is in the ON position or

for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed

in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window

occurs.

If the windows do not close automatically

If the power window automatic function (closing

only) does not operate properly, perform the

following procedure to initialize the power

window system.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Close the door.

3. Open the window completely by operating

the power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to

close the window, and then hold the switch

more than 3 seconds after the window is

closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch. Operate

the window by the automatic function to

confirm the initialization is complete.

If the power window automatic function does

not operate properly after performing the pro-

cedure above, it is recommended you have your

vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

.In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle through an open

moonroof. Always use seat belts

and child restraints.

.Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out

of the moonroof opening while the

vehicle is in motion or while the

moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

.Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the moonroof before

opening.

.Do not place any heavy object on

the moonroof or surrounding area.

POWER MOONROOF

The moonroof only operates when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

The moonroof is operational for about 45

seconds, even if the ignition switch is pushed

to the OFF position. If the driver’s door or the

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

passenger’s door is opened during this period of

about 45 seconds, power to the moonroof is

canceled.

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automatically when the

moonroof is opened. However, it must be closed

manually.

SIC4624

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open or close the moonroof, push the

switch toward *

1or *

2and release

it; it need not be held. The roof will automatically

open or close all the way. To stop the roof, push

the switch in any direction while it is opening or

closing.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt up, first close the moonroof by pushing the

switch toward *

2. Push the switch toward

2again and release it; it need not be

held. To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch

toward *

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

moonroof.

If the control unit detects something caught in

the moonroof when it is closing, the moonroof

will be immediately opened.

The auto reverse function can be activated when

the moonroof is closed by automatic operation

when the ignition switch is in the ON position or

for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position.

If the moonroof cannot be closed automatically

when the auto reverse function activates due to

a malfunction, push and hold the switch toward

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the moonroof

occurs.

Instruments and controls 2-53

2-54 Instruments and controls

If the moonroof does not operate

If the moonroof does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initialize the

moonroof operation system.

1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by

repeatedly pushing the switch toward

2. Push and hold the switch toward *

2to

tilt the moonroof up.

3. Release the moonroof switch after the

moonroof moves slightly up and down.

4. Push and hold the switch toward *

1to

fully tilt the moonroof down.

5. Check if the moonroof switch operates

normally.

If the moonroof does not operate properly after

performing the procedure above, have your

moonroof checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could

result in a discharged battery.

SIC4572

MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)

Operate the map light switch to turn the map

light on or off.

1: ON position

2: OFF position

INTERIOR LIGHTS

SIC4573

MAP LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH (if so

equipped)

The map lights control switch has three posi-

tions: ON *

1, OFF *

2and center.

ON position

When the switch is in the ON position *

1, the

map lights will illuminate.

OFF position

When the switch is in the OFF position *

2, the

map lights will not illuminate, regardless of the

condition.

Center position

When the switch is in the center position, the

map lights will illuminate under the following

conditions:

.ignition switch is placed in the OFF position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

.doors are unlocked by pushing the UN-

LOCK button (on the Intelligent Key) or

the request switch with the ignition switch in

the LOCK position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

.any door is opened and then closed with the

ignition switch in the LOCK position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

.any door is opened with the ignition switch

in the ACC or ON position

— remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights go

off.

The lights will turn off after a period of

time when the lights remain illuminated to

prevent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

CARGO LIGHT

The cargo room lights illuminate when the

liftgate is opened. When the liftgate is closed,

the lights will turn off.

Instruments and controls 2-55

2-56 Instruments and controls

MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys .............................................................................................. 3-2
Intelligent Keys ..................................................................... 3-2
Doors ............................................................................................ 3-4
Locking with key .................................................................. 3-4
Locking with inside lock knob .......................................... 3-4
Locking with power door lock switch ............................ 3-5
Automatic door locks ......................................................... 3-5
Child safety rear door lock ............................................... 3-6
Intelligent Key system .............................................................. 3-6
Intelligent Key operating range ........................................ 3-8
Door locks/unlocks precaution ........................................ 3-8
Intelligent Key operation .................................................... 3-9
Battery saver system ....................................................... 3-10
Warning lights and audible reminders ........................ 3-10
Troubleshooting guide ..................................................... 3-11
How to use remote keyless entry function ................ 3-12
Hood ......................................................................................... 3-15
Liftgate ..................................................................................... 3-16
Front side and rear unique parts (NISMO models) ..... 3-17
Fuel-filler door ........................................................................ 3-18
Opening the fuel-filler door ......................................... 3-18
Fuel-filler cap .................................................................. 3-18
Tilt steering column .............................................................. 3-20
Tilt operation ................................................................... 3-20
Sun visors ................................................................................ 3-21
Mirrors ..................................................................................... 3-21
Inside mirror ..................................................................... 3-21
Outside mirrors ............................................................... 3-22
Vanity mirror ..................................................................... 3-23

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe

place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If

you lose your keys, it is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key

number. NISSAN does not record any key

numbers so it is very important to keep track of

your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated

without knowing the key number.

SPA2406

1. Intelligent Key (2 sets)

2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2 sets)

3. Key number plate

INTELLIGENT KEYS

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to your

vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System compo-

nents. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. The new

keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer

prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your

vehicle. Since the registration process requires

erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-

nents when registering new keys, be sure to take

all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN

dealer.

CAUTION

.Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when driving. The Intelli-

gent Key is a precision device with a

built-in transmitter. To avoid dama-

ging it, please note the following.

— The Intelligent Key is water

resistant; however, wetting may

damage the Intelligent Key. If

the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is com-

pletely dry.

— Do not bend, drop or strike it

against another object.

— If the outside temperature is

below 148F (-108C) degrees, the

battery of the intelligent key

may not function properly.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key

for an extended period in a

place where temperatures ex-

ceed 1408F (608C).

KEYS

— Do not change or modify the

Intelligent Key.

— Do not use a magnet key holder.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key

near an electric appliance such

as a television set, personal

computer or cellular phone.

— Do not allow the Intelligent Key

to come into contact with water

or salt water, and do not wash it

in a washing machine. This

could affect the system function.

.If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,

NISSAN recommends erasing the ID

code of that Intelligent Key. This will

prevent the Intelligent Key from

unauthorized use to unlock the

vehicle. For information regarding

the erasing procedure, it is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer.

SPA2033

Mechanical key

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock

knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into

the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to

the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the

doors. (See “Doors” (P.3-4).)

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key in-

stalled in the Intelligent Key.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

.Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping

to prevent persons from being

thrown from the vehicle. This also

helps keep children and others from

unintentionally opening the doors,

and will help keep out intruders.

.Before opening any door, always

look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

.To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of

the vehicle and or its systems,

including entrapment in windows

or inadvertent door lock activation,

do not leave children, people who

require the assistance of others or

pets unattended in your vehicle.

Additionally, the temperature inside

a closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

SPA2602

LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock

or unlock all doors simultaneously.

.Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the

front of the vehicle *

1will lock all doors and

the liftgate.

.Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once

to the rear of the vehicle *

2will unlock the

driver’s door. After returning the key to the

neutral position, turning it to the rear again

within 5 seconds will unlock all doors and

the liftgate.

SPA2603

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position *

1then close the

door.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the

unlock position *

When locking the door without a key, be

sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

DOORS

SPA2803

Driver’s armrest

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK

SWITCH

Operating the power door lock switch will lock

or unlock all the doors. The switch is located on

the driver’s door armrest.

To lock the doors, push the power door lock

switch to the lock position *

1with the driver’s

door open, then close the door.

When locking the door this way, be sure

not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock the doors, push the power door lock

switch to the unlock position *

Lockout protection

Lockout protection function helps to prevent the

keys from being accidentally locked inside the

vehicle.

.When the power door lock switch is moved

to the lock position with the ignition switch

placed in the ACC or ON position and any

door open, all doors will lock and then

unlock automatically.

.When the power door lock switch is moved

to the lock position with the Intelligent Key

left in the vehicle and any door open, all

doors will unlock automatically and a chime

will sound after the door is closed.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

.All doors lock automatically when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

.All doors unlock automatically when the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The automatic unlock function can be

deactivated or activated.

To deactivate or activate the automatic door

unlock system, perform the following procedure.

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Within 20 seconds, push and hold the

power door lock switch to the (UN-

LOCK) position for more than 5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard warning lights

will flash twice. When deactivated, the

hazard warning lights will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the

OFF and ON position again between each

setting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is

deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the

ignition is placed in the OFF position. To unlock

the door manually, use the inside lock knob or

the power door lock switch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2801

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety rear door locks help prevent the rear

doors from being opened accidentally, espe-

cially when small children are in the vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock position

1, the rear doors can be opened only

from the outside.

To disengage, move the levers to the unlock

position *

WARNING

.Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

.The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are

pushed. The FAA advises that the

radio waves may affect aircraft na-

vigation and communication sys-

tems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an airplane.

Make sure the buttons are not

operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored during a flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the

door locks using the remote controller function

or pushing the request switch on the vehicle

without taking the key out from a pocket or

purse. The operating environment and/or condi-

tions may affect the Intelligent Key system

operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

.Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when operating the vehi-

cle.

.Never leave the Intelligent Key in

the vehicle when you leave the

vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with

the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The

Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio

waves. Environmental conditions may interfere

with the operation of the Intelligent Key system

under the following operating conditions.

.When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such

as a TV tower, power station and broad-

casting station.

.When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular phone, transceiver, and

CB radio.

.When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

.When any type of radio wave remote control

is used nearby.

.When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

computer.

.When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions

before using the Intelligent Key function or use

the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending

on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is

approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-

charged, replace it with a new one.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiv-

ing radio waves, if the key is left near equipment

which transmits strong radio waves, such as

signals from a TV and personal computer, the

battery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a

battery, see “Intelligent Key battery replacement”

(P.8-20).

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered

and used with one vehicle. For information about

the purchase and use of additional Intelligent

Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

.Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo-

nents, to come into contact with

water or salt water. This could affect

the system function.

.Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

.Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

.Do not change or modify the Intel-

ligent Key.

.Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is comple-

tely dry.

.If the outside temperature is below

148F(í108C) degrees, the battery of

the Intelligent Key may not function

properly.

.Do not place the Intelligent Key for

an extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).

.Do not attach the Intelligent Key

with a key holder that contains a

magnet.

.Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a mag-

netic field, such as a TV, audio

equipment, personal computers or

cellular phone.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent

the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to

operate the vehicle. For information regarding

the erasing procedure, it is recommended that

you contact a NISSAN dealer.

The Intelligent Key function can be disabled. For

information about disabling the Intelligent Key

function, it is recommended that you contact a

NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2074

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING

RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range from the request switch *

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

strong radio waves are present near the operat-

ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-

ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent

Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)

from each request switch *

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper, the request

switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone who does not

carry the Intelligent Key to push the request

switch to lock/unlock the doors including the

liftgate.

SPA2407

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-

TION

.Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system

to have difficulty recognizing that the In-

telligent Key is outside the vehicle.

.After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked

by testing them.

.To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

key with you and then lock the doors.

.Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door

will be unlocked but will not open. Release

the door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

SPA2408

SPA2710

SPA2545

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the key out from your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you

can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door

handle request switch (driver’s or front passen-

ger’s) *

Aor liftgate request switch *

Bwithin

the range of operation.

When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard

indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside

chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details,

see “Setting hazard indicator and horn mode”

(P.3-13).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position

and carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push the door handle request switch (dri-

ver’s or front passenger’s) *

Aor the liftgate

request switch *

Bwhile carrying the

Intelligent Key with you.*3

4. All the doors and the liftgate will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

outside chime sounds twice.

*1: Doors will lock with the request switch while the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the request switch while

any door is open.

*3: Doors will not lock with the request switch when

the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle.

However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle, doors can be locked with another

registered Intelligent Key.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the door handle request switch *

Aor

the liftgate request switch *

Bwhile carry-

ing the Intelligent Key with you.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-

side chime sounds once. The corresponding

door or the liftgate will unlock.

3. Push the request switch again within 1

minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-

side chime sounds once again. All the doors

and the liftgate will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within 1

minute after pushing the request switch while

the doors are locked.

.Opening any door.

.Pushing the ignition switch.

During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all

doors will be locked automatically after another

1 minute.

Opening liftgate

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the liftgate opener switch *

3. The liftgate will unlock.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are met for a

period of time, the battery saver system will cut

off the power supply to prevent battery dis-

charge.

.The ignition switch is in the ACC position,

and

.All doors are closed, and

.The shift lever is in the P (Park) position

(Continuously Variable Transmission mod-

els).

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE

REMINDERS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the

Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or

to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen,

chime or beep sounds inside and outside the

vehicle and a warning light illuminates or blinks.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warning

light illuminates or blinks, be sure to check the

vehicle and Intelligent Key.

See “Troubleshooting guide” (P.3-11) and

“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders” (P.2-15).

Intelligent Key system warning light:

P position selecting warning light:

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the ignition switch

to stop the engine

The P position selecting warning light in the

meter illuminates and the inside warning chime

sounds continuously (Continuously Variable

Transmission models).

The shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position. Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

When shifting the shift lever to the

P (Park) position.

The inside warning chime sounds continuously

(Continuously Variable Transmission models).

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

When opening the driver’s door

to get out of the vehicle The inside warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is in the ACC

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

When closing the door after get-

ting out of the vehicle

The Intelligent Key system warning light in the

meter blinks in yellow, and the outside chime

sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime

sounds for a few seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

The P position selecting warning light in the

meter illuminates and the outside chime

sounds continuously (Continuously Variable

Transmission models).

The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF

position and the shift lever is not in the P

(Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position

and push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

When closing the door with the

inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds

and all the doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the request switch

or the LOCK button on the

Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

When pushing the ignition switch

to start the engine

The Intelligent Key system warning light in the

meter blinks in green. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. (See

“Intelligent Key battery replacement” (P.8-

20).)

The Intelligent Key system warning light in the

meter blinks in yellow and the inside warning

chime sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch The Intelligent Key system warning light in the

meter illuminates in yellow.

It warns of a malfunction with the

Intelligent Key system.

It is recommended that you contact a

NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY FUNCTION

WARNING

.Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

.The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are

pushed. The FAA advises that the

radio waves may affect aircraft na-

vigation and communication sys-

tems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an airplane.

Make sure the buttons are not

operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored during a flight.

CAUTION

.Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo-

nents, to come into contact with

water or salt water. This could affect

the system function.

.Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

.Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

.Do not change or modify the Intel-

ligent Key.

.Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is comple-

tely dry.

.If the outside temperature is below

148F (-108C) degrees, the battery of

the intelligent key may not function

properly.

.Do not place the Intelligent Key for

an extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).

.Do not attach the Intelligent Key

with a key holder that contains a

magnet.

.Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a mag-

netic field, such as a TV, audio

equipment, personal computers or

cellular phone.

The remote keyless entry function can operate

all door locks using the remote keyless entry

function of the Intelligent Key. The remote

keyless entry function can operate at a distance

of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.

(The operating distance depends upon the

conditions around the vehicle.)

The remote keyless entry function will not

operate:

.When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

.When the doors are open or not closed

securely.

.When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

The remote keyless entry function can also

operate the vehicle alarm.

SPA2252

1LOCK button

2UNLOCK button

3PANIC button

When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard

indicator will flash and the horn will sound as a

confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard

indicator and horn mode” (P.3-13).

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position

and carry the Intelligent Key with you.*

2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

3. Close all the doors.

4. Push the LOCK button *

1on the

Intelligent Key.

5. All the doors and the liftgate will lock.

6. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once.

*: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Operate the door handles to confirm that the

doors have been securely locked.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the UNLOCK button *

2on the

Intelligent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The

driver’s door will unlock.

3. Push the UNLOCK button again within

1 minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once. All the

doors and the liftgate will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within 1

minute after pushing the UNLOCK button

while the doors are locked.

.Opening any door (including the liftgate).

.Pushing the ignition switch.

During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK

button is pushed, all doors will be locked

automatically after another 1 minute.

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the alarm to call attention as

follows:

1. Push the PANIC button *

3on the

Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will

stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

.It has run for 25 seconds, or

.Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key

is pushed. (Note: the PANIC button must

be pushed for more than 1 second.)

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn

mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

LOCK button *

1is pushed, the hazard

indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.

When the UNLOCK button *

2is pushed,

the hazard indicator flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the system can be

switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes

twice. When the UNLOCK button is

pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

horn operates. Hazard indicator and horn mode:

Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Pushing door handle request switch

or liftgate request switch

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - twice

HAZARD - once

OUTSIDE CHIME - once

Pushing or button HAZARD - twice

HORN - once

HAZARD - once

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode:

Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Pushing door handle request switch

or liftgate request switch

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

HAZARD - none

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

Pushing or button HAZARD - twice

HORN - none

HAZARD - none

HORN - none

Switching procedure:

To switch the hazard indicator and horn (chime)

operation, push the LOCK *

1and UN-

LOCK *

2buttons on the Intelligent Key

simultaneously for more than 2 seconds.

.When the hazard indicator mode is set, the

hazard indicator flashes 3 times.

.When the hazard indicator and horn mode is

set, the hazard indicator flashes once and

the horn chirps once.

WARNING

.Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the

hood to fly open and result in an

accident.

.If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

HOOD

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

JVP0338X

When opening the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handle *

1located

below the instrument panel; the hood will

then spring up slightly.

2. Locate the lever *

2in between the hood

and grille, and pull the lever up with your

fingertips.

3. Raise the hood *

4. Remove the support rod *

4and insert it

into the slot *

Hold the coated part *

Awhen removing or

resetting the support rod. Avoid direct

contact with the metal parts, as they may

be hot immediately after the engine has

been stopped.

When closing the hood:

1. While supporting the hood, return the

support rod to its original position.

2. Slowly lower the hood to about 8 to 12 in

(20 to 30 cm) above the hood lock, then let

it drop.

3. Make sure it is securely latched.

WARNING

.Always be sure the liftgate has been

closed securely to prevent it from

opening while driving.

.Do not drive with the liftgate open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle.

See “Exhaust gas (carbon monox-

ide)”(P.5-2) of this manual.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

.Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle

before closing the liftgate.

LIFTGATE

JVP0339X

To open the liftgate, unlock it and push the

liftgate opener switch *

A. Pull up the liftgate to

open.

The liftgate can be unlocked by:

.pushing the UNLOCK button on the

Intelligent Key twice.

.pushing the liftgate request switch with the

Intelligent Key carried with you.

.pushing the power door lock switch to the

unlock position.

.inserting the key into the driver’s door key

cylinder and turning it to the rear of the

vehicle twice.

The NISMO models have the following unique

parts on the front, side and rear of the vehicle.

.Front bumper

.Daytime running light (P.2-42, P.8-23,

P.8-26)

.Side sill extensions

.Rear spoiler (P.7-3)

JVP0351X

CAUTION

Do not place your foot on or step on the

front bumper. Also, do not step on the

side sill extensions when getting in or

out of the vehicle. Doing so may result

in damage to the front bumper and side

sill extensions.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

FRONT SIDE AND REAR UNIQUE

PARTS (NISMO models)

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2336

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, pull the release

handle located below the instrument panel. To

lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.

SPA2800

FUEL-FILLER CAP

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise *

to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder *

while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-

filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise *

2until a

single click is heard.

WARNING

.Gasoline is extremely flammable

and highly explosive under certain

conditions. You could be burned or

seriously injured if it is misused or

mishandled. Always stop engine

and do not smoke or allow open

flames or sparks near the vehicle

when refueling.

.Do not attempt to top off the fuel

tank after the fuel pump nozzle

shuts off automatically. Continued

refueling may cause fuel overflow,

resulting in fuel spray and possibly

a fire.

.Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It

has a built-in safety valve needed

for proper operation of the fuel

system and emission control sys-

tem. An incorrect cap can result in a

serious malfunction and possible

injury. It could also cause the mal-

function indicator light to come on.

.Never pour fuel into the throttle

body to attempt to start your vehi-

cle.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

.Do not fill a portable fuel container

in the vehicle or trailer. Static elec-

tricity can cause an explosion of

flammable liquid, vapor or gas in

any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the

risk of serious injury or death when

filling portable fuel containers:

— Always place the container on

the ground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices

when filling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

— Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

.If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid

paint damage.

.Insert the cap straight into the fuel-

filler tube, then tighten until the

fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tight-

en the fuel-filler cap properly may

cause the malfunction indicator

light (MIL) to illuminate. If the

light illuminates because the fuel-

filler cap is loose or missing, tighten

or install the cap and continue to

drive the vehicle. The light

should turn off after a few driving

trips. If the light does not turn

off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

For additional information, see

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”

(P.2-22).

.The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

message will be displayed if the

fuel-filler cap is not properly tigh-

tened. It may take a few driving trips

for the message to be displayed.

Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning message is displayed may

cause the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) to illuminate.

SPA2809

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message is

displayed on the vehicle information display

when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly

after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a

few driving trips for the message to be

displayed. To turn off the warning message, do

the following procedure:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

previously described as soon as possible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Push the trip computer mode switch *

Afor

about 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL

CAP warning message after tightening the

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

fuel cap.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

SPA2808

TILT OPERATION

Push the lock lever down *

1and adjust the

steering wheel up or down *

2to the desired

position.

Pull the lock lever up *

3securely to lock the

steering wheel in place.

TILT STEERING COLUMN

SIC3451

CAUTION

.Do not store the main sun visor

before storing the extension sun

visor.

.Do not pull the extension sun visor

forcedly downward.

1. To block out glare from the front, swing

down the main sun visor *

2. To block glare from the side, remove the

main sun visor from the center mount and

swing it to the side *

3. Draw out the extension sun visor *

3from

the main sun visor to block from further

glare.

SPA2447

INSIDE MIRROR

Adjust the angle of the inside mirror to the

desired position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

SUN VISORS MIRRORS

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2143

The night position *

1will reduce glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position *

2when driving in daylight

hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when ne-

cessary, because it reduces rear view

clarity.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

SPA2214

Adjusting outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is located at

the lower part of the instrument panel.

The outside mirror will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Move the switch right *

1or left *

2to select

the right or left side mirror, then adjust *

3using

the control switch.

Defrosting outside mirrors (if so

equipped)

The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear

window defroster switch is operated. (See “Rear

window and outside mirror defroster switch”

(P.2-38).)

SPA1829

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the

rear of the vehicle.

SIC3869

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun

visor and pull up the cover.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MEMO

4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone sys-
tems
Safety note .................................................................................. 4-3
Control buttons and functions (models with
navigation system) .................................................................... 4-3
How to use touch screen ................................................. 4-4
How to use the BACK button ......................................... 4-5
How to use the APPS·i button ........................................ 4-5
How to use brightness control button ........................... 4-8
How to use the ON·OFF button/Volume
control knob .......................................................................... 4-8
How to use the CAMERA button ................................... 4-8
RearView Monitor (models without
navigation system) .................................................................... 4-8
RearView Monitor system operation .............................. 4-9
How to read the displayed lines ..................................... 4-9
Adjusting the screen ....................................................... 4-11
RearView Monitor system limitations .......................... 4-11
System maintenance ....................................................... 4-12
Around View

Monitor (AVM) (models with
navigation system) ................................................................. 4-13
Around View

Monitor system operation ................... 4-14
How to adjust the screen view ..................................... 4-20
Around View

Monitor system limitations .................. 4-20
System maintenance ....................................................... 4-23
Moving Object Detection (MOD) (models with
navigation system) ................................................................ 4-24
MOD system operation ................................................ 4-24
MOD system limitations ............................................... 4-26
System maintenance ..................................................... 4-27
Ventilators ................................................................................ 4-27
Center ventilators ........................................................... 4-27
Side ventilators ............................................................... 4-28
Heater and air conditioner .................................................. 4-28
Manual air conditioner (if so equipped) ................... 4-29
Automatic air conditioner (with Integrated
Control System) ............................................................. 4-32
Operating tips (for automatic air conditioner) ........ 4-35
In-cabin microfilter ......................................................... 4-35
Servicing air conditioner .............................................. 4-35
Audio system .......................................................................... 4-35
Audio operation precautions ....................................... 4-35
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) player (if
so equipped) ................................................................... 4-45
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) player
(Type A) (if so equipped) ............................................. 4-53
FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) player
(Type B) (if so equipped) ............................................ 4-62

CD/USB memory care and cleaning .......................... 4-73
Steering wheel switch for audio control .................... 4-73
Antenna ............................................................................... 4-75
NissanConnect
SM
App smartphone integration ............. 4-75
Registering with NissanConnect
SM
App .................... 4-75
Connect phone ................................................................. 4-76
Application download ...................................................... 4-76
Siri

Eyes Free ....................................................................... 4-76
General Information ......................................................... 4-76
Requirements .................................................................... 4-77
Siri

Eyes Free Activation .............................................. 4-77
Operating Siri

Eyes Free ............................................. 4-77
Changing Siri

Eyes Free Settings (models without
navigation system) ........................................................... 4-78
Troubleshooting guide ..................................................... 4-79
Car phone or CB radio ........................................................ 4-80
Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System (models without
navigation system) ................................................................. 4-80
Regulatory information .................................................... 4-81
Using the system .............................................................. 4-82
Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System (models with
navigation system) ................................................................. 4-89
Regulatory information .................................................... 4-91
Voice command .............................................................. 4-91
Connecting procedure .................................................. 4-92
Vehicle phonebook ........................................................ 4-92
Making a call ................................................................... 4-92
Receiving a call .............................................................. 4-92
During a call .................................................................... 4-93
Ending a call ................................................................... 4-93
Text messaging ............................................................... 4-93
Bluetooth

settings ....................................................... 4-94
Phone settings ................................................................ 4-96
NISSAN Voice Recognition System (models with
navigation system) ................................................................ 4-96
Using the system ........................................................... 4-97
System features .............................................................. 4-98
Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands ............................................................ 4-98
Navigation system voice commands ......................... 4-99
Audio system voice commands ............................... 4-100
Information voice commands ................................... 4-100
My APPS voice commands ...................................... 4-100
Help voice commands ............................................... 4-100
Troubleshooting guide ............................................... 4-100

WARNING

.Do not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may result in

accidents, fire, or electric shock.

.Do not use this system if you notice

any abnormality, such as a frozen

screen or lack of sound. Continued

use of the system may result in

accident, fire or electric shock.

.In case you notice any foreign

object in the system hardware, spill

liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell

coming from it, stop using the

system immediately. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for servicing. Ignoring such condi-

tions may lead to accidents, fire, or

electric shock.

Do not attempt to operate the system in

extreme temperature conditions [below

í48F(í208C) and above 1588F (708C)].

Operating this system under these condi-

tions may result in system malfunctions.

JVH0733X

1. MAP button*

2. Display screen

3. button (P.4-89)

4. button (P.4-5)

5. (brightness control) button (P.4-8)

6. BACK button (P.4-5)

7. ON·OFF button/VOL (volume) control knob

(P.4-8)

8. CAMERA button (P.4-8)

9. NAV button*

*For information regarding the Navigation sys-

tem control buttons, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

SAFETY NOTE

CONTROL BUTTONS AND

FUNCTIONS (models with

navigation system)

4-4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

When you use this system, make sure the

engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will discharge the battery, and the

engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a

key shown only on the display. These keys can

be selected by touching the screen.

HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN

CAUTION

.The glass screen on the liquid

crystal display may break if it is hit

with a hard or sharp object. If the

glass screen breaks, do not touch it.

Doing so could result in an injury.

.To clean the display, never use a

rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thin-

ner or any kind of solvent or paper

towel with a chemical cleaning

agent. They will scratch or deterio-

rate the panel.

.Do not splash any liquid such as

water or car fragrance on the dis-

play. Contact with liquid will cause

the system to malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions

cannot be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available

while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then

operate the navigation system.

WARNING

.ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

.Avoid using vehicle features that

could distract you. If distracted,

you could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

JVH1248X

Touch screen operation

Selecting the item:

Touch an item to select. To select the “Audio”

key, touch the “Audio” key *

1on the screen.

Adjusting the item:

Touch the “+” key or the “í” key to adjust the

settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll

up the page. Touch the down arrow to scroll

down the page.

Inputting characters:

Touch the letter or number key. There are some

options available when inputting characters.

.123/ABC:

Changes the keyboard between numbers

and alphabets.

.Space:

Inserts a space.

.Delete:

Deletes the last inputted character with one

touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to

delete all of the characters.

.OK:

Completes the character input.

Touch screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a

small amount of neutral detergent with a soft

cloth. Never spray the screen with water or

detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe

the screen.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON

Push the BACK button to return to the previous

screen.

JVH0735X

HOW TO USE THE APPS·I BUTTON

For information about the “SiriusXM Travel Link”,

and “SiriusXM Traffic” features, see the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

For information about the “My Apps” key, see

“NissanConnect

App smartphone integration”

(P.4-75).

For information about the “Voice Commands”

key, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System

(models with navigation system)” (P.4-96).

JVH1249X

To select and/or adjust several functions,

features and modes that are available for your

vehicle:

1. Push the button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the desired item.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5

4-6 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Menu Item Result

Audio For more details, see “FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) player (Type B)” (P.4-62).

Navigation See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for more information.

Phone & Bluetooth For more details, see “Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System (models with navigation system)” (P.4-89).

System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will

appear.

Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.

Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.

Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are

suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.

Scroll Direction Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.

Clock Touch this key to adjust the time.

Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.

Date Format Select from five possible formats of displaying the day, month, and year.

Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows

you to set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key.

Set Clock Manually Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down.

“Clock Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available.

Daylight Savings Time Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.

Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list.

Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.

Camera Settings Touch this key to change the camera settings.

Display Mode Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).

Brightness Adjust touch-screen brightness.

Contrast Adjust touch-screen contrast.

Color Adjust touch-screen color.

Temperature Unit Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).

Touchscreen click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on

the screen is touched.

System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up

message appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pushed and held for 2

seconds.

Return to Factory Settings / Clear Memory Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

Software Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.

Traffic Touch this key to display traffic settings. See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for more

information.

SXM Touch this key to display SXM status information. For SXM setup, see “FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc

(CD) player (Type B)” (P.4-62).

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7

4-8 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON-

TROL BUTTON

To change the display brightness, push the

button. Pushing the button again will change the

display to the day or the night display.

If no operation is performed, the display will

return to the previous display.

Push and hold the button to turn the display

off. Push the button again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE ON·OFF BUTTON/

VOLUME CONTROL KNOB

Push the ON·OFF button to turn audio function

on and off. Turn the volume control knob to

adjust audio volume.

HOW TO USE THE CAMERA BUTTON

For more information regarding the CAMERA

button, see “Around View



Monitor (AVM)

(models with navigation system)” (P.4-13).

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor could result in serious

injury or death.

.The RearView Monitor is a conve-

nience but it is not a substitute for

proper backing. Always turn and

look out the windows, and check

mirrors to be sure that it is safe to

move before operating the vehicle.

Always back up slowly.

.The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in showing large station-

ary objects directly behind the vehi-

cle, to help avoid damaging the

vehicle.

.The distance guide line and the

vehicle width line should be used

as a reference only when the vehicle

is on a level paved surface. The

distance viewed on the monitor is

for reference only and may be

different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed

objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automatically

shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift

lever is placed in the “R” (Reverse) position.

The radio can still be heard while the RearView

Monitor is active.

REARVIEW MONITOR (models

without navigation system)

JVH1219X

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor

system uses a camera located just above the

vehicle’s license plate *

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OP-

ERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

move the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position

to operate the RearView Monitor.

SAA2776

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

bumper line *

Aare displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the bumper.

.Red line *

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

.Yellow line *

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

.Green line *

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

.Green line *

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines *

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Difference between predictive and actual

distances

The displayed guidelines and their locations on

the ground are for approximate reference only.

Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or

projecting objects will be actually located at

distances different from those displayed in the

monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to

illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and

view the objects as you are backing up, or park

and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of

objects behind the vehicle.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9

4-10 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH1159X

Backing up on a steep uphill:

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is farther than it

appears on the monitor.

JVH1160X

Backing up on a steep downhill:

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is closer than it

appears on the monitor.

SAA3440

Backing up near a projecting object:

The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object

in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the

object if it projects over the actual backing up

course.

SAA3475

Backing up behind a projecting object:

The position *

Cis shown farther than the

position *

Bin the display. However, the

position *

Cis actually at the same distance

as the position *

A. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position *

Aif

the object projects over the actual backing up

course.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button while the

RearView monitor screen is displayed.

2. Adjust the brightness using the

TUNE·FOLDER or TUNE·SCROLL control

knob.

3. Push the ENTER/SETTING button and

adjust the contrast using the TUNE·FOLDER

or TUNE·SCROLL control knob.

4. Push the ENTER/SETTING button to return

to the RearView monitor screen.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of

the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is

moving. Make sure the parking brake is

firmly applied.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIM-

ITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for RearView Monitor. Failure to oper-

ate the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in ser-

ious injury or death.

.The system cannot completely elim-

inate blind spots and may not show

every object.

.Underneath the bumper and the

corner areas of the bumper cannot

be viewed on the RearView Monitor

because of its monitoring range

limitation. The system will not show

small objects below the bumper,

and may not show objects close to

the bumper or on the ground.

.Objects viewed in the RearView

Monitor differ from actual distance

because a wide-angle lens is used.

.Objects in the RearView Monitor

will appear visually opposite com-

pared to when viewed in the rear

view and outside mirrors.

.Use the displayed lines as a refer-

ence. The lines are highly affected

by the number of occupants, fuel

level, vehicle position, road condi-

tions and road grade.

.Make sure that the liftgate is se-

curely closed when backing up.

.Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is

installed above the license plate.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11

4-12 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

.When washing the vehicle with

high-pressure water, be sure not to

spray it around the camera. Other-

wise, water may enter the camera

unit causing water condensation on

the lens, a malfunction, fire or an

electric shock.

.Do not strike the camera. It is a

precision instrument. Otherwise, it

may malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric

shock.

The following are operating limitations and do

not represent a system malfunction:

.When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display

objects.

.When strong light is directly coming on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

.Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light

from the bumper.

.The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

.The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual

color of objects.

.Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark environment.

.If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera, the RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera.

.Do not use wax on the camera window.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

dampened with mild detergent diluted with

water.

JVH1219X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

.Do not use alcohol, benzine or

thinner to clean the camera. This

will cause discoloration. To clean

the camera, wipe with a cloth dam-

pened with diluted mild cleaning

agent and then wipe with a dry

cloth.

.Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera

1, RearView Monitor may not display objects

clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a

cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

JVH1223X

1. CAMERA button

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for the proper use of the

Around View



Monitor system could

result in serious injury or death.

.The Around View



Monitor is a

convenient feature but it is not a

substitute for proper vehicle opera-

tion because it has areas where

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13

AROUND VIEW



MONITOR (AVM)

(models with navigation system)

4-14 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

objects cannot be viewed. The four

corners of the vehicle in particular,

are areas where objects do not

always appear in the bird’s-eye,

front, or rear views. Always check

your surroundings to be sure that it

is safe to move before operating the

vehicle. Always operate the vehicle

slowly. Always look out the win-

dows and check mirrors to be sure

that it is safe to move.

.The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the lens when cleaning

dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

The Around View



Monitor system is designed

as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot

parking or parallel parking.

The monitor displays various views of the

position of the vehicle in a split screen format.

All views are not available at all times.

Available views:

.Bird’s-eye view

The surrounding view of the vehicle.

.Front-side view

The view around and ahead of the front

passenger’s side wheel.

.Front view

The view to the front of the vehicle.

.Rear view

The view to the rear of the vehicle.

JVH1224X

To display the multiple views, the Around View



Monitor system uses cameras *

1located in the

front grill, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and

one just above the vehicle’s license plate.

AROUND VIEW



MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position, push

the CAMERA button on the instrument panel or

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position

to operate the Around View



Monitor.

Available views

WARNING

.The distance guide lines and the

vehicle width lines should be used

as a reference only when the vehicle

is on a paved, level surface. The

distance viewed on the monitor is

for reference only and may be

different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed

objects.

.Use the displayed lines and the

bird’s-eye view as a reference. The

lines and the bird’s-eye view are

greatly affected by the number of

occupants, fuel level, vehicle posi-

tion, road condition and road grade.

.If the tires are replaced with differ-

ent sized tires, the predictive course

lines and the bird’s-eye view may be

displayed incorrectly.

.When driving the vehicle up a hill,

objects viewed in the monitor are

farther than they appear. When

driving the vehicle down a hill,

objects viewed in the monitor are

closer than they appear.

.Objects in the monitor will appear

visually opposite compared to when

viewed in the rear view and outside

mirrors.

.Use the mirrors or actually look to

properly judge distances to other

objects.

.The distance between objects

viewed in the rear view differs from

actual distance because a wide-

angle lens is used.

.On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predictive course line and the

actual course line.

.The vehicle width and predictive

course lines are wider than the

actual width and course.

.The displayed lines on the rear view

will appear slightly off to the right

because the rear view camera is not

installed in the rear center of the

vehicle.

SAA1840

Front view

SAA1896

Rear view

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15

4-16 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Front and rear view:

Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

vehicle body line *

A, are displayed on the

monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

.Red line *

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

.Yellow line*

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

.Green line*

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

.Green line*

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines *

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predictive course lines *

Indicate the predictive course when operating

the vehicle. The predictive course lines will be

displayed on the monitor when the steering

wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will

move depending on how much the steering

wheel is turned and will not be displayed while

the steering wheel is in the straight ahead

position.

The front view will not be displayed when the

vehicle speed is above 6 MPH (10 km/h).

NOTE:

.When the monitor displays the front

view and the steering wheel turns

about 90 degrees or less from the

straight ahead position, both the right

and left predictive course lines *

6are

displayed. When the steering wheel

turns about 90 degrees or more, the

predictive course line is displayed only

on the opposite side of the turn.

JVH1037X

Bird’s-eye view:

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of

the vehicle which helps confirm the vehicle

position and the predicted course to a parking

space.

The vehicle icon *

1shows the position of the

vehicle. Note that the distance between objects

viewed in the bird’s-eye view differs from the

actual distance.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover *

2are

indicated in black.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the non-viewable area *

2is high-

lighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the bird’s-

eye view is displayed.

In addition, the non-viewable corners are dis-

played in red (blink for the first 3 seconds) *

to remind the drivers to be cautious.

WARNING

.Objects in the bird’s-eye view will

appear farther than the actual dis-

tance because the bird’s-eye view is

a pseudo view that is processed by

combining the views from the cam-

eras on the outside mirrors, the

front and the rear of the vehicle.

.Tall objects, such as a curb or

vehicle, may be misaligned or not

displayed at the seam of the views.

.Objects that are above the camera

cannot be displayed.

.The view for the bird’s-eye view may

be misaligned when the camera

position alters.

.A line on the ground may be mis-

aligned and is not seen as being

straight at the seam of the views.

The misalignment will increase as

the line proceeds away from the

vehicle.

SAA3571

Front-side view:

Guiding lines:

Guiding lines that indicate the width and the

front end of the vehicle are displayed on the

monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line *

1shows the front part

of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line *

2shows the vehicle

width including the outside mirrors.

The extensions *

3of both the front *

1and

side *

2lines are shown with a green dotted

line.

CAUTION

.The turn signal light may look like

the side-of-vehicle line. This is not a

malfunction.

Difference between predictive and actual

distances

The displayed guidelines and their locations on

the ground are for approximate reference only.

Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or

projecting objects will be actually located at

distances different from those displayed in the

monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to

illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and

view the objects as you are backing up, or park

and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of

objects behind the vehicle.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17

4-18 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH1159X

Backing up on a steep uphill:

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is farther than it

appears on the monitor.

JVH1160X

Backing up on a steep downhill:

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is closer than it

appears on the monitor.

SAA1923

Backing up near a projecting object:

The predictive course lines *

Ado not touch the

object in the display. However, the vehicle may

hit the object if it projects over the actual

backing up course.

SAA1980

Backing up behind a projecting object:

The position *

Cis shown farther than the

position *

Bin the display. However, the

position *

Cis actually at the same distance

as the position *

A. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position *

Aif

the object projects over the actual moving

course.

How to park with predictive course lines

WARNING

.If the tires are replaced with differ-

ent sized tires, the predictive course

lines may be displayed incorrectly.

.On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predictive course line and the

actual course line.

.If the battery is disconnected or

becomes discharged, the predictive

course lines may be displayed in-

correctly. If this occurs, please per-

form the following procedures:

— Turn the steering wheel from

lock to lock while the engine is

running.

— Drive the vehicle on a straight

road for more than 5 minutes.

.When the steering wheel is turned

with the ignition switch in the ACC

position, the predictive course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

SAA1897

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe

before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on

the screen *

Awhen the shift lever is moved

to the R (Reverse) position.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19

4-20 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SAA1898

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predictive course

lines *

Benter the parking space *

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the

vehicle width guide lines *

Dparallel to the

parking space *

Cwhile referring to the

predictive course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position and apply the parking brake.

How to switch the display

The Around View



Monitor can display two split

views. Push the CAMERA button, change the

shift lever position, to switch between the

available views.

HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN VIEW

The display settings such as Display Mode,

Brightness, Contrast and Color of the Around

View



Monitor can be adjusted.

1. Push the button.

2. Touch “Settings”.

3. Touch “System” and then touch “Camera

Settings”.

4. Select an item you wish to adjust.

5. Adjust the level of the setting item using the

TUNE knob.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of

the Around View



Monitor while the vehi-

cle is moving. Make sure the parking brake

is firmly applied.

AROUND VIEW



MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for Around View



Monitor. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance with

these system limitations could result in

serious injury or death.

.Do not use the Around View



Moni-

tor with the outside mirrors in the

stored position, and make sure that

the liftgate is securely closed when

operating the vehicle using the

Around View



Monitor.

.The distance between objects

viewed on the Around View



Moni-

tor differs from the actual distance.

.The cameras are installed above the

front grille, the outside mirrors and

above the rear license plate. Do not

put anything on the cameras.

.When washing the vehicle with

highpressure water, be sure not to

spray it around the cameras. Other-

wise, water may enter the camera

unit causing water condensation on

the lens, a malfunction, fire or an

electric shock.

.Do not strike the cameras. They are

precision instruments. Doing so

could cause a malfunction or cause

damage resulting in a fire or an

electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and do

not represent a system malfunction:

.The screen displayed on the Around View



Monitor will automatically return to the

previous screen 3 minutes after the CAM-

ERA button has been pushed while the shift

lever is in a position other than the R

(Reverse) position.

.When the view is switched, the display

images on the screen may be displayed with

some delay.

.When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not display objects

clearly.

.When strong light is shining directly on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

.The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

.The colors of objects on the Around View



Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual

color of objects.

.Objects on the monitor may not be clear and

the color of the object may differ in a dark

environment.

.There may be differences in sharpness

between each camera view of the bird’s-

eye view.

.If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera, the Around View



Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera.

.Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off

any wax with a clean cloth that has been

dampened with a mild detergent diluted with

water.

JVH1036X

There are some areas where the system will not

show objects and the system does not warn of

moving objects. When in the front or the rear

view display, an object below the bumper or on

the ground may not be viewed *

1. When in the

bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam *

of the camera viewing areas will not appear in

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21

4-22 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

the monitor *

JVH1053X

System temporarily unavailable

When the “ ” icon is displayed on the screen,

there will be abnormal conditions in the Around

View



Monitor. This will not hinder normal

driving operation but the system should be

inspected. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

JVH1054X

When the “ ” icon is displayed on the

screen, the camera image may be receiving

temporary electronic disturbances from sur-

rounding devices. This will not hinder normal

driving operation but the system should be

inspected. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

JVH1224X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

.Do not use alcohol, benzine or

thinner to clean the camera. This

will cause discoloration. To clean

the camera, wipe with a cloth dam-

pened with diluted mild cleaning

agent and then wipe with a dry

cloth.

.Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the

cameras *

1, the Around View



Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera by

wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23

4-24 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH1223X

1. CAMERA button

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the Mov-

ing Object Detection system could re-

sult in serious injury or death.

.The MOD system is not a substitute

for proper vehicle operation and is

not designed to prevent contact

with the objects surrounding the

vehicle. When maneuvering, always

use the outside mirror and rearview

mirror and turn and check the sur-

rounding to ensure it is safe to

maneuver.

.The system is deactivated at speeds

above 5 MPH (8 km/h). It is reacti-

vated at lower speeds.

.The MOD system is not designed to

detect the surrounding stationary

objects.

The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system

can inform the driver of moving objects when

driving out of garages, maneuvering into parking

lots and in other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects by

using image processing technology on the

image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will turn on automatically

under the following conditions:

.When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position.

.When the CAMERA button is pushed to

switch from a different screen to the camera

view on the display.

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION

(MOD) (models with navigation

system)

.When vehicle speed decreases below

approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h).

The MOD system operates in the following

conditions when the camera view is displayed:

.When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position (CVT model) or the shift

lever is out of the R (Reverse) position (MT

model) and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD

system detects the moving objects in the

bird’s-eye view. The MOD system will not

operate if the outside mirrors are moving in

or out or if either door is opened.

.When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)

position (CVT model) or the shift lever is out

of the R (Reverse) position (MT model), and

the vehicle speed is below approximately 5

MPH (8 km/h), the MOD system detects

moving objects in the front view.

.When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position and the vehicle speed is below

approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the MOD

system detects moving objects in the rear

view. The MOD system will not operate if the

liftgate is open.

.When the ignition switch is placed in the

“OFF” position and then back to the “ON”

position.

The MOD system does not detect moving

objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon

is not displayed on the screen when in this view.

When the MOD system detects a moving object

near the vehicle, the yellow frame will be

displayed on the view where the objects are

detected and a chime will sound once. While the

MOD system continues to detect moving

objects, the yellow frame continues to be

displayed.

JVH1256X

Front and bird’s-eye views

JVH0872X

Rear and bird’s-eye views

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25

4-26 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH1257X

Rear and front-side views

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame *

1is

displayed on each camera image (front, rear,

right, left) depending on where moving objects

are detected.

The yellow frame *

2is displayed on each view

in the front view and rear view modes.

A blue MOD icon *

3is displayed in the view

where the MOD system is operative. A gray

MOD icon *

3is displayed in the view where the

MOD system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon

3is not displayed.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle

in accordance with these system limita-

tions could result in serious injury or

death.

.Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume or open vehicle

window) will interfere with the

chime sound, and it may not be

heard.

.The MOD system performance will

be limited according to environmen-

tal conditions and surrounding ob-

jects such as:

— When there is low contrast be-

tween background and the mov-

ing objects

— When there is blinking source of

light.

— When strong light such as an-

other vehicle’s headlight or sun-

light is present.

— When there is dirt, water drops

or snow on the camera lens.

— When the position of the moving

objects in the display is not

changed.

.The MOD system might detect flow-

ing water droplets on the camera

lens, white smoke from the muffler,

moving shadows, etc.

.The MOD system may not function

properly depending on the speed,

direction, distance or shape of the

moving objects.

.If your vehicle sustains damage to

the parts where the camera is

installed, leaving it misaligned or

bent, the sensing zone may be

altered and the MOD system may

not detect objects properly.

.When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not

display objects clearly. This is not a

malfunction.

JVH1224X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

.Do not use alcohol, benzine or

thinner to clean the camera. This

will cause discoloration. To clean

the camera, wipe with a cloth dam-

pened with diluted mild cleaning

agent and then wipe with a dry

cloth.

.Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the

cameras *

1, the MOD system may not operate

properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a

cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

SAA3338

CENTER VENTILATORS

Adjust the air flow direction of ventilators as

illustrated.

Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by

moving the center knob (up/down and left/right)

until the preferred position is achieved.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27

VENTILATORS

4-28 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SAA2381

SIDE VENTILATORS

Open or close the vents, and adjust the air flow

direction of ventilators as illustrated.

WARNING

.The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

.Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. On

hot, sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

.Do not use the recirculation mode

for long periods as it may cause the

interior air to become stale and the

windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the heater and the

air conditioner system.

NOTE:

.Odors from inside and outside the

vehicle can build up in the air condi-

tioner unit. Odor can enter the passen-

ger compartment through the vents.

.When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air

recirculation to allow fresh air into the

passenger compartment. This should

help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

SAA3447

1. Air intake lever (Outside air circulation /Air

recirculation )

2. Air flow control dial

3. Fan speed control dial

4. A/C (Air Conditioner) button

5. Temperature control dial

6. Rear window defroster button (See “Rear

window and outside mirror defroster switch”

(P.2-38).)

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER (if so

equipped)

To turn off the heater and air conditioner, turn the

fan speed control dial to the OFF (0)

position.

Controls

Outside air circulation:

Move the air intake lever to the position. The

air flow is drawn from outside the vehicle.

Air recirculation:

Move the air intake lever to the position. The

air flow is circulated inside the vehicle.

Air flow control:

Turn the air flow control dial to change the air

flow mode.

— Air flows from the center and side

ventilators.

— Air flows from the center and side

ventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.

— Air flows from the defroster and foot

outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the defroster outlets.

.When the or position is selected,

the air conditioner will automatically turn on.

This will dehumidify the air and help to defog

the windows.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29

4-30 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Fan speed control:

Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise to

increase the fan speed.

Turn the fan speed control dial counter-

clockwise to decrease the fan speed.

A/C (Air Conditioner) operation:

Push the A/C button to turn on or off the air

conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, the

A/C indicator light on the button illuminates.

Temperature control:

Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature. Turn the dial between the

middle and the right position to select the hot

temperature. Turn the dial between the middle

and the left position to select the cool tempera-

ture.

Heater operation

Heating:

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot

outlets.

1. Move the air intake lever to the position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position between the middle and the

hot (right) position.

Ventilation:

This mode directs outside air to the side and

center ventilators.

1. Move the air intake lever to the position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

Defrosting or defogging:

This mode directs the air to the defroster outlets

to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Move the air intake lever to the position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position between the middle and the

hot (right) position.

.To remove frost from the outside surface of

the windshield quickly, turn the temperature

control dial to the maximum hot position and

the fan speed control dial to the

maximum position.

.When the position is selected, the air

conditioner will automatically turn on. This

will dehumidify the air and help to defog the

windows.

Bi-level heating:

This mode directs cool air from the side and

center vents and warm air from the foot outlets.

When the temperature control dial is turned to

the maximum hot or cool position, the air

between the ventilators and the foot outlets is

the same temperature.

1. Move the air intake lever to the position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position.

Heating and defogging:

This mode heats the interior and defogs the

windows.

1. Move the air intake lever to the position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position.

When the position is selected, the air

conditioner will automatically turn on. This will

dehumidify the air and help to defog the

windows.

Air conditioner operation

The air conditioner system should be operated

for approximately 10 minutes at least once a

month. This helps prevent damage to the air

conditioner system due to the lack of lubrication.

Cooling:

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

4. Push the A/C button on. (The A/C indicator

light will illuminate.)

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position between the middle and the

cool (left) position.

.For quick cooling when the outside tem-

perature is high, move the air intake lever to

the position. Be sure to move the air

intake lever to the position for normal

cooling.

.A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air

is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

Dehumidified heating:

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the

air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

4. Push the A/C button on. (The A/C indicator

light will illuminate.)

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position between the middle and the

hot (right) position.

Dehumidified defogging:

This mode is used to defog the windows and

dehumidify the air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position.

When the position is selected, the air

conditioner will automatically turn on. This will

dehumidify the air and help to defog the

windows.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31

4-32 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SAA3443

1. AUTO button/Temperature control dial

2. OFF button

3. A/C button

4. CLIMATE button

5. Display screen*

6. Air flow control buttons

7. Fan speed control dial

8. Front defroster button

9. Air intake button (Outside air circulation /Air

recirculation )

10. Rear window defroster button (See “Rear

window and outside mirror defroster switch”

(P.2-38).)

*: Temperature is displayed in 8F (US) or 8C

(Canada).

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER (with

Integrated Control System)

Automatic operation (AUTO)

The AUTO mode may be used year-round as the

system automatically controls constant tempera-

ture, air flow distribution and fan speed.

To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push

the CLIMATE button to change to the Climate

Control Mode, then push the OFF button.

Cooling and dehumidified heating:

1. Push the AUTO button. (The AUTO indicator

will be displayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

preferred temperature. The temperature

range is between 608F (188C) and 908F

(328C).

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:

1. Push the front defroster button. (The

indicator light will illuminate.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

preferred temperature.

.To remove moisture or fog on the front

window quickly, set the temperature to

the high temperature and the fan speed

to their maximum level.

.After the windshield is cleared, push the

front defroster button again. (The

indicator light will turn off.)

.When the front defroster button is

pushed, the air conditioner will automa-

tically turn on to defog the windshield.

The outside air circulation mode will be

selected to improve the defogging per-

formance.

.When the position is selected, the

air recirculation mode cannot be turned

on to prevent the windows from being

fogged up.

Manual operation

The manual mode can be used to control the

heater and air conditioner to your desired

settings.

To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push

the OFF button.

If the Drive Mode is indicated on the screen,

push the CLIMATE button to change to the

Climate Control Mode, then push the OFF

button.

Fan speed control:

Turn the fan speed control dial to adjust the

fan speed.

Air flow control:

Push the air flow control buttons to change the

air flow mode:

— Air flows from the center and side

ventilators.

— Air flows from the center and side

ventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.

— Air flows from the defroster outlets and

foot outlets.

Temperature control:

Turn the temperature control dial to set the

preferred temperature.

The temperature range is between 608F (188C)

and 908F (328C).

Air intake control:

.Push the air intake button to change the air

circulation mode. When the indicator light

on “ ” side illuminates, the flowing air is

recirculated inside the vehicle.

When the or position is selected,

the air recirculation mode cannot be turned

on to prevent the windows from being

fogged up.

.Push the air intake button to change the air

circulation mode. When the indicator light

on “ ” side illuminates, the flowing air is

drawn from outside the vehicle.

.Push and hold the air intake button for more

than 1.5 seconds to set the automatic

control between the outside air circulation

and air recirculation modes.

When the “ ”or“ ” position is

selected, the air recirculation mode does

not activate.

When setting the automatic control mode,

the indicator lights “ ” and “ ” will

blink twice indicating that the system is in

the automatic control mode.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33

4-34 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH1245X

Air conditioner mode screen

SAA3379

Drive mode screen

Displaying Climate control

When in Climate Control Mode, the selected

temperature and airflow, and automatic mode or

manual mode are indicated on the display.

When in Drive Mode, the same items as above

are indicated, but on the bottom of the display.

To switch to Climate Control Mode, push the

CLIMATE control mode select button.

Setting climate ECO

When in Drive Mode, CLIMATE ECO can be

switched on or off. When CLIMATE ECO is

switched on, the climate control system oper-

ates to enhance fuel economy.

See “Setting the climate ECO mode” (P.5-24).

SAA2368

SAA3441

OPERATING TIPS (for automatic air

conditioner)

.When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flow

from the foot outlets may not operate. This is

not a malfunction. After the coolant tem-

perature warms up, air will flow normally

from the foot outlets.

.The automatic air conditioner is equipped

with sensors as illustrated. The sensors *

and *

Bon the instrument panel help

maintain a constant temperature. Do not

put anything on or around these sensors.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The air conditioning system is equipped with an

in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,

dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats,

defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the

filter in accordance with the specified main-

tenance intervals listed in the “9. Maintenance

and schedules” section. It is recommended to

see a NISSAN dealer to replace the filter.

The filter should be replaced if the air flow

decreases significantly or if windows fog

up easily when operating the heater or air

conditioning system.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

The air conditioner system in your vehicle is

charged with a refrigerant designed with the

environment in mind. This refrigerant will not

harm the earth’s ozone layer. Special char-

ging equipment and lubricant are required when

servicing your vehicle air conditioner. Using

improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause

severe damage to your air conditioner system.

(See “Capacities and recommended fluids/

lubricants” (P.10-2) for air conditioner system

refrigerant and lubricant recommendations.)

Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your

environmentally friendly air conditioner system.

WARNING

The system contains refrigerant under

high pressure. To avoid personal injury,

any air conditioner service should be

done only by an experienced technician

with the proper equipment.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Radio

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and push the FM·AM button to turn on

the radio. If you listen to the radio with the

engine not running, the ignition switch should be

placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external

influences. Intermittent changes in reception

quality normally are caused by these external

influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the

vehicle may influence radio reception

quality.

Radio reception:

Your vehicle radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance

radio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the

quality of that reception.

However there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These

characteristics are completely normal in a given

reception area, and do not indicate any mal-

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35

AUDIO SYSTEM

4-36 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

function in your vehicle radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change

because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other

vehicles can work against ideal reception.

Described below are some of the factors that

can affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the

device in a different location may reduce or

eliminate the noise.

SAA0306

FM radio reception:

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30

miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single

station) FM having slightly more range than

stereo FM. External influences may sometimes

interfere with FM station reception even if the

FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The

strength of the FM signal is directly related to the

distance between the transmitter and receiver.

FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting

many of the same characteristics as light. For

example they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,

usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter, static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the

treble setting to reduce the treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-

flected signals reach the receiver at the same

time. The signals may cancel each other,

resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM radio reception:

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics. AM signals are also

subject to interference as they travel from

transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped):

When the satellite radio is used for the first time

or the battery has been replaced, the satellite

radio may not work properly. This is not a

malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with the

satellite radio ON and the vehicle away from any

metal or large buildings for the satellite radio to

receive all of the necessary data.

The satellite radio mode requires an active

SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The sa-

tellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and

Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite

radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite

antenna.

A buildup of ice on the satellite radio antenna

can affect satellite radio performance. Remove

the ice to restore satellite radio reception.

SAA0480

Compact Disc (CD) player

.Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD

and/or CD player.

.During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the

humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

.The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

.The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the passenger compartment

temperature is extremely high. De-

crease the temperature before use.

.Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

.Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

.CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,

scratched, covered with fingerprints,

or that have pin holes may not work

properly.

.The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

—Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

—Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

—Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

.Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion.

—3.1 in (8 cm) discs

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37

4-38 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

—CDs that are not round

—CDs with a paper label

—CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

.This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capabilities to

record or burn CDs.

.If the CD cannot be played, error

messages as the following examples

will be displayed.

Check Disc:

—Confirm that the CD is inserted

correctly (the label side is facing

up, etc.).

—Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

Push Eject:

This is an error due to the temperature

inside the player is too high. Remove

the CD by pushing the EJECT button,

and after a short time reinsert the CD.

The CD can be played when the tem-

perature of the player returns to nor-

mal.

Unplayable Track:

The file is unplayable in this audio

system (only MP3 or WMA CD).

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure

that the USB device is connected

correctly into the USB port.

.Do not grab the USB port cover (if

so equipped) when pulling the USB

device out of the port. This could

damage the port and the cover.

.Do not leave the USB cable in a

place where it can be pulled unin-

tentionally. Pulling the cable may

damage the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.

USB devices should be purchased separately

as necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB

devices. To format a USB device, use a personal

computer.

In some states/area, the USB device for the

front seats plays only sound without images for

regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is

parked.

This system supports various USB memory

devices, USB hard drives and iPod



players.

Some USB devices may not be supported by

this system.

.Partitioned USB devices may not be played

correctly.

.Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed

properly on display. Using English language

characters with a USB device is recom-

mended.

General notes for USB use:

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner

information regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

Notes for iPod



use:

iPod



is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

.Improperly plugging in the iPod



may cause

a checkmark to be displayed on and off

(flickering). Always make sure that the iPod



is connected properly.

.An iPod nano



(1st Generation) may remain

in fast forward or rewind mode if it is

connected during a seek operation. In this

case, please manually reset the iPod



.An iPod nano



(2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is

disconnected during a seek operation.

.An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using an iPod

nano



(2nd Generation)

.Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on an iPod



.Large video files cause slow responses in an

iPod



. The vehicle center display may

momentarily black out, but will soon recover.

.If an iPod



automatically selects large video

files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle

center display may momentarily black out,

but will soon recover.

Compressed Audio Files (MP3/WMA)

Explanation of terms:

.MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track can reduce the file size by

approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1

kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no

perceptible loss in quality. The compression

reduces certain parts of sound that seem

inaudible to most people.

.WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a

compressed audio format created by Micro-

soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

.Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

.Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

.Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is

called a multisession.

.ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, album title,

encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.

ID3 tag information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows



and Windows Media



are regis-

tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States of America

and/or other countries.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39

4-40 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Playback order:

SAA1025

Playback order chart

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or

WMA files is as illustrated.

.The names of folders not containing MP3 or

WMA files are not shown in the display.

.If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

.The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software.

Therefore, the files might not play in the

desired order.

Specification chart (for models without navigation system):

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB2.0

Supported file systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet

* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are

not supported.

USB memory: FAT16, FAT32

Supported versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1 Audio Layer 3

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR4, 32 kbps - 320 kbps (WMA9 only)

Tag information (Song title and Artist name) ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels

CD, CD-R, CD-RW Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255, Files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

USB Folder levels: 8, Folders 255, Files: 2500 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Memory size: 4GB

Displayable character codes*3 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16

Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41

4-42 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Specification chart (for models with navigation system):

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not

supported.

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA*2

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big

Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be

played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of

characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time before

the music starts playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, or USB device, some time may be required

before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not

match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next song

when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by

Songs do not play back in the

desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired

order.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43

4-44 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Bluetooth



Audio player

Bluetooth



is a trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and li-

censed to Robert Bosch GmbH

and Visteon Corporation.

.Some Bluetooth



audio devices may not be

recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.

.It is necessary to set up the wireless

connection between a compatible Blue-

tooth



audio device and the in-vehicle

Bluetooth



module before using the Blue-

tooth



audio player.

.Operating procedure of the Bluetooth



audio player will vary depending on the

device. Make sure it is understood how to

operate an audio device before using it with

this system.

.The Bluetooth



audio player may be

stopped under the following conditions:

— Receiving a hands-free call.

— Checking the connection to the hands-

free phone.

.Do not place a Bluetooth



audio device in

an area surrounded by metal or far away

from the in-vehicle Bluetooth



module to

prevent tone quality degradation and wire-

less connection disruption.

.While an audio device is connected through

a Bluetooth



wireless connection, the bat-

tery power of the device may discharge

quicker than usual.

.This system supports the Bluetooth



Audio

Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

.Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth



functions share the same frequency band

(2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth



and the

wireless LAN functions at the same time may

slow down or disconnect the communica-

tion and cause undesired noise. It is

recommended that you turn off the wireless

LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth



functions.

JVH0866X

1. DISP (display) button

2. MEDIA button

3. CD eject button

4. FM·AM button

5. CD button

6. Color display

7. Apps button

8. SEEK TRACK (rewind) button

9. Radio SCAN tuning button

10. SEEK TRACK (forward) button

11. BACK button

12. Power button/VOL (volume) control knob

13. RPT (repeat) play button

14. RDM (random) play button

15. Radio station preset select buttons

16. TUNE·FOLDER knob

17. ENTER/SETTING button

FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC

(CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and

high frequency ranges automatically.

Power button/VOL (volume) control

knob:

Push the Power button/VOL (volume) control

knob to turn on and off the audio system.

Turn the Power button/VOL (volume) control

knob to adjust the volume.

Audio settings:

The settings screen will appear when the

ENTER/SETTING button is pushed.

The following items are available in the settings

screen.

.Bluetooth

It is possible to set the Bluetooth



settings.

For details of the Bluetooth



settings, see

“Bluetooth



settings” (P.4-88).

.Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade

Controls the sound of the audio system.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45

4-46 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Balance adjusts the sound between the left

and right speakers. Fade adjusts the sound

between the front and rear speakers.

Select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance” or

“Fade” using the TUNE·FOLDER knob, and

then push the ENTER/SETTING button.

Turn the TUNE·FOLDER knob to adjust the

Bass, Treble, balance and Fade of the

screen to the preferred level. Push the

ENTER/SETTING button to apply the

setting.

.Speed Sensitive Vol.

To change the Speed Sensitive Volume

(Speed Sensitive Vol.) level from off (0) to

5, turn the TUNE·FOLDER knob.

.AUX Vol.

Controls the volume level of incoming sound

when an auxiliary device is connected to the

system. Choose a setting between +1 and

+3 or choose 0 to disable the feature

entirely.

.Brightness and Contrast

Adjust the brightness and contrast of the

screen.

Select “Brightness” or “Contrast” using the

TUNE·FOLDER knob and then push the

ENTER/SETTING button. Turn the

TUNE·FOLDER knob to adjust the bright-

ness and contrast of the screen to the

preferred level. Push the ENTER/SETTING

button to apply the setting.

.Clock Adjust

Adjust the clock according to the following

procedure.

1) Select “Clock Adjust” using the

TUNE·FOLDER knob and then push

the ENTER/SETTING button.

2) Adjust the hour with the TUNE·FOLDER

knob and then push the ENTER/

SETTING button.

3) Adjust the minute with the

TUNE·FOLDER knob and then push

the ENTER/SETTING button.

24 hour clock is not available.

.On-Screen Clock

When this item is turned on, a clock is

always displayed in the upper right corner of

the screen.

Select the “On-Screen Clock” using the

TUNE·FOLDER knob and then push the

ENTER/SETTING button. You can toggle

between ON and OFF using the

TUNE·FOLDER knob.

.RDS Display (if so equipped)

RDS (radio data system) information can be

shown on the display. Select “RDS Display”

using the TUNE·FOLDER knob and then

push the ENTER/SETTING button. You can

toggle between ON and OFF using the

TUNE·FOLDER knob. Push the ENTER/

SETTING button to apply the setting.

.Language Select

The language settings can be changed.

Select “Language Select” using the

TUNE·FOLDER knob and then push the

ENTER/SETTING button. Use the

TUNE·FOLDER knob to select the preferred

language. Push the ENTER/SETTING but-

ton to apply the setting.

DISP button:

Display of the screen can be canceled by

pushing the button. You can still listen to

music that is being played back even while the

screen display is turned off. If you want to

display the screen again, push the button

once more. Pushing some of the audio source

buttons will also turn the screen back on and

display the screens of the corresponding

sources.

MEDIA button:

Pushing the button will switch the audio

source as follows:

USB/iPod ?Bluetooth Audio ?AUX ?USB/

iPod

Apps button:

The button launches the Smartphone

Integration mode. See “NissanConnect

App

smartphone integration” (P.4-75).

FM-AM Radio operation

radio (FM·AM) band select:

Push the button to change the band as

follows:

AM ?FM1 ?FM2?AM

TUNE (Tuning):

Turn the TUNE·FOLDER knob for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning:

Push the or button to tune from low to

high or high to low frequencies and to stop at

the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Push the button to tune from low to high

frequencies and stop at each broadcasting

station for several seconds. Pushing the button

again during this several seconds period will

stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain

tuned to that station.

If the button is not pushed within this

period, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

to Radio memory buttons:

Up to 12 stations can be set for the FM band (6

each for FM1 and FM2) and 6 stations can be

set for the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band using the

button.

2. Tune to the desired station.

3. Push and hold the desired station preset

button to until beep sounds.

4. The station indicator will then come on. The

station is now set to the button memory.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the station memory will be erased. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

CD player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position. Insert the Compact Disc (CD) into the

slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be

guided automatically into the slot and start

playing.

After loading the CD, the number of tracks on

the CD and the play time will appear on the

display.

If another audio source is already operating, it

will automatically turn off and the CD will play.

If the system has been turned off while the CD

was playing, pushing the Power button will start

the CD.

CD PLAY:

When the CD button is pushed while a CD is

loaded, the CD will start playing.

SEEK TRACK:

When the or button is pushed and hold

while the CD is being played, the CD will play

while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the

button is released, the CD will return to normal

play speed.

When the or button is pushed while

the CD is being played, the next track or the

beginning of the current track on the CD will be

played. Push the button again to select the

previous track.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47

4-48 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is

played, the play pattern can be changed as

follows:

(CD)

(Normal) ⇔1 Track Repeat

(CD with compressed audio files)

(Normal) ?1 Folder Repeat ?1 Track Repeat

?(Normal)

RANDOM (RDM):

When the RDM button is pushed while a CD is

being played, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

(CD)

(Normal) ⇔1 Disc Random

(CD with compressed audio files)

(Normal) ?1 Disc Random ?1 Folder

Random ?(Normal)

CD eject:

When the button is pushed with the CD

loaded, the CD will be ejected.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it

will be pulled back into the slot to protect

it.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection

port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting a USB device

tilted or upside-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure

that the USB device is connected

correctly to the USB port.

.Do not grab the USB port cover (if

so equipped) when pulling a USB

device out of the port. This could

damage the port and the cover.

.Do not leave a USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintention-

ally. Pulling the cable may damage

the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner

information regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

SAA3444

USB main operation:

The USB connection port is located on the

lower part of the instrument panel. Connect a

USB memory device into the connector. When

the audio system operates, the system will

switch to the USB memory device mode

automatically.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

memory device was playing, pushing the Power

button will start the USB memory device.

MEDIA button:

To change to the USB mode, push the

button with a USB connected until the USB

mode is selected.

Next/Previous File and Fast

Forward/Rewind:

When the or button is pushed and hold

while a USB memory is being played, the USB

memory will play while forwarding or rewinding.

When the button is released, the USB memory

will return to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed while

the USB memory is being played, the next track

or the beginning of the current track on the USB

memory will be played. Push the button

again to select the previous track.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the USB memory,

choose a folder displayed on the screen using

the TUNE·SCROLL knob.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pushed while the USB

memory is played, the play pattern can be

change as follows.

To change the play mode, push the RPT button

repeatedly and the mode will change as follows.

(Normal) ?1 Folder Repeat ?1 Track Repeat

?(Normal)

RANDOM (RDM):

When the RDM button is pushed while a USB

memory is being played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows.

To change the play mode, push the RDM button

repeatedly, and the mode will change as follows.

(Normal) ?All Random ?1 Folder Random ?

(Normal)

BACK button:

When the BACK button is pushed, it returns to

the previous display.

iPod



player operation

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49

4-50 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CAUTION

.Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure

that the USB device is connected

correctly into the USB port.

.Do not grab the USB port cover (if

so equipped) when pulling the USB

device out of the port. This could

damage the port and the cover.

.Do not leave the USB cable in a

place where it can be pulled unin-

tentionally. Pulling the cable may

damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner

information regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

Connecting iPod



The USB connection port is located on the

lower part of the instrument panel. Connect the

iPod



cable to the USB connector. See “USB

(Universal Serial Bus) connection port” (P.4-48).

When the audio system operates, the system

will switch to the iPod



mode automatically. The

battery of the iPod



is charged while the cable is

connected to the vehicle.

Depending on the version of the iPod



, the

display on the iPod



shows a NISSAN or

Accessory Attached screen when the connec-

tion is completed. When the iPod



is connected

to the vehicle, the iPod



music library can only

be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

*iPod



and iPhone



are a trademark of Apple

Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility:

The following models are compatible:

.iPod nano



1G (Firmware version 1.3.1 -)

.iPod nano



2G (Firmware version 1.1.3 -)

.iPod nano



3G (Firmware version 1.0.0 -)

.iPod nano



4G (Firmware version 1.0.2 -)

.iPod nano



5G (Firmware version 1.0.1 -)

.iPod nano



6G (Firmware version 1.0 -)

.iPod nano



7G (Firmware version 1.0.0 -)

.iPod



5G (Firmware version 1.2.1 -)

.iPod classic



(Firmware version 1.0.0 -)

.iPod Touch



(iOS 1.1 -)

.iPod Touch



2G (iOS 2.1.1 -)

.iPod Touch



3G (iOS 3.1 -)

.iPod Touch



4G (iOS 4.1 -)

.iPod Touch



5G (iOS 6.0.0 -)

.iPhone



(iOS 1.0.0 - 2.2.1)

.iPhone



3G (iOS 2.1 -)

.iPhone



3GS (iOS 3.0 -)

.iPhone



4/4S (iOS 4.0 -)

.iPhone



5 (iOS 6.0.0 -)

Operations attributable to firmware update by

Apple are not guaranteed.

iPod



main operation:

The system operates when the ignition switch is

in the ON or ACC position. Push the button

repeatedly to switch to the iPod



mode.

If the system was turned off while the iPod



was

playing, pushing the Power button will start the

iPod



If another audio source is playing and the iPod



is connected, pushing the button repeat-

edly will change the system to the iPod



mode.

When in the iPod



mode, the interface for iPod



operation is shown on the audio display. The

items on the menu list can be scrolled by turning

the TUNE·FOLDER dial while the iPod



operational. To select an item, push the

ENTER/SETTING button. The following items

in the iPod



menu appear on the display.

.Now playing

.Playlists

.Artists

.Albums

.Songs

.Podcasts

.Genres

.Composers

.Audiobooks

.Shuffle Songs

For more information about each item, see the

iPod



Owner’s Manual.

Next/Previous Track and Fast

Forward/Rewind:

When the or button is pushed and hold

while the iPod



is playing, the iPod



will play

while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the

button is released, the iPod



will return to the

normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed while the

iPod



is playing, the next track or the beginning

of the current track on the iPod



will be played.

Push the button again to select the previous

track.

Push the or button more than once to

skip through the tracks.

RPT (repeat) button:

When the button is pushed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

(Repeat Off) ?1 Track Repeat?All Repeat ?

(Repeat Off)

RDM (random) button:

When the button is pushed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

(Shuffle Off) ?Track Shuffle ?(Shuffle Off)

BACK button:

The display will return to the previous screen.

Bluetooth



audio player operation

If you have a compatible Bluetooth



audio

device that is capable of playing audio files,

the device can be connected to the vehicle’s

audio system so that the audio files on the

device play through the vehicle’s speakers.

Regulatory information:

Bluetooth



trademark:

Bluetooth



is a trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and li-

censed to Visteon Corporation.

Connecting Bluetooth



device:

To connect your Bluetooth



device to the

vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51

4-52 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH0620X

2. Select “Bluetooth” .

3. Select “Add Phone or Device” . This same

screen can be accessed to remove, replace

or select a different Bluetooth



device.

4. The system acknowledges the command

and asks you to initiate a connection from

the Bluetooth



device. The procedure for

connecting a Bluetooth



device varies

according to the cellular phone model. See

the Owner’s manual of the Bluetooth



device for details.

Bluetooth



audio main operation:

To switch to the Bluetooth



audio mode, push

the button repeatedly until the Bluetooth



audio mode is displayed on the screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth



audio are

displayed on the screen. Use the Preset

button to play and use the Preset button to

pause.

JVH0370X

AUX (Auxiliary) input jack

The AUX input jack is located on the lower part

of the instrument panel. The AUX input jack

accepts any standard analog audio input such

as from a portable cassette tape/CD player,

MP3 player or laptop computer.

Push the button repeatedly to play a

compatible device when it is plugged into the

AUX input jack.

NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo

mini plug cable when connecting your music

device to the audio system. Music may not play

properly when a monaural cable is used.

JVH1055X

1. XM band select button

2. CD eject button

3. FM·AM button

4. MEDIA button

5. Color display

6. Apps button

7. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) button for

SEEK/TRACK

8. Radio SCAN tuning button

9. Radio CAT (category)/FF (fast forward) button

for SEEK/TRACK

10. BACK button

11. DISP (display) button

12. Power button/VOL (volume) control knob

13. RPT (repeat) play button

14. RDM (random) play button

15. Radio station preset select buttons

16. ENTER/SETTING button/TUNE·SCROLL con-

trol knob

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if so

equipped)

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-

tion precautions” (P.4-35).

.No satellite radio reception is available when

the SAT band option is selected unless the

optional satellite receiver and antenna are

installed, and there is an active SiriusXM

Satellite Radio subscription.

.The satellite radio mode requires an active

SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The

satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

.It may take some time to receive the

activation signal after subscribing the Sir-

iusXM Satellite Radio. After receiving the

activation signal, an available channel list will

be automatically updated in the radio. Push

the ignition switch from LOCK to ACC to

update the channel list.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-53

4-54 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Audio main operation

The audio system operates when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON or ACC position.

Head unit:

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and

high frequency ranges automatically.

Power button / VOL (volume) control

knob:

Push the Power button/VOL (volume) control

knob to turn on and off the audio system.

Turn the Power button/VOL (volume) control

knob to adjust the volume.

Audio settings:

The settings screen will appear when pushing

the ENTER/SETTING button.

The following items are available in the settings

screen.

.Bluetooth

It is possible to set the Bluetooth



settings.

For details of the Bluetooth



settings, see

“Bluetooth



settings” (P.4-88).

.Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade

Controls the sound of the audio system.

Balance adjusts the sound between the left

and right speakers. Fade adjusts the sound

between the front and rear speakers.

Select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance” or

“Fade” using the TUNE·SCROLL control

knob and then push the ENTER/SETTING

button. Turn the TUNE·SCROLL control

knob to adjust the Bass, Treble, balance

and Fade of the screen to the preferred

level. Push the ENTER/SETTING button to

apply the setting.

.Brightness and Contrast

Adjust the brightness and contrast of the

screen.

Select the “Brightness” or “Contrast” using

the TUNE·SCROLL control knob and then

push the ENTER/SETTING button. Turn the

TUNE·SCROLL control knob to adjust the

brightness and contrast of the screen to the

preferred level. Push the ENTER/SETTING

button to apply the setting.

.Clock Adjust

Adjust the clock according to the following

procedure.

1) Select “Clock Adjust” using the TU-

NE·SCROLL control knob and then

push the ENTER/SETTING button.

2) Adjust the hour with the TUNE·SCROLL

control knob and then push the ENTER/

SETTING button.

3) Adjust the minute with the TUNE·SC-

ROLL control knob and then push the

ENTER/SETTING button.

24 hour clock is not available.

.On-Screen Clock

When this item is turned on, a clock is

always displayed in the upper right corner of

the screen.

Select the “On-Screen Clock” using the

TUNE·SCROLL control knob and then push

the ENTER/SETTING button. You can tog-

gle between ON and OFF using the

TUNE·SCROLL control knob.

.RDS Display (if so equipped)

RDS (radio data system) information can be

shown on the display. Select “RDS Display”

using the TUNE·SCROLL control knob and

then push the ENTER/SETTING button. You

can toggle between ON and OFF using the

TUNE·SCROLL control knob. Push the

ENTER/SETTING button to apply the

setting.

.Speed Sensitive Vol.

To change the Speed Sensitive Volume

(Speed Sensitive Vol.) level from off (0) to

5, turn the TUNE·SCROLL control knob.

.AUX Vol.

Controls the volume level of incoming sound

when an auxiliary device is connected to the

system. Choose a setting between +1 and

+3 or choose 0 to disable the feature

entirely.

.Language Select

The language settings can be changed.

Select “Language Select” using the TU-

NE·SCROLL control knob and then push the

ENTER/SETTING button. Use the TU-

NE·SCROLL control knob to select the

preferred language. Push the ENTER/

SETTING button to apply the setting.

DISP button:

Display of the screen can be canceled by

pushing the button. You can still listen to

music that is being played back even while the

screen display is turned off. If you want to

display the screen again, push the button

once more. Pushing some of the audio source

buttons will also turn the screen back on and

display the screens of the corresponding

sources.

MEDIA button:

Pushing the button will switch the audio

source as follows:

CD ?USB/iPod ?Bluetooth Audio ?AUX ?

Apps button:

The button launches the Smartphone

Integration mode. See “NissanConnect

App

smartphone integration” (P.4-75).

FM-AM-SAT Radio operation

radio (FM·AM) band select:

Pushing the FM·AM button will change the band

as follows:

AM ?FM1 ?FM2 ?AM

radio (SAT) band select:

Pushing the XM band select button will change

the band as follows:

XM1 ?XM2 ?XM3 ?XM1

When the XM band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the radio will come on at the channel

last played.

The last channel played will also come on when

the Power button is pushed to ON.

The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

If another audio source is playing when the radio

band select button is turned to ON, the audio

source will automatically be turned off and the

last radio channel played will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the

radio will automatically change from stereo to

monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

.For AM and FM radio

Turn the radio TUNE·SCROLL control knob

for manual tuning.

.For SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Turn the radio TUNE·SCROLL control knob

to seek channels from all of the categories

when any category is not selected.

SEEK tuning/CAT (category):

.For AM and FM radio

Push the SEEK button or to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting station.

.For SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Push the SEEK button or to tune to

the first channel of the next or previous

category.

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low

to high frequencies and stop at each broad-

casting station for several seconds. Pushing the

button again during this several seconds period

will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain

tuned to that station.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5

seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55

4-56 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

station.

to Station memory operations:

12 stations can be set for the FM band (6 each

for FM1 and FM2) and 6 stations can be set for

the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band using the

button.

2. Tune to the desired station.

3. Push and hold the desired station preset

button to until beep sounds.

4. The station indicator will then come on.

Memorizing is now complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the station memory will be erased. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

CD player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position, and insert the compact disc (CD) into

the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will

be guided automatically into the slot and start

playing.

After loading the CD, the number of tracks on

the CD and the play time will appear on the

display.

If another audio source is already operating, it

will automatically turn off and the CD will play.

If the system was turned off while the CD was

playing, pushing the Power button will start the

CD.

PLAY:

With a CD loaded, press the button until

the CD mode is displayed on the screen.

Next/Previous Track and Fast

Forward/Rewind :

When the or button is pushed and hold

while the CD is being played, the CD will play

while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the

button is released, the CD will return to normal

play speed.

When the or button is pushed while

the CD is being played, the next track or the

beginning of the current track on the CD will be

played. Push the button again to select the

previous track.

RPT (repeat) button:

When the button is pushed while the CD is

played, the play pattern can be changed as

follows:

(CD)

(Normal) ⇔1 Track Repeat

(CD with compressed audio files)

(Normal) ?1 Folder Repeat ?1 Track Repeat

?(Normal)

RDM (random) button:

When the button is pushed while a CD is

being played, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

(CD)

(Normal) ⇔1 Disc Random

(CD with compressed audio files)

(Normal) ?1 Disc Random ?1 Folder

Random ?(Normal)

CD eject button:

When the button is pushed with the CD

loaded, the CD will be ejected.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it

will be pulled back into the slot to protect

it.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection

port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting a USB device

tilted or upside-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure

that the USB device is connected

correctly to the USB port.

.Do not grab the USB port cover (if

so equipped) when pulling a USB

device out of the port. This could

damage the port and the cover.

.Do not leave a USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintention-

ally. Pulling the cable may damage

the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner

information regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

SAA3444

USB main operation:

The USB outlet connector is located on the

lower part of the instrument panel. Connect a

USB memory device into the connector. When

the audio system operates, the system will

switch to the USB memory device mode

automatically.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

memory device was playing, pushing the Power

button will start the USB memory device.

MEDIA button:

To change to the USB mode, push the

button with a USB connected until the USB

mode is selected.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-57

4-58 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Next/Previous File and Fast

Forward/Rewind:

When the or button is pushed and held

while a USB memory is being played, the USB

memory will play while forwarding or rewinding.

When the button is released, the USB memory

will return to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed while

the USB memory is being played, the next track

or the beginning of the current track on the USB

memory will be played. Push the button

again to select the previous track.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the USB memory,

choose a folder displayed on the screen using

the TUNE·SCROLL knob.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pushed while the USB

memory is played, the play pattern can be

change as follows.

To change the play mode, push the RPT button

repeatedly and the mode will change as follows.

(Normal) ?1 Folder Repeat ?1 Track Repeat

?(Normal)

RANDOM (RDM):

When the RDM button is pushed while a USB

memory is being played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows.

To change the play mode, push the RDM button

repeatedly, and the mode will change as follows.

(Normal) ?All Random ?1 Folder Random ?

(Normal)

BACK button:

When the BACK button is pushed, it returns to

the previous display.

iPod



player operation

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure

that the USB device is connected

correctly into the USB port.

.Do not grab the USB port cover (if

so equipped) when pulling the USB

device out of the port. This could

damage the port and the cover.

.Do not leave the USB cable in a

place where it can be pulled unin-

tentionally. Pulling the cable may

damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner

information regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

Connecting iPod



The USB port is located on the lower part of the

instrument panel. Connect the iPod



cable to

the USB connector. See “USB (Universal Serial

Bus) connection port” (P.4-57). When the audio

system operates, the system will switch to the

iPod



mode automatically. The battery of the

iPod



is charged while the cable is connected to

the vehicle.

Depending on the version of the iPod



, the

display on the iPod



shows a NISSAN or

Accessory Attached screen when the connec-

tion is completed. When the iPod



is connected

to the vehicle, the iPod



music library can only

be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

*iPod



and iPhone



are a trademark of Apple

Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility:

The following models are compatible:

.iPod nano



1G (Firmware version 1.3.1 -)

.iPod nano



2G (Firmware version 1.1.3 -)

.iPod nano



3G (Firmware version 1.0.0 -)

.iPod nano



4G (Firmware version 1.0.2 -)

.iPod nano



5G (Firmware version 1.0.1 -)

.iPod nano



6G (Firmware version 1.0 -)

.iPod nano



7G (Firmware version 1.0.0 -)

.iPod



5G (Firmware version 1.2.1 -)

.iPod classic



(Firmware version 1.0.0 -)

.iPod Touch



(iOS 1.1 -)

.iPod Touch



2G (iOS 2.1.1 -)

.iPod Touch



3G (iOS 3.1 -)

.iPod Touch



4G (iOS 4.1 -)

.iPod Touch



5G (iOS 6.0.0 -)

.iPhone



(iOS 1.0.0 - 2.2.1)

.iPhone



3G (iOS 2.1 -)

.iPhone



3GS (iOS 3.0 -)

.iPhone



4/4S (iOS 4.0 -)

.iPhone



5 (iOS 6.0.0 -)

Operations attributable to firmware update by

Apple are not guaranteed.

iPod



main operation:

The system operates when the ignition switch is

in the ON or ACC position. Push the button

repeatedly to switch to the iPod



mode.

If the system was turned off while the iPod



was

playing, pushing the Power button will start the

iPod



If another audio source is playing and the iPod



is connected, pushing the button repeat-

edly will change the system to the iPod



mode.

When in the iPod



mode, the interface for iPod



operation is shown on the audio display. The

items on the menu list can be scrolled by turning

the TUNE·SCROLL dial while the iPod



operational. To select an item, push the

ENTER/SETTING button. The following items

in the iPod



menu appear on the display.

.Now playing

.Playlists

.Artists

.Albums

.Songs

.Podcasts

.Genres

.Composers

.Audiobooks

.Shuffle Songs

For more information about each item, see the

iPod



Owner’s Manual.

Next/Previous Track and Fast

Forward/Rewind:

When the or button is pushed and hold

while the iPod



is playing, the iPod



will play

while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the

button is released, the iPod



will return to the

normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed while

the iPod



is playing, the next track or the

beginning of the current track on the iPod



will

be played. Push the button again to select

the previous track.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-59

4-60 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

RPT (repeat) button:

When the button is pushed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

(Repeat Off) ?1 Track Repeat?All Repeat ?

(Repeat Off)

RDM (random) button:

When the button is pushed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

(Shuffle Off) ?Track Shuffle ?(Shuffle Off)

BACK button:

The display will return to the previous screen.

Bluetooth



audio player operation

If you have a compatible Bluetooth



audio

device that is capable of playing audio files,

the device can be connected to the vehicle’s

audio system so that the audio files on the

device play through the vehicle’s speakers.

Regulatory information:

Bluetooth



trademark:

Bluetooth



is a trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and li-

censed to Visteon Corporation.

Connecting Bluetooth



device:

To connect your Bluetooth



device to the

vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button.

JVH0620X

2. Select “Bluetooth” .

3. Select “Add Phone” . This same screen can

be accessed to remove, replace or select a

different Bluetooth



device.

4. The system acknowledges the command

and asks you to initiate a connection from

the Bluetooth



device. The procedure for

connecting a Bluetooth



device varies

according to the cellular phone model. See

the Owner’s manual of the Bluetooth



device for details.

Bluetooth



audio main operation:

To switch to the Bluetooth



audio mode, push

the button repeatedly until the Bluetooth



audio mode is displayed on the screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth



audio are

displayed on the screen. Use the Preset

button to play and use the Preset button to

pause.

JVH0370X

AUX (Auxiliary) input jack

The AUX input jack is located on the lower part

of the instrument panel. The AUX input jack

accepts any standard analog audio input such

as from a portable cassette tape/CD player,

MP3 player or laptop computer.

Push the button repeatedly to play a

compatible device when it is plugged into the

AUX input jack.

NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo

mini plug cable when connecting your music

device to the audio system. Music may not play

properly when a monaural cable is used.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-61

4-62 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH0738X

1. CD eject button

2. FM·AM button

3. AUX button

4. CD insert slot

5. button

Push to display the apps information screen. For

details, see “How to use the APPS·i button”

(P.4-5).

6. Backward seek button and Forward

seek button

7. BACK button

8. TUNE knob / AUDIO button

9. Display screen

10. ON·OFF button / VOL (volume) control knob

11. CD button

12. SXM button*

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if so

equipped)

*No satellite radio reception is available when

the SXM button is pushed to access satellite

radio stations unless optional satellite receiver

and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM

Satellite Radio service subscription is active.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii

and Guam.

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-

tion precautions” (P.4-35).

Audio main operation

ON·OFF button / VOL (volume) control

knob:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and push the ON·OFF button while the

system is off to call up the available audio source

that was playing immediately before the system

was turned off.

To turn the system off, push the ON·OFF button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed

Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active,

the audio volume changes as the driving speed

changes.

Audio settings:

1. push the button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Audio” key.

Use the touch-screen to adjust the following

items to the desired setting:

.Bass:

Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

.Treble:

Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

.Balance:

Adjusts the balance to the desired level.

Balance adjusts the sound level between

the left and right speakers.

.Fade:

Adjusts the fade to the desired level.

Fade adjusts the sound level between

the front and rear speakers.

.Speed Sensitive Vol.:

Adjusts the speed sensitive volume

function, which increases the volume of

the audio system as the speed of the

vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to dis-

able the feature. The higher the setting,

the more the volume increases in relation

to vehicle speed.

.AUX Volume Level:

Controls the volume level of incoming

sound when an auxiliary device is con-

nected to the system. Available options

are Low (Quiet), Medium, and High

(Loud).

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be

adjusted by pushing the AUDIO control knob

and turning it to select the item to adjust. When

the desired item is shown on the display, turn the

tuning to adjust and then push the AUDIO

button until the display returns to the main audio

screen. If the button is not pushed for approxi-

mately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will

automatically reappear.

SXM settings:

To view the SXM settings:

1. Push the button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “SXM” key.

The signal strength, activation status and other

information are displayed on the screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button:

Push the FM·AM button to change the band as

follows:

AM ?FM1 ?FM2 ?AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pushed, the audio source

playing will automatically be turned off and the

last radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on the

screen during FM stereo reception. When the

stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio

automatically changes from stereo to monaural

reception.

SXM band select:

Pushing the SXM button will change the band

as follows:

SXM1* ?SXM2* ?SXM3* ?SXM1*

(satellite, if so equipped)

When the SXM button is pushed while the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the

radio will come on at the last station played.

The last station played will also come on when

the ON·OFF button is pushed.

*When the SXM button is pushed, the satellite

radio mode will be skipped unless an optional

satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-63

4-64 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is

active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the SXM

button is pushed, the compact disc will auto-

matically be turned off and the last radio station

played will come on.

While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation

can be controlled through the touch-screen.

Touch the “Channels” key to display a list of

channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list

to change to that channel. Touch the “Cate-

gories” key to display a list of categories. Touch

a category displayed on the list to display

options within that category.

Tuning with the touch-screen:

When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be

tuned using the touch-screen. To bring up the

visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower

right corner of the screen. A screen appears

with a bar running from low frequencies on the

left to high frequencies on the right. Touch the

screen at the location of the frequency you wish

to tune and the station will change to that

frequency. To return to the regular radio display

screen, touch the “OK” key.

Tuning with the TUNE knob:

The radio can also be manually tuned using the

TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode, turn the

TUNE knob to the left for lower frequencies or to

the right for higher frequencies. When in SXM

mode, turn the TUNE knob to change the

channel.

SEEK tuning:

When in FM or AM mode, push the seek buttons

or to tune from low to high or high to

low frequencies and to stop at the next broad-

casting station.

When in SXM mode, push the seek buttons

or to change the category.

JVH0741X

1 to 6 Station memory operations:

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6

for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set

for the AM band. Eighteen stations can be set

for the SXM band (6 for SXM1, 6 for SXM2, 6

for SXM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM select button or choose

the radio band SXM1, SXM2, SXM3 using

the SXM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual or

seek tuning. Touch and hold any of the

desired station memory keys (1 – 6) until a

beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

4. Other keys can be set in the same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Presets can also be selected by touching the

desired preset number on the screen.

Compact Disc (CD) player operation

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pushed with the system

off and the compact disc loaded, the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with a compact

disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the compact

disc will start to play.

CD/MP3/WMA display mode:

Menu item

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a

CD encoded with text is being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD

is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist, album and song title. There are

other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing:

Random

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is

playing, touching “Random” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All.

This text will appear on the display. To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random”

key until the key is no longer highlighted.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is

playing, touching “Repeat” alternates between repeating the current song and

repeating the current folder. This text will appear on the display. To cancel Repeat

mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted.

Browse

Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of

a song in the list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the

“Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting

a song with the touch-screen to choose a folder.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-65

4-66 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SEEK (Fast Forward/Rewind)

buttons:

Push and hold the seek buttons or for

1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing to

reverse or fast forward the track being played.

The compact disc plays at an increased speed

while reversing or fast forwarding. When the

button is released, the compact disc returns to

normal play speed.

SEEK (Previous/Next Track)

buttons:

Push the seek button while a CD or MP3/

WMA CD is playing to return to the beginning of

the current track. Push the seek button

several times to skip backward several tracks.

Push the seek button while a CD or MP3/

WMA CD is playing to advance one track. Push

the seek button several times to skip

forward several tracks. If the last track on a

CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is

played. If the last track in a folder of an MP3/

WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the next

folder is played.

CD eject button:

When the button is pushed with a compact disc

loaded, the compact disc will eject and the last

source will be played.

If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the

disc will reload.

JVH0370X

AUX (Auxiliary) input

The AUX IN jack is located on the lower center

of the instrument panel. The AUX IN jack

accepts any standard analog audio input such

as from a portable cassette tape/CD player,

MP3 player or a laptop computer. Push the AUX

button to play a compatible device plugged into

the AUX IN jack.

NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo

mini plug cable when connecting your music

device to the audio system. Music may not play

properly when a monaural cable is used.

JVH0742X

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection

port

Connecting a device to the USB port:

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure

that the USB device is connected

correctly into the USB port.

.Do not grab the USB port cover (if

so equipped) when pulling the USB

device out of the port. This could

damage the port and the cover.

.Do not leave the USB cable in a

place where it can be pulled unin-

tentionally. Pulling the cable may

damage the port

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner

information regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

The USB port is located on the lower center of

the instrument panel. Insert the USB device into

the port.

When a compatible storage device is plugged

into the port, compatible audio files on the

storage device can be played through the

vehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operation:

AUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and push the AUX button to switch to

the USB input mode. If another audio source is

playing and a USB memory device is inserted,

push the AUX button until the center display

changes to the USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

memory was playing, push the ON·OFF button

to restart the USB memory.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-67

4-68 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH0743X

Play information:

Information about the audio files being played is

shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s

audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list

of categories that can be used to narrow the

search. Touch the name of a song on the screen

to begin playing that song.

Seek button:

Push the button while an audio file on the

USB device is playing to return to the beginning

of the current track. Push the button several

times to skip backward several tracks.

Push the button while an audio file on the

USB device is playing to advance one track.

Push the button several times to skip

forward several tracks. If the last track in a folder

on the USB device is skipped, the first track of

the next folder is played.

Random and repeat play mode:

While files on a USB device are playing, the play

pattern can be altered so that songs are

repeated or played randomly.

.Random:

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random

play pattern to the USB device. To cancel

Random mode, touch the “Random” key

again.

.Repeat:

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat

play pattern to the USB device. To cancel

Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key again.

SAA3445

iPod



player operation (if so equipped)

Connecting iPod



WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

.Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure

that the USB device is connected

correctly into the USB port.

.Do not grab the USB port cover (if

so equipped) when pulling the USB

device out of the port. This could

damage the port and the cover.

.Do not leave the USB cable in a

place where it can be pulled unin-

tentionally. Pulling the cable may

damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner

information regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

To connect an iPod



to the vehicle so that the

iPod



can be controlled with the audio system

controls and display screen, use the USB port

located on the lower center of the instrument

panel. Connect the iPod



-specific end of the

cable to the iPod



and the USB end of the cable

to the USB port on the vehicle. If your iPod



supports charging via a USB connection, its

battery will be charged while connected to the

vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or

ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod



may

only be able to be operated by the vehicle audio

controls.

To disconnect the iPod



from the vehicle,

remove the USB end of the cable from the

USB port on the vehicle, then remove the cable

from the iPod



iPod



is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility:

The following models are compatible:

.iPod Classic



5th generation (firmware

version 1.3.0 or later)

.iPod Classic



6th generation (firmware

version 2.0.1 or later)

.iPod Classic



6th (6.1) generation (firmware

version 2.0.1 or later)

.iPod Classic



6th (6.2) generation (firmware

version 2.0.4 or later)

.iPod Touch



2nd generation (firmware ver-

sion 4.2.1 or later)*

.iPod Touch



3rd generation (firmware ver-

sion 5.1.1 or later)

.iPod Touch



4th generation (firmware ver-

sion 6.1.3 or later)

.iPod Touch



5th generation (firmware ver-

sion 6.1.3 or later)

.iPod nano



- 2nd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

.iPod nano



- 3rd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

.iPod nano



- 4th generation (firmware

version 1.0.4 or later)

.iPod nano



- 5th generation (firmware

version 1.0.2 or later)

.iPod nano



- 6th generation (firmware

version 1.2 or later)

.iPod nano



- 7th generation (firmware

version 1.2 or later)

.iPhone



3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)

.iPhone



3GS (firmware version 5.1.1or

later)

.iPhone



4 (firmware version 6.1.3 or later)

.iPhone



4S (firmware version 6.1.3 or later)

.iPhone



5 (firmware version 6.1.3 or later)

* Some features of this iPod



may not be fully

functional.

Make sure that your iPod



firmware is updated

to the version indicated above.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-69

4-70 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH0746X

Audio main operation:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Push the AUX button repeatedly to

switch to the iPod



mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod



was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will

start the iPod



AUX button:

When the AUX button is pushed with the system

off and the iPod



connected, the system will turn

on. If another audio source is playing and the

iPod



is connected, push the AUX button

repeatedly until the center display changes to

the iPod



mode.

JVH0747X

Interface:

The interface for iPod



operation shown on the

vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar

to the iPod



interface. Use the touch-screen,

BACK button or the TUNE knob to navigate the

menus on the screen.

When the iPod



is playing, touch the “Menu”

key to bring up the iPod



interface.

Depending on the iPod



model, the following

items may be available on the menu list screen.

For further information about each item, see the

iPod



Owner’s Manual.

.Playlists

.Artists

.Albums

.Genres

.Songs

.Composers

.Audiobooks

.Podcasts

Shuffle and repeat play mode:

While the iPod



is playing, the play pattern can

be altered so that songs are repeated or played

randomly.

.Shuffle:

Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random

play pattern to the iPod



. When the Shuffle

mode is active, the text is highlighted. To

cancel Shuffle mode, touch the “Shuffle” key

again until the text is no longer highlighted.

.Repeat:

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat

play pattern to the iPod



. When the repeat

mode is active, the text is highlighted. To

cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat”

key again until the text is no longer high-

lighted.

Seek button:

Push the seek button or to skip

backward or forward one track.

Push and hold the seek button or for

1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse or

fast forward the track being played. The track

plays at an increased speed while reversing or

fast forwarding. When the button is released,

the track returns to normal play speed.

JVH0748X

Scrolling menus:

While navigating long lists of artists, albums or

songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll

the list by the first character in the name. To

activate character indexing, touch the “A-Z” key

in the upper right corner of the screen. Turn the

TUNE knob to choose the number or letter to

jump to in the list and then push the AUDIO

button.

Bluetooth



streaming audio

If you have a compatible Bluetooth



audio

device that is capable of playing audio files,

the device can be connected to the vehicle’s

audio system so that the audio files on the

device play through the vehicle’s speakers.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-71

4-72 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH0735X

Connecting Bluetooth



audio:

To connect your Bluetooth



audio device to the

vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Push the button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

JVH0750X

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

5. The system acknowledges the command

and asks you to initiate connecting from the

phone handset. The connecting procedure

of the cellular phone varies according to

each cellular phone model. See the cellular

phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can

also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for

instructions on connecting NISSAN recom-

mended cellular phones.

Audio main operation:

To switch to the Bluetooth



audio mode, push

the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth



audio mode is displayed on the screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth



audio are

displayed on the screen.

SAA0451

CD/USB MEMORY CARE AND

CLEANING

.Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the

surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

.Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

.To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

.A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

USB memory

.Do not touch the terminal portion of the USB

memory.

.Do not place heavy objects on the USB

memory.

.Do not store the USB memory in very humid

locations.

.Do not expose the USB memory to direct

sunlight.

.Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory.

Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual for

the details.

SAA3383

1. SOURCE select switch

2. Tuning switch

3. VOLUME control switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using the

controls on the steering wheel.

SOURCE select switch

Push the SOURCE select switch to change the

mode to available audio source.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-73

4-74 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

VOLUME control switch

Push up or down the VOLUME control switch to

increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning switch

AM and FM radio:

.Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5

seconds to change the next or previous

radio preset.

.Push the tuning switch for more than 1.5

seconds to seek the next or previous radio

station.

SXM operation (if so equipped):

.Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

.Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

go to the next or previous category.

iPod



.Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5

seconds to return to the beginning of the

present program or skip to the next program.

Push several times to skip back or skip

through programs.

.This system searches for the blank intervals

between selections. If there is a blank

interval within one program or there is no

interval between programs, the system may

not stop in the desired or expected location.

CD:

.Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5

seconds to return to the beginning of the

present program or skip to the next program.

Push several times to skip back or skip

through programs.

.This system searches for the blank intervals

between selections. If there is a blank

interval within one program or there is no

interval between programs, the system may

not stop in the desired or expected location.

.Push the tuning switch for more than 1.5

seconds to change the folders (if there are

any folders).

USB:

.Push the tuning switch for less than 1.5

seconds to return to the beginning of the

present program or skip to the next program.

Push several times to skip back or skip

through programs.

.This system searches for the blank intervals

between selections. If there is a blank

interval within one program or there is no

interval between programs, the system may

not stop in the desired or expected location.

.If there are any folders, push the tuning

switch for more than 1.5 seconds to change

the folders (if so equipped).

Bluetooth



Audio operation:

.Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

skip ahead or back to the next song.

.Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

reverse or fast forward the current track.

SAA2102

Type A (if so equipped)

SAA2374

Type B (if so equipped)

ANTENNA

To remove the antenna, hold the bottom of the

antenna and turn it counterclockwise.

To install the antenna, turn the antenna clock-

wise and tighten.

CAUTION

.To avoid damaging or deforming the

antenna, be sure to fold down (if so

equipped) or remove the antenna

under the following conditions.

— The vehicle enters a garage with

a low ceiling.

— The vehicle is covered with a car

cover.

.Be sure that antenna is removed

before the vehicle enters an auto-

matic car wash.

.Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation. Otherwise,

the antenna rod may break during

vehicle operation.

This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone

Integration technology. This allows many com-

patible Smartphone applications to be displayed

and easily controlled through the vehicle’s

touchscreen.

NOTE:

A compatible smartphone and registration

is required to use mobile applications or to

access connected features of certain vehi-

cle applications.

REGISTERING WITH NISSANCON-

NECT

APP

To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is

necessary for the user to register. In order to

website and

prompts on the NissanConnect

App. Once

registered, download the NissanConnect

App

from your compatible phone’s application down-

load source and then log into the application. If

you already have an account created through

the App, please log in.

NissanConnect

website:

For U.S.

www.nissanusa.com/connect/

For Canada

Canada.NissanConnect.com

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-75

NISSANCONNECT

APP

SMARTPHONE INTEGRATION

4-76 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CONNECT PHONE

To use this feature, a compatible smartphone

must be connected via Bluetooth



or USB to

the vehicle. For more information on connecting

your phone, see “Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone

System (models without navigation system)”

(P.4-80) or “Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone

System (models with navigation system)” (P.4-

89).

NOTE:

.For Apple iPhones



, NissanConnect

Apps REQUIRES the phone to be

plugged in via USB.

.For Android phones, NissanConnect

Apps REQUIRES the phone to be

paired via Bluetooth



APPLICATION DOWNLOAD

Once connected, the NissanConnect

App

will search your phone to determine which

compatible applications are currently installed.

The user will then choose which apps they want

to bring into their vehicle from the list of apps

within the “Manage My Apps” section of the

NissanConnect

App on their smartphone. The

vehicle will then download the in-vehicle inter-

face for each of these compatible applications.

Once downloaded, the user can access their

selected smartphone applications through the

vehicle touchscreen. For more information on

application availability see NissanConnect

website.

NissanConnect

website:

For U.S.

www.nissanusa.com/connect/

For Canada

www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect (English)

www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect/fr (French)

GENERAL INFORMATION

Apple Siri



Eyes Free personal assistant can be

accessed from the vehicle. Siri



Eyes Free can

be accessed in Siri



Eyes Free mode to reduce

user distraction. In this mode, Siri



Eyes Free is

available for interaction by voice control. After

connecting a compatible Apple device by using

Bluetooth



, Siri



Eyes Free can be activated

using the TALK switch on the steering

wheel.

Siri



is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

INFO:

.Some Siri



Eyes Free functions, such as

opening apps, may not be available during

driving.

.For best results, always update your device

to the latest software version.

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate the

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

.For functions that can be used in Siri



Eyes

Free, please refer to the Apple website.

SIRI



EYES FREE

REQUIREMENTS

Siri



is available on the iPhone



4S or later.

Devices released before iPhone



4S are not

supported by the Siri



Eyes Free system.

Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about

device compatibility.

Siri



must be enabled on the phone. Please

check phone settings.

If the device has a lock screen, Siri



must be

accessible from the lock screen. Please check

phone settings.

For best results, always update your device to

the latest software version. SAA3385

SIRI



EYES FREE ACTIVATION

Siri



Eyes Free function can be activated by

using the TALK switch on the steering

wheel.

Models with navigation system

1. Connect a Siri



Eyes Free enabled iPhone



to the vehicle. (See “Connecting procedure”

(P.4-92).)

2. After the Bluetooth



connection is estab-

lished, push and hold the TALK switch

to activate the Siri



Eyes Free function.

Models without navigation system

1. Connect a Siri



Eyes Free enabled iPhone



to the vehicle. (See “Initialization” (P.4-83).)

2. After the Bluetooth



connection is estab-

lished, the switch operation select screen is

displayed.

3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for

Siri



Eyes Free activation. Switch action can

also be changed from the Bluetooth



settings menu. (See “Changing Siri



Eyes

Free Settings (models without navigation

system)” (P.4-78).)

OPERATING SIRI



EYES FREE

1. Push or push and hold the TALK switch.

2. Speak your command and then listen to the

Siri



Eyes Free reply.

After starting Siri



Eyes Free, push the

TALK switch again within 5 seconds of the end

of the Siri



Eyes Free announcement to extend

the session.

Example 1 - Playing music

1. Push or push and hold the TALK switch.

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, etc.)”.

3. Your vehicle will automatically change to

Bluetooth



Audio or iPod



mode* when the

music starts playing. Mode selection is

determined by the phone.

*: If the iPhone



is also connected with the

USB cable.

If the audio track does not start playing

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-77

4-78 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

automatically after Siri



Eyes Free ends, try

changing the track or audio source to resume

playback.

NOTE:

For best results, use the native music app.

Performance of music control function

while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other

3rd party music apps may vary and is

controlled by the iPhone



Example 2 - Replying to text messages

1. If a compatible iPhone



is connected and

“Show Notifications” of the iPhone



settings

is enabled, the vehicle will display a notifica-

tion for new incoming text messages.

2. After reading the message, push or push

and hold the TALK switch to reply using

Siri



Eyes Free.

3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message” or

a similar command to reply using Siri



Eyes

Free.

CHANGING SIRI



EYES FREE SET-

TINGS (models without navigation sys-

tem)

Settings for Siri



Eyes Free can be found in the

Bluetooth



settings menu. (See “Bluetooth



settings” (P.4-88).)

1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE·FOLDER or TUNE·SCROLL

knob to select “Bluetooth” and then push

the ENTER/SETTING button.

3. Use the TUNE·FOLDER or TUNE·SCROLL

knob to select “Siri” and then push the

ENTER/SETTING button.

4. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” using

the TUNE·FOLDER or TUNE·SCROLL knob

and then push the ENTER/SETTING button.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot access Siri



Eyes Free from the switch on the steering wheel Check if a Bluetooth



connection is established between the iPhone



and the system.

Check if Siri



is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri



setting.

Check that Siri



can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu

of your phone.

Models without navigation system:

Check the settings for Siri



Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long

Press”, you must push and hold the TALK switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5

seconds to start Siri



Eyes Free. If the setting is “Short Press”, a short push and release of the switch

should start Siri



Eyes Free.

Audio source does not change automatically to iPod



or Bluetooth



Audio mode

For best results, use the native music app. Performance of music control function while using

Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary.

For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud

storage may degrade performance.

Switch the source manually by pushing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the

SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel.

Play, pause, next track, previous track or play timer does not work For best results, use the native music app. Performance of music control function while using

Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.

Cannot hear any music/audio being played back from a connected

iPhone



Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth



Audio or iPod



mode. A USB connection is

required for iPod



mode.

Cannot hear map turn-by-turn direction guidance from a connected

iPhone



Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth



Audio or iPod



mode. A USB connection is

required for iPod



mode.

Cannot receive text message notifications on the vehicle audio

system

Check if “Show Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On your phone, go to Bluetooth



settings.

Find the device name, like “My Car”. Tap on your phone. Turn on “Show Notifications”.

Cannot reply to text message notifications using Siri



Eyes Free After receiving an incoming text message, follow the on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the

TALK switch on the steering wheel for Siri



Eyes Free. After Siri



Eyes Free starts, say “Text

Message”.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-79

4-80 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in

your vehicle, be sure to observe the following

precautions, otherwise the new equipment may

adversely affect the electronic control modules

and electronic control system harness.

WARNING

.A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation. Some jurisdictions prohi-

bit the use of cellular phones while

driving.

.If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands-free

cellular phone operational mode (if

so equipped) is highly recom-

mended. Exercise extreme caution

at all times so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

.If a conversation in a moving vehicle

requires you to take notes, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

.Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the electronic control

modules.

.Keep the antenna wire more than 8

in (20 cm) away from the electronic

control system harness. Do not

route the antenna wire next to any

harness.

.Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the man-

ufacturer.

.Connect the ground wire from the

CB radio chassis to the body.

.For details, it is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

.Use a phone after stopping your

vehicle in a safe location. If you

have to use a phone while driving,

exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation.

.If you are unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation while

talking on the phone, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a

compatible Bluetooth



enabled cellular phone,

you can set up the wireless connection between

your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module. With Bluetooth



wireless technology,

you can make or receive a hands-free telephone

call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Bluetooth



HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM (models without

navigation system)

Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-

vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-

ing procedure is required. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

phone module when the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or ON position with the

previously connected cellular phone turned on

and carried in the vehicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to accept

connections to other Bluetooth



devices. If

your phone does not connect automatic

ally to the system, consult the phone’s

Owner’s Manual for details on device

operation.

You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth



cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

.Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the Hands-Free

Phone System.

.Some Bluetooth



enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.

com/bluetooth for a recommended phone

list.

.You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

— Your vehicle is outside of the cellular

service area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal; such

as in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a

mountainous area.

.When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice

during a call.

.Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the in-

vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality

degradation and wireless connection dis-

ruption.

.While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth



wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may

discharge quicker than usual. The Blue-

tooth



Hands-Free Phone System cannot

charge cellular phones.

.If the Hands-Free Phone System seems to

be malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting

guide” in this section. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.

.Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

.Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

.CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

.Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1) this device may not cause interference

and

2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-81

4-82 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

IC Regulatory information

.Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the

device.

.This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

Bluetooth



trademark

Bluetooth



is a trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and

licensed to Visteon Corporation.

USING THE SYSTEM

The voice recognition system allows hands-free

operation of the Bluetooth



Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may

not be available so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

SAA3385

Control buttons and microphone

The control buttons for the Bluetooth



Hands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering

wheel.

PHONE SEND:

Push the button to initiate a VR session or

answer an incoming call.

INFO:

If the “Siri” on the Bluetooth



settings menu is

set to “Short Press”, pushing and holding the

PHONE SEND button initiates a VR

session for Hands-Free Phone operation. (See

“Bluetooth



settings” (P.4-88).)

You can also use the button to interrupt the

system feedback and give a command at once.

See “List of voice commands” and “During a

call” in this section for more information.

PHONE END:

While the voice recognition system is active,

push and hold the button to quit the voice

recognition system at any time.

Microphone:

Microphone is located near the map lights.

Manual control:

While using the Voice Recognition system, it is

possible to select menu options by using the

steering wheel controls instead of speaking

voice commands. To activate manual control

mode, push the button on the steering

wheel to access the phone menu and then tilt

the tuning switch ( or ) up or down.

The manual control mode does not allow dialing

a phone number by digits. The user may select

an entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls

lists. To reactivate Voice Recognition, exit the

manual control mode by pushing and holding the

button. At that time, pushing the button

will start the Hands-Free Phone System.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the Bluetooth



Hands-

Free Phone System using several languages

that are available. For operations to change the

language, see “Audio main operation” (P.4-45)

or “Audio main operation” (P.4-54).

Changing voice feedback volume

If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, push the volume control switch on the

steering wheel while being provided with feed-

back. You can also use the VOL (volume) control

knob on the audio unit.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ACC

or ON position, voice recognition is initialized,

which takes a few seconds. If the button is

pushed before the initialization completes, the

system will announce “Hands-free phone sys-

tem not ready” and will not react to voice

commands.

Connecting procedure:

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be cancelled.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth



cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth



Hands-

Free Phone System;

1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE·FOLDER or TUNE·SCROLL

control knob to select “Bluetooth” and then

push the ENTER/SETTING button.

3. Select “Add Phone” and then push the

ENTER/SETTING button.

4. When a message with a PIN appears on the

screen, operate the Bluetooth



phone to

enter the PIN.

The connecting procedure varies according to

each phone. See the phone’s Owner’s Manual

for details.

Giving voice commands

To operate voice recognition, push and release

the button located on the steering wheel.

After the tone sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the

microphone, and voice feedback is given when

the command is accepted.

.If you need to hear the available commands

for the current menu again, say “Help” and

the system will repeat them.

.If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized.

Please try again.” Make sure the command

is said exactly as prompted by the system

and repeat the command in a clear voice.

.If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” any time

the system is waiting for a response.

.You can cancel a command when the

system is waiting for a response by saying,

“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces

“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can

also push and hold the button on the

steering wheel at any time to end the VR

session. Whenever the VR session is

cancelled, a double beep is played to

indicate you have exited the system.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-83

4-84 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

.If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, push the ( -or +) button

on the steering wheel while being provided

with feedback. You can also use the radio

volume control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt:

In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pushing the button on the steering wheel.

After interrupting the system, wait for a beep

before speaking your command.

One Shot Call:

To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example, push

the button and after the tone say, “Call

Redial”.

Operating tips:

To get the best performance out of the voice

recognition system, observe the following:

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands correctly.

.Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

.Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

.Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Voice commands

Voice commands can be used to operate the

Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System. Push

the button and say “Phone” to bring up the

phone command menu. The available options

are:

.Call

.Phonebook

.Recent Calls

.Show Applications

.Messaging

.Select Phone

Call:

For more information on the “Call” command,

see “Making a call” (P.4-85).

Phonebook:

The following commands are available under

“Phonebook”:

.(A Name)

Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a

list of options for that phonebook entry. The

system will say the name it interpreted

based on the voice command provided. If

the name is incorrect, say “Correction” to

hear another name.

Once the correct phonebook entry is

identified, say “Dial” to dial the number or

“Send Text” to send a text message to that

number. Say “Record Name” to record a

name for the phonebook entry. Say “Delete

Recording” to delete a recorded name for

the phonebook entry.

.List Names

Speak this command to have the system list

the names in the phonebook one by one

alphabetically. Say “Dial” to dial the number

of the current name or “Send Text” to send a

text message to that number. Say “Next

Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move through

the list alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to

record a name for the current phonebook

entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a

recorded name for the current phonebook

entry.

.Delete Entry

Speak this command to delete an entry in

the phonebook. Choose an entry to delete

by speaking the desired name or say “List

Names”.

Recent Calls:

The following commands are available under

“Recent Calls”:

.Incoming (Calls)

Speak this command to list the last five

incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the name

will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone

number of the incoming call will be dis-

played.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number. Say

“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of incoming calls.

.Missed (Calls)

Speak this command to list the last five

missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from

an entry in the phonebook, the name will be

displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of

the missed call will be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number. Say

“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of missed calls.

.Outgoing (Calls)

Speak this command to list the last five

outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call

was to an entry in the phonebook, the name

will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone

number of the outgoing call will be dis-

played.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number. Say

“Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move

through the list of outgoing calls.

.Redial

Speak this command to call the last number

dialed.

.Call Back

Speak this command to call the number of

the last incoming call to the vehicle.

Show Applications:

Select this command to display list of smart-

phone apps available.

Messaging:

Speak this command to access text messaging

functions. For more information on these com-

mands, see “Text messaging” (P.4-86).

Select Phone:

Speak this command to select a phone to use

from a list of those phones connected to the

vehicle.

Making a call

To make a call from a phone connected to the

vehicle’s Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem:

1. Push the button.

2. The system will prompt you for a command.

Say “Call”.

3. Select one of the available voice commands

to continue:

.(A Name)

Speak the name of a phonebook entry to

place a call to that entry. The system will

respond with the name it interpreted from

your command and will prompt you to

confirm that the name is correct. Say

“Yes” to initiate the call or “No” to hear

another name from the phonebook.

.List Names

Select this command to call a phone

number that is stored in the phonebook.

.Phone Number

Speak this command to place a call by

inputting numbers.

For 7- and 10-digit phone numbers,

speak the numbers. When finished, say

“Dial” to initiate the call. Say “Correction”

at any time in the process to correct a

misspoken or misinterpreted number.

For phone numbers with more digits or

special characters, say “Special Num-

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-85

4-86 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

ber”, then speak the digits. Up to 24

digits can be entered. Available special

characters are “star”, “pound”, “plus” and

“pause”. When finished, say “Dial” to

initiate the call. Say “Correction” at any

time in the process to correct a mis-

spoken or misinterpreted number or

character.

.Redial

Speak this command to dial the number

of the last outgoing call. The system will

display “Redialing (name/number)”. The

name of the phonebook entry will be

displayed if it available, otherwise the

number being redialed will be displayed.

.Call Back

Speak this command to dial the number

of the last incoming call. The system will

display “Calling back (name/number)” .

The name of the phonebook entry will be

displayed if it available, otherwise the

number being called back will be dis-

played.

Receiving a call

When a call is received by the phone connected

to the vehicle’s Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone

System, the call information is displayed on

either the vehicle information display or both the

vehicle information display and the control panel

display.

Push the button to accept the call. Push the

button to reject the call.

During a call

While a call is active, push the button to

access additional options. Speak one of the

following commands:

.Send

Speak this command followed by the digits

to enter digits during the phone call.

.Mute On or Mute Off

Speak the command to mute or unmute the

system.

.Transfer Call

Speak this command to transfer the call to

the handset. To transfer the call back from

the handset to the Bluetooth



Hands-Free

Phone System, push the button and

confirm when prompted.

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System allows for call wait-

ing functionality. If a call is received while

another call is already active, a message will

be displayed on the screen. Push the

button to hold the active call and switch to the

second call. Push the button to reject the

second call.

While the second call is active, pushing the

button will allow the same commands that

available during any call as well as two additional

commands:

.Switch Call

Speak this command to hold the second call

and switch back to the original call.

.End Other Call

Speak this command to stay with the

second call and end the original call.

Push the button to accept the call. Push the

button to reject the call.

Ending a call

To end an active call, push the button.

Text messaging

WARNING

.Laws in some jurisdictions may

restrict the use of some of the

applications and features, such as

social networking and texting.

.Laws in some jurisdictions may

restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.

Check local regulations before

using this feature.

.Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe

location. If you have to use the

feature while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

.If you are unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation while

using the text messaging feature,

pull off the road to a safe location

and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:

.This feature is automatically disabled if

the connected device does not support

the Message Access Profile (MAP). See

the phone’s Owner’s Manual for details

and instructions.

.Many phones may require special per-

mission to enable text messaging.

Check the phone’s screen during Blue-

tooth



pairing. For some phones, you

may need to enable “Notifications”in

the phone’s Bluetooth



menu for text

messages to appear on the vehicle

audio system. See the phone’s Owner’s

Manual for details. Text message inte-

gration requires that the phone support

MAP (Message Access Profile) for both

receiving and sending text messages.

Some phones may not support all text

messaging features. Refer to www.

nissanusa.com/bluetooth or www.

nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility

information, as well as your device’s

Owner’s Manual.

The system allows for the sending and receiving

of text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Push the button.

2. Say “Messaging”.

3. Say “Send Text”.

4. The system will provide a list of available

commands in order to determine the reci-

pient of the text message. Choose from the

following:

.(A name)

.Number

.Incoming Calls

.Outgoing Calls

.Missed Calls

If “Incoming Calls”, “Outgoing Calls”, or

“Missed Calls” is selected, the following

additional commands will be displayed:

.Send Text

.Next Entry

.Previous Entry

For more information about these options,

see “Voice commands” (P.4-84).

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send. Five

predefined messages are available as well

as three custom messages. To choose one

of the predefined messages, speak one of

the following:

.“Driving, can’t text”

.“Call me”

.“On my way”

.“Running late”

.“Okay”

To send one of the custom messages, say

“Custom Message”. If more than one cus-

tom message is stored, the system will

prompt for the number of the desired

custom message. For more information on

setting and managing custom text mes-

sages, see “Bluetooth



settings” (P.4-88).

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-87

4-88 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Reading a received text message:

1. Push the button.

2. Say “Messaging”.

3. Say “Read Text”.

The text message, sender and delivery time are

shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch on

the steering wheel to scroll through all text

messages if more than one are available. Push

the button to exit the text message screen.

Push the button to access the following

options for replying to the text message:

.Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender of

the text message using the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System.

.Send Text

Speak this command to send a text mes-

sage response to the sender of the text

message.

.Read Text

Speak this command to read the text

message again.

.Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the

previous text message (if available).

.Next Text

Speak this command to move to the next

text message (if available).

NOTE:

.Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 MPH (8

km/h).

.iPhones



can only send text messages

via Siri



Eyes Free.

Making custom messages with Siri



Eyes

Free:

If a connected iPhone



is equipped with Siri



,it

can also be used to create custom messages.

(See “Siri



Eyes Free” (P.4-76).)

Bluetooth



settings

To access and adjust the settings for the

Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE·FOLDER or TUNE·SCROLL

knob to select “Bluetooth” and then push

the ENTER/SETTING button:

.Bluetooth

Select “ON” or “OFF” to turn the

vehicle’s Bluetooth



system on or off.

.Add Phone

To connect a phone to the system, see

“Initialization” (P.4-83).

.Delete Phone

Select to delete a phone from the

displayed list. The system will ask to

confirm before deleting the phone.

.Replace Phone

Select to replace a phone from the

displayed list. When a selection is made,

the system will ask to confirm before

proceeding. The recorded phonebook for

the phone being deleted will be saved as

long as the new phone’s phonebook is

the same as the old phone’s phonebook.

.Select Phone

Select to connect to a previously con-

nected phone from the displayed list.

.Phonebook Download

Select to turn on or off the automatic

download of a connected phone’s pho-

nebook.

.Siri

Select the PHONE SEND button

operation for Siri



Eyes Free function

from “Short Press” and “Long Press” (if

available). (see “Siri



Eyes Free” (P.4-

76).)

“Siri” is displayed only when a Siri



Eyes

Free enabled iPhone



is connected to

the vehicle.

.Show Incoming Calls

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming

call information displayed only in the

vehicle information display. Select “Both”

to have incoming call information dis-

played in both the vehicle information

display and the center display screen

.Text Message

Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text

messaging feature.

.New Text Sound

Select to adjust the volume of the sound

that plays when a new text is received by

a phone connected to the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System. The setting

all the way to the left indicates that the

new text sound will be muted.

.Show Incoming Text

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming

text messages displayed only in the

vehicle information display. Select “Both”

to have incoming text messages dis-

played in both the vehicle information

display and the center display screen.

Select “None” to have no display of

incoming text messages.

.Edit Custom Messages

Select to set a custom message that will

be available with the standard options

when sending a text message. To set a

custom message, send a text message to

your own phone number while the phone

is connected to the system. Three

custom messages can be set. Custom

messages can only be set while the

vehicle is stationary.

.Auto Reply

Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply

function. When enabled, the vehicle will

automatically send a predefined text

message to the sender when a text

message is received while driving.

.Auto Reply Message

Select to choose the message that is

sent when the Auto Reply function is

enabled. Choose from “I’m Driving” or

one of the three custom messages

stored in the system.

.Vehicle Signature On/Off

Select to choose whether or not the

vehicle signature is added to outgoing

text messages from the vehicle. This

message cannot be changed or custo-

mized.

WARNING

.Use a phone after stopping your

vehicle in a safe location. If you

have to use a phone while driving,

exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation.

.If you are unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation while

talking on the phone, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-

tery, use a phone after starting the

engine.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-89

Bluetooth



HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM (models with navigation

system)

4-90 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SAA3446

1. Volume control switch í/+

2. PHONE SEND button

3. PHONE END button

4. Microphone

The phone button is located on the control

panel can also use to control the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System. (See “Control but-

tons and functions (models with navigation

system)” (P.4-3).)

Your vehicle is equipped with the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a

compatible Bluetooth



enabled cellular phone,

you can set up the wireless connection between

your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module. With Bluetooth



wireless technology,

you can make or receive a hands-free telephone

call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-

vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-

ing procedure is required. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

phone module when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position with the connected

cellular phone turned on and carried in the

vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth



cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the

phone commands, so dialing a phone number

using your voice is possible. For more details,

see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System (mod-

els with navigation system)” (P.4-96).

Before using the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

.Set up the wireless connection between a

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module before using the Hands-Free Phone

System.

.Some Bluetooth



enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.

com/bluetooth for a recommended phone

list and connecting.

.You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

— Your vehicle is outside of the cellular

service area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive cellular signal; such as

in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a

mountainous area.

— Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

.When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice

during a call.

.Immediately after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position, it may be

impossible to receive a call for a short

period of time.

.Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the in-

vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality

degradation and wireless connection dis-

ruption.

.While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth



wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may

discharge quicker than usual. The Blue-

tooth



Hands-Free Phone System cannot

charge cellular phones.

.If the Hands-Free Phone System seems to

be malfunctioning, visit www.nissanusa.

com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.

.Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

.Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

.The signal strength display on the monitor

will not coincide with the signal strength

display of some cellular phones.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the

supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, mod-

ification, or attachments could damage the

transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. This device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

Bluetooth



is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to Robert Bosch

GmbH.

VOICE COMMAND

You can use voice commands to operate various

Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System features

using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.

For more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recogni-

tion System (models with navigation system)”

(P.4-96).

Voice Prompt Interrupt

While using the voice recognition system, the

system voice can be interrupted to allow the

user to speak commands. While the system is

speaking, push the button on the steering

wheel. The system voice will stop and a tone will

be heard. After the tone, speak desired com-

mand (displayed on the touch-screen).

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example, push

the button and after the tone say, “Call

Redial”.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-91

4-92 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

JVH0735X

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be cancelled.

1. Push the button on the control panel.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

5. Initiate the connecting process from the

handset. The system will display the mes-

sage: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on your

Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN is displayed

on your Bluetooth



device, select “Yes” to

complete the pairing process.

For more information, see the Bluetooth



device’s Owner’s Manual.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

To access the vehicle phonebook:

1. Push the button on the control panel.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed

list.

4. The number of the entry will be displayed on

the screen. Touch the number to initiate

dialing.

NOTE:

To scroll quickly through the list, touch the

“A-Z”key in the upper right corner of the

screen. Turn the TUNE knob to choose a

letter or number and then push AUDIO

button. The list will move to the first entry

that begins with that number or letter.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedure below:

1. Push the button on the control panel.

The “Phone” screen will appear on the

display.

2. Select one of the following options to make

a call:

.“Phonebook”: Select the name from an entry

stored in the vehicle phonebook.

.“Call Lists”: Select the name from the

incoming, outgoing or missed.

.“Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from the

vehicle.

.“”: Input the phone number manually

using a keypad displayed on the screen. For

information on how to use the touch-screen,

see “Control buttons and functions (models

with navigation system)” (P.4-3).

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is placed to the connected phone,

the display will change to phone mode.

To accept the incoming call:

.Push the button on the steering wheel.

.Touch the green phone icon on the screen.

To reject the incoming call:

.Push the button on the steering wheel.

.Touch the red phone icon on the screen.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, the following options are

available on the screen:

.“Handset”

Select this option to switch control of the

phone call over to the handset.

.“Mute Mic.”

Select this option to mute the microphone.

Select again to unmute the microphone.

.Red phone ( ) icon

Select to end the phone call.

ENDING A CALL

To end a phone call, select the red phone ( )

icon on the screen or push the button on

the steering wheel.

TEXT MESSAGING

WARNING

.Laws in some jurisdictions may

restrict the use of some of the

applications and features, such as

social networking and texting.

.Laws in some jurisdictions may

restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.

Check local regulations before

using this feature.

.Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe

location. If you have to use the

feature while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

.If you are unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation while

using the text messaging feature,

pull off the road to a safe location

and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special permis-

sion to enable text messaging. Check the

phone’s screen during Bluetooth



pairing.

For some phones, you may need to enable

“Notifications”in the phone’s Bluetooth



menu for text messages to appear on the

vehicle audio system. See the phone’s

Owner’s Manual for details. Text message

integration requires that the phone sup-

port MAP (Message Access Profile) for

both receiving and sending text messages.

Some phones may not support all text

messaging features. Refer to www.nissa-

nusa.com/bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/

bluetooth for compatibility information,

as well as your device’s Owner’s Manual.

The system allows for the sending and receiving

of text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message

1. Push the button on the steering wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

4. The system will provide a list of available

commands in order to determine the reci-

pient of the text message. Choose from the

following:

.To (a name)

.Enter Number

.Missed Calls

.Incoming Calls

.Outgoing Calls

For more information about these options,

see “Voice command” (P.4-91).

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send. Nine

predefined messages are available as well

as three custom messages. To choose one

of the predefined messages, speak one of

the following after the tone:

.“Driving, can’t text”

.“Call me”

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-93

4-94 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

.“On my way”

.“Running late”

.“Okay”

.“Yes”

.“No”

.“Where are you?”

.“When?”

To send one of the custom messages, say

“Custom Messages”. If more than one

custom message is stored, the system will

prompt for the number of the desired

custom message. For more information on

setting and managing custom text mes-

sages, see “Phone settings” (P.4-96).

Reading a received text message

1. Push the button on the steering wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

The text message, sender and delivery time are

shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to

scroll through all text messages if more than one

are available. Push the button to exit the text

message screen. Push the button to

access the following options for replying to the

text message:

.Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender of

the text message using the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System.

.Send Text

Speak this command to send a text mes-

sage response to the sender of the text

message.

.Read Text

Speak this command to read the text

message again.

.Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the

previous text message (if available).

.Next Text

Speak this command to move to the next

text message (if available).

NOTE:

.Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 MPH (8

km/h).

.iPhones



can only send text messages

via Siri



Eyes Free.

Making custom messages with Siri



Eyes Free

If a connected iPhone



is equipped with Siri



,it

can also be used to create custom messages.

(See “Siri



Eyes Free” (P.4-76).)

JVH0750X

Bluetooth



SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:

1. Push the button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

Menu Item Result

Phone Settings For detailed information, see “Phone settings” (P.4-96).

Connect New Device Touch to connect a new Bluetooth



device to the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System.

Select Connected Device Touch to choose a Bluetooth



device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System.

Replace Connected Device Touch to replace a Bluetooth



device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System.

Delete Connected Device Touch to delete a Bluetooth



device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System.

Bluetooth Touch to toggle Bluetooth



on and off.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-95

4-96 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

PHONE SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:

1. Push the button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjust

the following settings as desired:

.Sort Phonebook By:

Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to

choose how phonebook entries are alpha-

betically displayed on the screen.

.Use Phonebook From:

Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s phone-

book. Select “SIM” to use the phonebook on

the SIM card. Touch “Both” to use both

sources.

.Download Phonebook Now:

Touch to download the phonebook to the

vehicle from the chosen source.

.Record Name for Phonebook Entry:

Touch to record a name for a phonebook

entry for use with the NISSAN Voice

Recognition System.

.Phone Notifications for:

Touch “Driver” to have phone notifications

shown in the vehicle information display.

Touch “Both” to have phone notifications

shown in both the vehicle information dis-

play and the center display screen.

.Text Messaging:

Touch to toggle the text message function-

ality on or off.

.Show Incoming Text for:

Touch “Driver” to have incoming text notifi-

cations shown in the vehicle information

display. Touch “Both” to have text notifica-

tions shown in both the vehicle information

display and the center display screen. Touch

“Off” to turn off all text notifications.

.Auto Reply:

Touch to toggle the auto reply functionality

on or off.

.Auto Reply Message:

Touch to indicate preferred message to be

sent when “Auto Reply” function is acti-

vated.

.Use Vehicle’s Signature:

Touch to toggle on or off the addition of the

vehicle signature to outgoing messages

.Custom Text Messages:

Touch this option to select a custom

message to edit. There are 4 customer

message slots available.

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows

hands-free operation of the systems equipped

on this vehicle, such as the phone and naviga-

tion systems.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push the

button located on the steering wheel.

When prompted, speak the command for the

system you wish to activate. The command given

is picked up by the microphone and performed

when it is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice

Recognition will provide a voice response as

well as a message in the center display to inform

you of the command results.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (models with navigation

system)

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which

takes a few seconds. When completed, the

system is ready to accept voice commands. If

the button is pushed before the initialization

completes, the system will announce: “Voice

Recognition System not ready. Please wait.”

SAA3385

Giving voice commands

1. Push the button.

2. The system announces: “Please say a

category like phone or a command like

points of interest followed by a brand name”.

A list of available commands is then spoken

by the system.

3. After the tone sounds and the face icon on

the display changes, speak a command.

Available commands are discussed in this

section.

4. Voice and display feedback are provided

when the command is accepted.

.If the command is not recognized, the

system announces: “Command not recog-

nized”. Repeat the command in a clear

voice.

.If you want to cancel the command or go

back to the previous menu of commands,

push the button. The system will

announce: “Cancelling voice recognition”

or “Go back” depending on the current

menu level.

.Push the BACK button on the control panel

to move back through the menus displayed

on the screen.

.If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, use the volume control switches

on the steering wheel or the volume knob on

the control panel.

.The voice command screen can also be

accessed using the control panel display:

1. Push the button.

2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of NISSAN

Voice Recognition, observe the following:

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate the

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-97

4-98 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

from recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

.Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

.Start speaking a command within 3.5

seconds after the tone sounds.

.Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

JVH0865X

SYSTEM FEATURES

NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the

following systems:

.Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System

.Navigation

.Audio

.Information

.My Apps

For additional information on the navigation

system, see the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands.

Refer to the following examples.

General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used

for “0”.

Phone numbers:

Speak phone numbers according to the follow-

ing example. For 1-800-662-6200, say dial

number and then speak the phone number in

any of the following formats:

.“one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”

.“one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”

.“one eight zero zero six six two six two oh

oh”

For the best voice recognition phone dialing

results, say phone numbers as single digits.

Also, full numbers can only be spoken for “800”.

For example, you cannot say 555-6000 as “five

five five six thousand”.

Bluetooth



HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS

To access the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone

System voice commands:

1. Push the button.

2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle

phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say

“Phone” to access various phone com-

mands.

If the Bluetooth



has been set to “Off”, the

system announces: “Bluetooth



is off. Would

you like to turn Bluetooth



on?”

If no phone is connected to the system and the

vehicle is stationary, the system announces:

“There is no phone connected. Would you like to

connect a phone now?” Say “Yes” to connect a

phone. All further Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone

System voice commands are only available if a

phone is connected.

If a phone is connected and Bluetooth



is set to

“On”, the following voice commands are avail-

able:

.Call (a name)

Speak the name of the contact in which you

are trying to call. System will confirm correct

contact. Say “Dial” to initiate dialing.

.Dial Number

Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed. After

the number is entered, say “Dial” to initiate

dialing. Say “Correction” to correct the

number entered. Say “Go Back” to return

to the main menu.

.List Phonebook

Starting with the first alphabetical entry in

the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts

for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call

the number of the phonebook entry. Say

“Send Text” to send a text message to the

number of the phonebook entry. Say “Next

Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry

in the vehicle phonebook, where the same

options will then be available.

.Recent Calls

The system prompts for an additional

command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming

Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” to display a list of

such calls on the screen.

Speak the number of the entry displayed on

the screen to dial that number or say “Next

Page” to view entries on the next page (if

available).

.Redial

Redials the last called number.

.Read Text

Reads an incoming text message. For more

information about text messaging with the

Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System, see

“Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System

(models with navigation system)” (P.4-89).

.Send Text

Sends a text message. For more information

about text messaging with the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System, see “Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System (models with

navigation system)” (P.4-89).

.Select Phone

The system replies “Please use manual

controls to continue”. Use manual controls

to change the active phone from among the

listed phones connected to the vehicle.

For more information about the Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System, see “Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System (models with navi-

gation system)” (P.4-89).

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE COM-

MANDS

The following voice commands are available for

the Navigation System:

.Street Address (address)

.Points of Interest (name)

.POI by Category

.Home

.Address Book

.Previous Destinations

.Enter Address in Steps

.Cancel Route

For more information about these commands,

see the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-99

4-100 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS

To access the audio system voice commands:

1. Push the button.

2. Say “Audio”.

3. Speak a command from the following

available commands:

.Play (AM, FM, etc.)

Allows user to select radio band

.Tune AM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired AM

frequency

.Tune FM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired FM

frequency

.SXM channel (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired

SXM station (if so equipped)

.CD Track (number)

Allows user to select track to be played

.Play Song (name)

Allows user to select song name to be

played

.Play Artist (name)

Allows user to select artist to be played

.Play Album (name)

Allows user to select album name to be

played

For more information about the audio system,

see “FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)

player (Type B)” (P.4-62).

INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS

The following voice commands are available for

the information functions of the Navigation

System:

.Traffic

.Fuel Prices

.Stocks

.Movie Listings

.Current Weather

.Weather Map

.5 — day Forecast

.6 — hour Forecast

For more information about these commands,

see the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS

Many Apps can be accessed using this voice

command. See “NissanConnect

App smart-

phone integration” (P.4-75).

HELP VOICE COMMANDS

The following voice commands can be spoken

to have the system provide instructions and tips

for using the NISSAN Voice Recognition sys-

tem.

.List Commands

.What Can I Say?

.General Help

.Quit

.Exit

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are

encountered, follow the solutions given in this

guide for the appropriate error. Where the

solutions are listed by number, try each solution

in turn, starting with number one, until the

problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

The system responds “Command

Not Recognized” or the system fails

to recognize the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help” menu.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-101

4-102 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

MEMO

5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ................................ 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...................................... 5-2
Three-way catalyst .............................................................. 5-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .................... 5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover ......................................... 5-6
Off-road recovery ................................................................ 5-6
Rapid air pressure loss ...................................................... 5-6
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ................................. 5-7
Driving safety precautions ................................................. 5-7
Push-button ignition switch .................................................... 5-9
Operating range for engine start function ................. 5-10
Push-button ignition switch operation ........................ 5-10
Push-button ignition switch positions ......................... 5-11
Emergency engine shut off ............................................ 5-11
Intelligent Key battery discharge .................................. 5-12
Before starting the engine ................................................... 5-12
Starting the engine ................................................................ 5-13
Driving the vehicle ................................................................. 5-14
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ................ 5-14
Manual Transmission (MT) ............................................. 5-19
Integrated control system (if so equipped) ..................... 5-21
Drive mode ......................................................................... 5-22
Parking brake .......................................................................... 5-25
Cruise control ......................................................................... 5-26
Precautions on cruise control ....................................... 5-26
Cruise control operations ............................................ 5-26
Break-in schedule ................................................................. 5-27
Fuel Efficient Driving Tips ................................................... 5-28
Increasing fuel economy ...................................................... 5-29
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ........................ 5-29
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) mode
switch operations ........................................................... 5-29
AWD warning light ........................................................ 5-31
Parking/parking on hills ........................................................ 5-33
Electric power steering ........................................................ 5-34
Brake system .......................................................................... 5-35
Braking precautions ...................................................... 5-35
Brake assist ............................................................................ 5-36
Brake assist ..................................................................... 5-36
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ............................... 5-36
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ......................... 5-37
Cold weather driving ............................................................ 5-39
Freeing a frozen door lock ........................................... 5-39
Anti-freeze ........................................................................ 5-39
Battery ............................................................................... 5-39
Draining of coolant water ............................................. 5-39
Tire equipment ................................................................ 5-39
Special winter equipment ............................................ 5-39
Driving on snow or ice ................................................. 5-39
Engine block heater (if so equipped) ....................... 5-40

5-2 Starting and driving

WARNING

.Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. They

could accidentally injure themselves

or others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

.Properly secure all cargo with ropes

or straps to help prevent it from

sliding or shifting. Do not place

cargo higher than the seatbacks. In

a sudden stop or collision, unse-

cured cargo could cause personal

injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

.Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless car-

bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is

dangerous. It can cause uncon-

sciousness or death.

.If you suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering the vehicle, drive with

all windows fully open, and have the

vehicle inspected immediately.

.Do not run the engine in closed

spaces such as a garage.

.Do not park the vehicle with the

engine running for any extended

length of time.

.Keep the liftgate closed while driv-

ing, otherwise exhaust gases could

be drawn into the passenger com-

partment. If you must drive with the

liftgate open, follow these precau-

tions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation to off

and the fan control to high to

circulate the air.

.If electrical wiring or other cable

connections must pass to a trailer

through the seal on the liftgate or

the body, follow the manufacturer’s

recommendation to prevent carbon

monoxide entry into the vehicle.

.If a special body, camper or other

equipment is added for recreational

or other usage, follow the manufac-

turer’s recommendation to prevent

carbon monoxide entry into the

vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle

appliances such as stoves, refrig-

erators, heaters, etc. may also gen-

erate carbon monoxide.)

.The exhaust system and body

should be inspected by a qualified

mechanic whenever:

— The vehicle is raised for service.

— You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

— You notice a change in the

sound of the exhaust system.

— You have had an accident invol-

ving damage to the exhaust

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

system, underbody, or rear of

the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

.The exhaust gas and the exhaust

system are very hot. Keep people,

animals or flammable materials

away from the exhaust system com-

ponents.

.Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They

may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

.Do not use leaded gasoline. Depos-

its from leaded gasoline will ser-

iously reduce the three-way

catalyst’s ability to help reduce ex-

haust pollutants.

.Keep your engine tuned up. Mal-

functions in the ignition, fuel injec-

tion, or electrical systems can cause

overrich fuel flow into the three-way

catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do

not keep driving if the engine mis-

fires, or if noticeable loss of perfor-

mance or other unusual operating

conditions are detected. Have the

vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

.Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, dama-

ging the three-way catalyst.

.Do not race the engine while warm-

ing it up.

.Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label, you should determine the proper

tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or more of your tires

is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire

causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

Starting and driving 5-3

5-4 Starting and driving

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The TPMS

malfunction indicator is combined with the low

tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the

malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-

cator is illuminated, the system may not be able

to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of replace-

ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle

that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale

after replacing one or more tires or wheels on

your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to

continue to function properly.

Additional information

.Since the spare tire is not equipped with the

TPMS, the TPMS does not monitor the tire

pressure of the spare tire.

.The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect

a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a

flat tire while driving).

.The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)

to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

.The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning

message is displayed in the vehicle informa-

tion display when the low tire pressure

warning light is illuminated and low tire

pressure is detected. The CHECK TIRE

PRES warning message turns off when the

low tire pressure warning light turns off. The

low tire pressure warning light remains

illuminated until the tires are inflated to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. The

CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is

displayed each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the low

tire pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated. “Check tire pressure warning mes-

sage” (P.2-9).

.The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message

is not displayed if the low tire pressure

warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS

malfunction.

.Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Do not reduce

the tire pressure after driving because the

tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in

low ambient temperature, check the tire

pressure for all four tires.

For additional information, see “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” (P.2-18) and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6-3).

WARNING

.If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull

off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possi-

ble. Driving with under-inflated tires

may permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire

failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in serious

personal injury. Check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD

tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as possi-

ble. (See “Flat tire”(P.6-3) for chan-

ging a flat tire.)

.Since the spare tire is not equipped

with the TPMS, when a spare tire is

mounted or a wheel is replaced, the

TPMS will not function and the low

tire pressure warning light will flash

for approximately 1 minute. The

light will remain on after 1 minute.

Have your tires replaced and/or

TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for these

services.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

.Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction of

the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION

.The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with

tire chains or the wheels are buried

in snow.

.Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the

windows. This may cause poor re-

ception of the signals from the tire

pressure sensors, and the TPMS will

not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. Some examples are:

.Facilities or electric devices using similar

radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

.If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

.If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/

AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

Low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in

the following cases.

.If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and

tire without TPMS.

.If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID

has not been registered.

.If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference, including interfer-

Starting and driving 5-5

5-6 Starting and driving

ence that may cause undesired operation

of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-

OVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering

maneuvers, because these driving practices

could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, a loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover,

particularly if the loss of control causes the

vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all

times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive

when under the influence of alcohol or drugs

(including prescription or over-the-counter

drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always

wear your seat belt as outlined in “Seat belts”

(P.1-10) of this manual, and also instruct your

passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

If the right side or left side wheels leave the road

surface, maintain control of the vehicle by

following the procedure below. Please note that

this procedure is only a general guide. The

vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on

the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle

speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive

the vehicle back onto the road surface until

vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the

steering wheel until both tires return to the

road surface. When all tires are on the road

surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the

appropriate driving lane.

.If you decide that it is not safe to return

the vehicle to the road surface based on

vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradu-

ally slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe

place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due

to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure

loss can also be caused by driving on under-

inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling

and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway

speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by main-

taining the correct air pressure and visually

inspect the tires for wear and damage. See

“Wheels and tires” (P.8-28) of this manual.

If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out”

while driving maintain control of the vehicle by

following the procedure below. Please note that

this procedure is only a general guide. The

vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on

the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air

pressure. Losing control of the vehicle

may cause a collision and result in

personal injury.

.The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.

.Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

.Do not rapidly release the accelera-

tor pedal.

.Do not rapidly turn the steering

wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location

off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually

stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

either contact a roadside emergency service

to change the tire or see “Changing a flat

tire” (P.6-4) of this Owner’s Manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-

stream reduces coordination, delays

reaction time and impairs judgement.

Driving after drinking alcohol increases

the likelihood of being involved in an

accident injuring yourself and others.

Additionally, if you are injured in an

accident, alcohol can increase the se-

verity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents.

Although the local laws vary on what is

considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is

that alcohol affects all people differently and

most people underestimate the effects of

alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And

that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter,

prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if

your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by

alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your vehicle is designed for both normal and off-

road use. However, avoid driving in deep water

or mud as your vehicle is mainly designed for

leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road

vehicle.

Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod-

els are less capable than All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) models for rough road driving and

extrication when stuck in deep snow, mud, or

the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

.Drive carefully when off the road

and avoid dangerous areas. Every

person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should be seated with their

seat belt fastened. This will keep

you and your passengers in position

when driving over rough terrain.

Starting and driving 5-7

5-8 Starting and driving

.Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead drive either straight up or

straight down the slopes. Off-road

vehicles can tip over sideways much

more easily than they can forward or

backward.

.Many hills are too steep for any

vehicle. If you drive up them, you

may stall. If you drive down them,

you may not be able to control your

speed. If you drive across them, you

may roll over.

.Do not shift ranges while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause

loss of control of the vehicle.

.Stay alert when driving to the top of

a hill. At the top there could be a

drop-off or other hazard that could

cause an accident.

.If your engine stalls or you cannot

make it to the top of a steep hill,

never attempt to turn around. Your

vehicle could tip or roll over. Always

back straight down in R (Reverse)

range. Never back down in N (Neu-

tral), using only the brake, as this

could cause loss of control.

.Heavy braking going down a hill

could cause your brakes to overheat

and fade, resulting in loss of control

and an accident. Apply brakes

lightly and use a low range to

control your speed.

.Unsecured cargo can be thrown

around when driving over rough

terrain. Properly secure all cargo

so it will not be thrown forward

and cause injury to you or your

passengers.

.To avoid raising the center of gravity

excessively, do not exceed the rated

capacity of the roof rack (if so

equipped) and evenly distribute the

load. Secure heavy loads in the

cargo area as far forward and as

low as possible. Do not equip the

vehicle with tires larger than speci-

fied in this manual. This could cause

your vehicle to roll over.

.Do not grip the inside or spokes of

the steering wheel when driving off-

road. The steering wheel could

move suddenly and injure your

hands. Instead drive with your fin-

gers and thumbs on the outside of

the rim.

.Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers

have their seat belts fastened.

.Always drive with the floor mats in

place as the floor may became hot.

.Lower your speed when encounter-

ing strong crosswinds. With a higher

center of gravity, your vehicle is

more affected by strong side winds.

Slower speeds ensure better vehicle

control.

.Do not drive beyond the perfor-

mance capability of the tires, even

with AWD engaged.

.For AWD equipped vehicles, do not

attempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with

the engine running. Doing so may

result in drivetrain damage or un-

expected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle da-

mage or personal injury.

.Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy-

namometer (such as the dynam-

ometers used by some states for

emissions testing), or similar equip-

ment even if the other two wheels

are raised off the ground. Make sure

you inform test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with

AWD before it is placed on a

dynamometer. Using the wrong test

equipment may result in drivetrain

damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

.When a wheel is off the ground due

to an unlevel surface, do not spin

the wheel excessively (AWD model).

.Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

.If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high

speeds. Your vehicle has a higher

center of gravity than a conventional

passenger car. The vehicle is not

designed for cornering at the same

speeds as conventional passenger

cars. Failure to operate this vehicle

correctly could result in loss of

control and/or a rollover accident.

.Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias, bias-

belted or radial), and tread pattern

on all four wheels. Install traction

devices on the front wheels when

driving on slippery roads and drive

carefully.

.Be sure to check the brakes imme-

diately after driving in mud or water.

See “Brake system”(P.5-35) for wet

brakes.

.Avoid parking your vehicle on steep

hills. If you get out of the vehicle

and it rolls forward, backward or

sideways, you could be injured.

.Whenever you drive off-road

through sand, mud or water as deep

as the wheel hub, more frequent

maintenance may be required. See

the maintenance schedule shown in

the “9. Maintenance and schedules”

section.

.Spinning the front wheels on slip-

pery surfaces may cause the AWD

warning light to flash and the AWD

system to automatically switch from

the AWD mode to the 2WD mode.

This could reduce traction.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition

switch while driving the vehicle except

in an emergency. (The engine will stop

when the ignition switch is pushed 3

consecutive times or the ignition switch

is pushed and held for more than 2

seconds.) If the engine stops while the

vehicle is being driven, this could lead

to a crash and serious injury.

Before operating the push-button ignition

switch, be sure to move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position (for Continuously Variable Trans-

mission models) or the shift lever to the N

(Neutral) position (for manual transmission

models).

Starting and driving 5-9

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

5-10 Starting and driving

SSD0436

OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE

START FUNCTION

The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting

the engine when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range *

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged or strong radio waves are present

near the operating location, the Intelligent Key

system’s operating range becomes narrower

and may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even someone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push

the ignition switch to start the engine.

.The cargo room area is not included in the

operating range but the Intelligent Key may

function.

.If the Intelligent Key is placed on the

instrument panel, inside the glove box or

door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not

function.

.If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door

or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent

Key may function.

SSD0859

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

OPERATION

When the ignition switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal (Continuously Vari-

able Transmission models) or the clutch pedal

(manual transmission models), the ignition

switch position will change as follows:

.Push once to change to ACC.

.Push two times to change to ON.

.Push three times to change to OFF.

.Push four times to return to ACC.

.Open or close any door to return to LOCK

during the OFF position.

The indicator light *

Aon the ignition switch

illuminates when the ignition switch is in the

ACC or ON position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are

displayed on the meter. (See “Warning lights,

indicator lights and audible reminders” (P.2-

15).)

Continuously Variable Transmission

models

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch position cannot be switched to LOCK

until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed

toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

3. Open the door. The ignition switch will

change to the LOCK position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this

position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is

pushed to the ACC position while carrying the

Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio, when the engine is not

running.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system and

electrical accessories.

OFF

The engine can be turned off in this position.

Continuously Variable Transmission models: The

ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position

until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the push-

button ignition switch in ACC or ON

position when the engine is not running

for an extended period. This can dis-

charge the battery.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving, perform the following procedure:

.Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch

3 consecutive times in less than 1.5

seconds, or

.Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

Starting and driving 5-11

5-12 Starting and driving

SSD0860

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS-

CHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged,

or environmental conditions interfere with the

Intelligent Key operation, start the engine

according to the following procedure:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position

(for Continuously Variable Transmission

models) or the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position (for manual transmission models).

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent

Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

4. Push the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the

chime sounds. The engine will start.

After step 3 is performed, when the ignition

switch is pushed without depressing the brake

pedal, the ignition switch position will change to

ACC.

NOTE:

.When the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC or ON position or the engine is

started by the above procedures, the

Intelligent Key system warning light

may blink in yellow even if the Intelli-

gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is

not a malfunction. To stop the warning

light from blinking, touch the ignition

switch with the Intelligent Key again.

.If the Intelligent Key system warning

light in the meter is blinking in green,

replace the battery as soon as possible.

(See “Intelligent Key battery replace-

ment”(P.8-20).)

.Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

.Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as

frequently as possible, or at least whenever

you refuel.

.Check that all windows and lights are clean.

.Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

.Lock all doors.

.Position seat and adjust head restraints.

.Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

.Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

.Check the operation of warning lights when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position. (See “Warning lights, indicator

lights and audible reminders” (P.2-15).)

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)

The starter is designed not to operate unless

the shift lever is in either of the above

positions.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position. Depress the clutch pedal fully to

the floor.

The starter is designed not to operate unless

the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

The Intelligent Key must be carried

when operating the ignition switch.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

Depress the brake pedal (CVT models) or

the clutch pedal (MT models) and push the

ignition switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and

release the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal (CVT models) or the clutch

pedal (MT models) with the ignition switch in

any position.

.If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when restart-

ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little

(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while

holding, crank the engine. Release the

accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

.If the engine is very hard to start because

it is flooded, depress the accelerator

pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Push the ignition switch to the ON

position to start cranking the engine.

After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by

pushing the ignition switch to OFF. After

cranking the engine, release the accel-

erator pedal. Crank the engine with your

foot off the accelerator pedal by

depressing the brake pedal and pushing

the push-button ignition switch to start

the engine. If the engine starts, but fails

to run, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine

does not start, push the ignition switch

to OFF and wait 10 seconds before

cranking again, otherwise the starter

could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the

engine while warming it up. Drive at

moderate speed for a short distance first,

especially in cold weather. In cold weather,

keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 -

3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and

stopping the engine over a short period of

time may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

When racing the engine up to 4,000 rpm or

more under no load condition, the engine

will enter the fuel cut mode.

5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever to

the P (Park) position (CVT models) or move

the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (MT

models), and push the ignition switch to the

OFF position.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electro-

nic accessories that consume battery

power when the engine is not running

(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,

etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

Starting and driving 5-13

STARTING THE ENGINE

5-14 Starting and driving

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-

MISSION (CVT)

The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

in your vehicle is electronically controlled to

produce maximum power and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this

transmission are shown on the following pages.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle

performance and driving enjoyment.

Engine power may be automatically re-

duced to protect the CVT if the engine

speed increases quickly when driving on

slippery roads or while being tested on

some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shift

lever out of the P (Park) position.

This CVT is designed so that the foot

brake pedal must be depressed before

shifting from P (Park) to any driving

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of

the P (Park) position and into any of

the other positions if the ignition

switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or

ACC position or if the key is removed.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed, push

the shift lever button and move the shift lever

to a driving position.

3. Release the parking brake and foot brake

pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in

motion.

WARNING

.Do not depress the accelerator

pedal while shifting from P (Park)

or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D

(Drive), or manual shift mode (if so

equipped). Always depress the

brake pedal until shifting is com-

pleted. Failure to do so could cause

you to lose control and have an

accident.

.Cold engine idle speed is high, so

use caution when shifting into a

forward or reverse gear before the

engine has warmed up.

.Never shift to either the P (Park) or

R (Reverse) position while vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) while the vehicle is rever-

sing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission.

.Do not downshift abruptly on slip-

pery roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

CAUTION

.To avoid possible damage to your

vehicle; when stopping the vehicle

on an uphill grade, do not hold the

vehicle by depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. The foot brake should be

used for this purpose.

.Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while

driving. Coasting with the transmis-

sion in the N (Neutral) position may

cause serious damage to the trans-

mission.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

SSD1140

To move the shift lever,

:Push the button *

Awhile depressing the

brake pedal.

:Push the button *

:Just move the shift lever.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal, push the shift lever button and move the

shift lever from the P (Park) position to any of the

desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever

is in any position while the engine is

not running. Failure to do so could

cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly

or roll away and result in serious

personal injury or property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or

ACC position for any reason while the shift lever

is in any positions other than the P (Park), the

ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK

position.

If the ignition switch cannot be placed in the

LOCK position, perform the following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is

stopped.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position

while depressing the foot brake pedal.

3. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

4. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, move

the shift lever to the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position only when the vehi-

cle is completely stopped.

P (Park):

Use this position when the vehicle is parked or

when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle

is completely stopped. The brake pedal must

be depressed and the shift lever button

pushed in to move the shift lever from N

(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).

Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill,

apply the parking brake first, then move the shift

lever to the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Make sure the

vehicle is completely stopped before selecting

the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal

must be depressed and the shift lever

button pushed in to move the shift lever

from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any driving

position to R (Reverse).

Starting and driving 5-15

5-16 Starting and driving

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.

The engine can be started in this position. You

may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled

engine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

JVS0388X

Paddle shifter (if so equipped)

Manual shift mode (if so equipped)

When the shift lever is shifted from the D (Drive)

position to the manual shift gate, the transmis-

sion enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges

can be selected manually by moving the shift

lever up or down, or pulling the right-side or left-

side paddle shifter (if so equipped).

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

Except for NISMO RS models:

M1 ?M2 ?M3 ?M4 ?M5 ?M6 ?M7

//////

NISMO RS models:

M1 ?M2 ?M3 ?M4 ?M5 ?M6 ?M7 ?M8

////// /

.When shifting up, move the shift lever to the

+ (up) side or pull the right-side paddle

shifter (+) *

A(if so equipped). The

transmission shifts to a higher range.

.When shifting down, move the shift lever to

the í(down) side or pull the left-side paddle

shifter (í)*

B(if so equipped). The

transmission shifts to a lower range.

.Moving the shift lever to the same side twice

will shift the ranges in succession. However,

if this motion is rapidly done, the second

shifting may not be completed properly.

.When canceling the manual shift mode,

return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position.

The transmission returns to the normal

driving mode.

.When you pull the paddle shifter (if so

equipped) while in the D (Drive) position, the

transmission will shift to the upper or lower

range temporarily. The transmission will

automatically return to the D (Drive) position

after a short period of time. If you want to

return to the D (Drive) position manually, pull

and hold the paddle shifter for about 1.5

seconds.

M7 (7th) (except for NISMO RS models):

M8 (8th) (NISMO RS models):

Use this position for all normal forward driving at

highway speeds.

M6 (6th) and M5 (5th) (except for NISMO

RS models):

M7 (7th) and M6 (6th) (NISMO RS models):

Use these positions when driving up long

slopes, or for engine braking when driving down

long slopes.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd) (except for

NISMO RS models):

M5 (5th), M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd)

(NISMO RS models):

Use these positions for hill climbing or engine

braking on downhill grades.

M1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or driving slowly through deep snow,

sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on

steep downhill grades.

.Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than M7

(except for NISMO RS models) or M8

(NISMO RS models) range. This reduces

fuel economy.

.In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected

range. This helps maintain driving per-

formance and reduces the chance of

vehicle damage or loss of control.

When this situation occurs, the Con-

tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

position indicator light will blink and

the chime will sound.

.In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down to 1st

gear before the vehicle comes to a

stop. When accelerating again, it is

necessary to shift up to the desired

range.

.When the CVT fluid temperature is extre-

mely low, the manual shift mode may not

work and automatically shift as a drive mode.

This is not a malfunction. In this case, return

the shift lever to the D (Drive) position and

drive for a while and then shift to the manual

shift mode.

.When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the

shift range may upshift at a lower engine

speed than usual. This is not a malfunction.

Accelerator downshift — In D position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the

transmission down into a lower gear, depending

on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection mode

This transmission has a high fluid temperature

protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-

comes too high (for example, when climbing

steep grades in high temperature with heavy

loads), engine power and, under some condi-

tions, vehicle speed will be decreased auto-

matically to reduce the chance of transmission

damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with

the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle

speed may be limited.

Fail-safe

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel spin-

ning and subsequent hard braking, the

fail-safe system may be activated. The MIL

may illuminate to indicate the fail-safe

mode is activated. (See “Malfunction In-

dicator Light (MIL)” (P.2-22).) This will

occur even if all electrical circuits are

functioning properly. In this case, place

the ignition switch in the OFF position and

wait for 10 seconds. Then turn the switch

Starting and driving 5-17

5-18 Starting and driving

back to the ON position. The vehicle

should return to its normal operating

condition. If it does not return to its normal

operating condition, have the transmission

checked and repaired, if necessary. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature pro-

tection mode or fail-safe operation

occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually

reduced. The reduced speed may be

lower than other traffic, which could

increase the chance of a collision. Be

especially careful when driving. If ne-

cessary, pull to the side of the road at a

safe place and allow the transmission

to return to normal operation, or have it

repaired if necessary.

SSD1142

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the

shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park)

position even with the brake pedal depressed

and the shift lever button pushed.

To move the shift lever, perform the following

procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover *

using a suitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock release using a

suitable tool.

5. Push the shift lever button and move the

shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while

holding down the shift lock release.

Place the ignition switch in the ON position. The

vehicle may be moved to the desired location.

Replace the removed shift lock release cover

after the operation.

If the battery is discharged completely, the

steering wheel cannot be unlocked. Do not

move the vehicle with the steering wheel locked.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the P

(Park) position, have the CVT system checked

as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the shift lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position while the engine is

running and the brake pedal is de-

pressed, the stop lights may not work.

Malfunctioning stop lights could cause

an accident injuring yourself and

others.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT)

WARNING

.Do not downshift abruptly on slip-

pery roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

.Do not over-rev the engine when

shifting to a lower gear. This may

cause a loss of control or engine

damage.

.When the high fluid temperature

protection mode or fail-safe opera-

tion occurs, vehicle speed may be

gradually reduced. The reduced

speed may be lower than other

traffic, which could increase the

chance of a collision. Be especially

careful when driving. If necessary,

pull to the side of the road at a safe

place and allow the transmission to

return to normal operation, or have

it repaired if necessary.

CAUTION

.Do not rest your foot on the clutch

pedal while driving. This may da-

mage the clutch.

.Fully depress the clutch pedal be-

fore shifting to help prevent trans-

mission damage.

.Stop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

.When the vehicle is stopped for a

period of time, for example at a stop

light, shift to N (Neutral) and release

the clutch pedal with the foot brake

applied.

SSD0552

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or down-

shifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into

the appropriate gear, then slowly and smoothly

release the clutch pedal.

To ensure smooth gear changes, be sure to fully

depress the clutch pedal before operating the

shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully

depressed before the transmission is shifted, a

gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage

could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,

3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence accord-

ing to vehicle speed.

Starting and driving 5-19

5-20 Starting and driving

To back up, pull the shift lever ring *

1upward

and then move it to the R (Reverse) gear after

stopping the vehicle completely.

The shift lever ring returns to its original position

when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral)

position.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into the R

(Reverse) or 1st gear, shift to the N (Neutral)

position, and then release the clutch pedal once.

Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift

into the R (Reverse) or 1st gear.

Suggested upshift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle speeds for

shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions

relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.

Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road

conditions, the weather and individual driving

habits.

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 13 (21)

2nd to 3rd 22 (35)

3rd to 4th 30 (48)

4th to 5th 35 (56)

5th to 6th 42 (68)

Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not

running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed

(shown below) in any gear. For level road

driving, use the highest gear suggested for that

speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and

drive according to the road conditions, which

will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the

engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may

cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

Except for NISMO RS models:

Gear MPH (km/h)

1st 31 (50)

2nd 55 (88)

3rd 76 (122)

4th —

5th —

6th —

For NISMO RS models:

Gear MPH (km/h)

1st 27 (44)

2nd 50 (80)

3rd 73 (118)

4th —

5th —

6th —

The Integrated Control System is located below

the audio system or navigation system (if so

equipped). Two Integrated Control System

modes can be selected: Drive mode and

Climate Control mode.

Depending on which Integrated Control System

mode selected (Drive mode or Climate Control

mode), the screen display and some button

functions will change.

.Drive mode

In the Drive mode, three types of driving

modes can be selected: NORMAL, SPORT

and ECO. See “Drive mode” (P.5-22). In

addition, while in the Drive mode, SETUP,

Drive information and ECO information can

be displayed and adjusted. See “Integrated

control system” (P.2-24).

.Climate Control mode

In the Climate Control mode, the climate

control can be set and adjusted. See

“Automatic air conditioner (with Integrated

Control System)” (P.4-32).

SSD1154

1. NORMAL drive mode button

2. Climate control mode select button

3. Drive mode select button

4. SETUP button

5. SPORT drive mode button

6. ECO drive mode button

7. Display screen

8. Enter button/Selection dial

Starting and driving 5-21

INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

5-22 Starting and driving

SSD1144

Example

DRIVE MODE

Three drive modes (NORMAL, SPORT and

ECO) can be selected depending on the driving

condition. When each mode is selected, the

control state of the engine, CVT (if so

equipped), steering and climate appears on

the display briefly.

Each selected Drive mode (NORMAL, SPORT

or ECO) is displayed at the top of the display

screen.

NOTE:

.The display values of torque, boost and

current fuel economy may differ de-

pending on driving conditions. Use the

display values as reference only.

.The vehicle will be set to the NORMAL

drive mode when restarting the engine.

SSD1145

NORMAL drive mode

The NORMAL drive mode is recommended for

normal driving. To set the NORMAL drive mode,

press the Drive mode select button and then

press the NORMAL drive mode button. The

control state of the engine, CVT (if so equipped)

steering and climate is displayed briefly.

When the NORMAL drive mode is selected, a

voltage meter and an engine torque meter

appear on the display screen.

NOTE:

.The voltage meter may change accord-

ing to the driving condition. This is not

a malfunction.

.At start up, the vehicle is automatically

set to the NORMAL drive mode.

SSD1146

SPORT drive mode

The SPORT drive mode is recommended for an

enhanced performance feel. To set the SPORT

drive mode, press the drive mode select button.

The control state of the engine, CVT (if so

equipped), steering and climate control is

displayed briefly. In the SPORT mode, the

engine, CVT (if so equipped) and steering are

set to SPORT. Climate control is set to

NORMAL.

When the SPORT drive mode is selected, a

boost meter appears on the display screen.

NOTE:

In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be

reduced.

Starting and driving 5-23

5-24 Starting and driving

SSD1147

ECO drive mode

The ECO drive mode is recommended for

maximum fuel economy. In the ECO drive mode,

the engine and CVT (if so equipped) are

adjusted to enhance fuel economy.

To set the ECO drive mode, press the drive

mode select button and then press the ECO

drive mode button. The control state of the

engine, CVT (if so equipped), steering and

climate control is displayed briefly.

When the ECO drive mode is selected, the

current fuel economy appears on the display

screen.

When the climate ECO mode is also switched

on, the climate control system is adjusted to

further enhance fuel economy.

The climate ECO mode can be switched on or

off in the SETUP mode. See “Setting the climate

ECO mode” (P.5-24).

NOTE:

.Many driving factors influence fuel

economy. Selecting the ECO drive

mode may not improve fuel economy.

.In the ECO drive mode, performance

may be reduced.

SSD1148

Setting the climate ECO mode:

When the climate ECO mode is switched on,

the climate control system operates to enhance

fuel economy.

To turn the climate ECO mode on or off

1. Press the drive mode select button to select

the drive mode.

2. Press the SETUP button.

3. Turn the selection dial until “CLIMATE ECO”

is selected.

4. Press the ENTER button to switch climate

ECO on or off. When the CLIMATE ECO

mode is turned on, the CLIMATE ECO

indicator *

Aturns red on the display

screen.

WARNING

.Be sure the parking brake is fully

released before driving. Failure to

do so can cause brake failure and

lead to an accident.

.Do not release the parking brake

from outside the vehicle.

.Do not use the shift lever in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully

engaged.

.To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of

the vehicle and/or its systems, do

not leave children, people who re-

quire the assistance of others or

pets unattended in your vehicle.

Additionally, the temperature inside

a closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

SPA2110

To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up *

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. While pulling up on the parking brake lever

slightly, push the button *

2and lower the

lever completely *

3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

Starting and driving 5-25

PARKING BRAKE

5-26 Starting and driving

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON-

TROL

.If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

will cancel automatically. The CRUISE in-

dicator light on the meter panel will then

blink to warn the driver.

.If the engine coolant temperature becomes

excessively high, the cruise control system

will cancel automatically.

.If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the

cruise control MAIN switch off and have the

system checked. It is recommended you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

.The CRUISE indicator light may blink when

the cruise control MAIN switch is turned ON

while pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/

SET or CANCEL switch. To properly set the

cruise control system, perform the following

procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when

driving under the following conditions:

.when it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

.in heavy traffic or in traffic that

varies in speed

.on winding or hilly roads

.on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)

.in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On Manual Transmission (MT) models,

do not shift into N (Neutral) without

depressing the clutch pedal when the

cruise control is set. Should this occur,

depress the clutch pedal and turn the

MAIN switch off immediately. Failure to

do so may cause engine damage.

SSD1128

1. ACCEL/RES switch

2. COAST/SET switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)

without keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN

switch on. The CRUISE indicator light will

illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle

to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET

switch and release it. Take your foot off the

CRUISE CONTROL

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the

set speed.

.To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously

set speed.

.The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

on winding or hilly roads. If this happens,

drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following methods:

a) Push the CANCEL switch.

b) Tap the brake pedal.

c) Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE indicator

light will turn off.

.If you depress the brake pedal while pushing

the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SET switch and

reset at the cruising speed, the cruise

control will disengage. Turn the MAIN switch

off once and then turn it on again.

.The cruise control will automatically cancel if

the vehicle slows more than 8 MPH (13

km/h) below the set speed.

.If you move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position (Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion models) or depressing the clutch pedal

(Manual Transmission models), the cruise

control will be canceled.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

.Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the COAST/SET switch.

.Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the desired speed,

release the switch.

.Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed

will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

.Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

.Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle slows

down to the desired speed.

.Push, then quickly release the COAST/SET

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed

will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle

will resume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to ob-

tain maximum engine performance and

ensure the future reliability and econo-

my of your new vehicle. Failure to

follow these recommendations may

result in shortened engine life and

reduced engine performance.

.Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

.Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

.Avoid quick starts.

.Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

Starting and driving 5-27

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

5-28 Starting and driving

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving

Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy

from your vehicle.

1. Use smooth accelerator and brake pedal

application.

.Avoid rapid starts and stops.

.Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

.Maintain constant speed while commut-

ing and coast whenever possible.

2. Maintain constant speed.

.Look ahead to try and anticipate and

minimize stops.

.Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your number

of stops.

.Maintaining a steady speed can minimize

red light stops and improve fuel effi-

ciency.

3. Use air conditioning (A/C) at higher vehicle

speeds.

.Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool the

vehicle due to reduced engine load.

.Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle

due to increased aerodynamic drag.

.Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.

4. Drive at economical speeds and distances.

.Observing the speed limit and not ex-

ceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) (where

legally allowed) can improve fuel effi-

ciency due to reduced aerodynamic

drag.

.Maintaining a safe following distance

behind other vehicles reduces unneces-

sary braking.

.Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced brak-

ing and smooth acceleration changes.

.Select a gear range suitable to road

conditions.

5. Use cruise control.

.Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady speed.

.Cruise control is particularly effective in

providing fuel savings when driving on

flat terrains.

6. Plan for the shortest route.

.Utilize a map or navigation system to

determine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid idling.

.Shutting off your engine when safe for

stops exceeding 30-60 seconds saves

fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an automated pass for toll roads.

.Automated passes permit drivers to use

special lanes to maintain cruising speed

through the toll and avoid stopping and

starting.

9. Winter warm up.

.Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel

economy.

.Vehicles typically need no more than 30

seconds of idling at start-up to effectively

circulate the engine oil before driving.

.Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating

temperature more quickly while driving

versus idling.

10. Keeping your vehicle cool.

.Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever possible.

.When entering a hot vehicle, opening the

windows will help to reduce the inside

temperature faster, resulting in reduced

demand on your A/C system.

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

.Keep your engine tuned up.

.Follow the recommended scheduled main-

tenance.

.Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire

wear and lowers fuel economy.

.Keep the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear and

lowers fuel economy.

.Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

(See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-

tion” (P.10-7).)

WARNING

.For AWD equipped vehicles, do not

attempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with

the engine running. Doing so may

result in drivetrain damage or un-

expected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle da-

mage or personal injury.

.Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy-

namometer (such as the dynam-

ometers used by some states for

emissions testing) or similar equip-

ment even if the other two wheels

are raised off the ground. Make sure

that you inform the test facility

personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with AWD before it is

placed on a dynamometer. Using

the wrong test equipment may re-

sult in drivetrain damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle da-

mage or personal injury.

SSD1129

AWD mode switch

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODE

SWITCH OPERATIONS

The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system is used to

select the 2WD (Two-Wheel Drive), AWD-V or

AWD mode depending on the driving condi-

tions.

The AWD mode indicator lights (

(green), ) are located in the instrument panel.

The AWD mode indicator lights (green)

illuminate when the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position. The indicator lights turn off

within 1 second.

The AWD mode indicator lights will display the

mode selected by the AWD mode switch while

Starting and driving 5-29

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so

equipped)

5-30 Starting and driving

engine is running.

If the AWD warning light (yellow) illumi-

nates, the AWD mode indicator lights will turn

off.

Push the AWD mode switch, located on the

instrument panel, to select 2WD, AWD-V or

AWD.

AWD-V: Push the AWD mode switch to the

neutral (AWD-V) position. The All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) AWD-V indicator light in the meter

illuminates.

2WD: Push the AWD mode switch to the 2WD

position.

AWD: Push the AWD mode switch to the AWD

position. The AWD indicator light (green) in

the meter illuminates.

AWD mode Wheels driven

AWD mode indicator light

( , (green)) Use conditions

2WD

Front wheels:

The wheel drive mode is in

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD)

when driving on a normal road.

Turns off For driving on dry,

paved roads

AWD-V

Distribution of torque to the

front and rear wheels changes

automatically [ratio; 100 : 0

(2WD) ?50 : 50 (AWD)] and

distribution of torque between

left and right wheel of rear

wheels changes automatically

depending on road conditions

encountered [ratio; 100 : 0

(2WD) ?50 : 50 (AWD)].

Illuminates For driving on paved or

slippery roads

AWD

Distribution of torque to the

front and rear wheels changes

automatically [ratio; 100 : 0

(2WD) ?50 : 50 (AWD)] and

the distribution of torque be-

tween the left and right rear

wheels changes automatically

depending on the slippery

road conditions encountered.

Illuminates (green) For driving on slippery

roads

AWD shift tips

.The oil temperature of power train parts will

increase if the vehicle is continuously

operated under conditions where the differ-

ence in rotation between the front and rear

wheels is large (wheel slip), such as when

driving the vehicle on rough roads through

sand or mud or when freeing a stuck vehicle.

In these cases, the AWD warning light blinks

rapidly and the AWD mode changes to the

2WD mode to protect the power train parts.

If you stop driving with the engine idling and

wait until the warning light stops blinking,

the AWD returns to the AWD-V or AWD

mode.

.Brake distance in the AWD mode is the

same as 2WD.

CAUTION

.Do not start the engine with the

AWD mode switch in any mode in

the following cases:

— when the vehicle is placed on a

free-roller or jacking up the

vehicle with the front tires

raised and the rear tires on the

ground.

— when towing the vehicle with the

rear tires raised from the

ground.

.Operate the AWD mode switch only

when driving straight. Do not oper-

ate the AWD mode switch when

making a turn or backing up. If the

AWD mode switch is operated while

making a turn, accelerating or de-

celerating, or if the ignition switch is

turned off while in the AWD-V or

AWD mode, you may feel a jolt. This

is not a malfunction.

.Do not operate the AWD mode

switch with the front wheel spin-

ning.

.Engine idling speed is high while

warming up the engine. Be espe-

cially careful when starting or driv-

ing on slippery surfaces with the

AWD mode switch set in the AWD-V

or AWD mode.

SSD0336-D

AWD WARNING LIGHT

The AWD warning light located in the instrument

panel illuminates when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. It turns off soon after

the engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system

while the engine is running, or while driving, the

Starting and driving 5-31

5-32 Starting and driving

warning light will either remain illuminated or

blink.

High-temperature power train oil due to con-

tinuous operation of the vehicle to free a stuck

vehicle makes the warning light blink rapidly

(about twice per second). The driving mode may

change to the 2WD mode. If the warning light

blinks rapidly during operation, stop the vehicle

with the engine idling in a safe place immedi-

ately. Then if the light goes off after a while, you

can continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of

front and rear wheels will make the warning light

blink slowly (about once per 2 seconds). Pull off

the road in a safe area, and idle the engine.

Check that all tire sizes are the same, tire

pressure is correct and tires are not worn.

Change the AWD mode switch to the 2WD

mode and do not drive fast.

CAUTION

.If the warning light illuminates while

driving, AWD mode will be changed

to 2WD mode. Reduce the vehicle

speed and have your vehicle

checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Be especially

careful when driving.

.The power train may be damaged if

you continue driving with the AWD

warning light blinking rapidly.

SSD0488

WARNING

.Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They

may ignite and cause a fire.

.Never leave the engine running

while the vehicle is unattended.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

.To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of

the vehicle and/or its systems, do

not leave children, people who re-

quire the assistance of others or

pets unattended in your vehicle.

Additionally, the temperature inside

a closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

.Safe parking procedures require

that both the parking brake be

applied and the transmission placed

into P (Park) for Continuously Vari-

able Transmission (CVT) model or in

an appropriate gear for Manual

Transmission (MT) model. Failure

to do so could cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly or roll away and

result in an accident.

.Make sure the continuously variable

transmission shift lever has been

pushed as far forward as it can go

and cannot be moved without de-

pressing the foot brake pedal.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) gear.

When parking on an uphill grade, place the

shift lever in the 1st gear.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

the street when parked on a sloping drive

way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels

as illustrated.

.HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: *

Turn the wheels into the curb and move

Starting and driving 5-33

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-34 Starting and driving

the vehicle forward until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

.HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: *

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

.HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB: *

Turn the wheels toward the side of the

road so the vehicle will move away from

the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

WARNING

.If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power

assist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

.When the electric power steering

warning light illuminates with the

engine running, the power assist for

the steering will cease operation.

You will still have control of the

vehicle but the steering will be

harder to operate.

The electric power steering is designed to

provide power assist while driving to operate

the steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly

or continuously while parking or driving at a very

low speed, the power assist for the steering

wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent

overheating of the electric power steering and

protect it from getting damaged. While the

power assist is reduced, steering wheel opera-

tion will become heavy. When the temperature

of the electric power steering goes down, the

power assist level will return to normal. Avoid

repeating such steering wheel operations that

could cause the electric power steering to

overheat.

You may hear a sound when the steering wheel

is operated quickly. However, this is not a

malfunction.

If the electric power steering warning light

illuminates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the electric power steering is not

functioning properly and may need servicing. It

is recommended you have the electric power

steering checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See

“Electric power steering warning light” (P.2-

17).)

When the electric power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running, the power

assist for the steering will cease operation. You

will still have control of the vehicle. However,

greater steering effort is needed, especially in

sharp turns and at low speeds.

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

You may feel a small click and hear a sound

when the brake pedal is fully depressed slowly.

This is not a malfunction and indicates that the

brake assist mechanism is operating properly.

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and the stopping

distance will be longer.

When the brake pedal is depressed slowly and

firmly, you may hear a clicking noise and feel a

slight pulsation. This is normal and indicates that

the Brake Assist System is operating.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will cause overheating of the

brakes, wearing out the brake pads and shoes

faster and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

.While driving on a slippery surface,

be careful when braking, accelerat-

ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking

or accelerating could cause the

wheels to skid and result in an

accident.

.If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power

assist for the brakes will not work.

Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up

the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to

normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds

until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the

stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened

or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or

drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the

best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-35

BRAKE SYSTEM

5-36 Starting and driving

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is

activated generating greater braking force than a

conventional brake booster even with light pedal

force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

.The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

is a sophisticated device, but it

cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving

techniques. It can help maintain

vehicle control during braking on

slippery surfaces. Remember that

stopping distances on slippery sur-

faces will be longer than on normal

surfaces even with ABS. Stopping

distances may also be longer on

rough, gravel or snow covered

roads, or if you are using tire chains.

Always maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you.

Ultimately, the driver is responsible

for safety.

.Tire type and condition may also

affect braking effectiveness.

— When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

— When installing a spare tire,

make sure that it is the proper

size and type as specified on the

Tire and Loading Information

label. See “Tire and Loading

Information label”(P.10-12) of

this manual.

— For detailed information, see

“Wheels and tires”(P.8-28) of

this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls

the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard

braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.

The system detects the rotation speed at each

wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to

prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By

preventing each wheel from locking, the system

helps the driver maintain steering control and

helps to minimize swerving and spinning on

slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from

locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping dis-

tances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that

tests the system each time you start the engine

and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward

or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may

hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the

brake pedal. This is normal and does not

BRAKE ASSIST

indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a

malfunction, it switches the ABS off and

illuminates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then oper-

ates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH

(5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to

road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly

applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This

action is similar to pumping the brakes very

quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or

feel a vibration from the actuator when it is

operating. This is normal and indicates that the

ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsa-

tion may indicate that road conditions are

hazardous and extra care is required while

driving.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs

and vehicle motion. Under certain driving con-

ditions, the VDC system helps to perform the

following functions.

.Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is

transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on

the same axle.

.Controls brake pressure and engine output

to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle

speed (traction control function).

.Controls brake pressure at individual wheels

and engine output to help the driver maintain

control of the vehicle in the following

conditions:

— understeer (vehicle tends to not follow

the steered path despite increased

steering input)

— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to

certain road or driving conditions).

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain

control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss

of vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the VDC

warning light in the instrument panel flashes

so note the following:

.The road may be slippery or the system may

determine some action is required to help

keep the vehicle on the steered path.

.You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal

and hear a noise or vibration from under the

hood. This is normal and indicates that the

VDC system is working properly.

.Adjust your speed and driving to the road

conditions.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC

warning light illuminates in the instrument

panel. The VDC system automatically turns off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC

system. The VDC off indicator illuminates to

indicate the VDC system is off. When the VDC

switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC

system still operates to prevent one drive wheel

from slipping by transferring power to a non

slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning light

flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions

are off, and the VDC warning light will not

flash. The VDC system is automatically reset to

on when the ignition switch is placed in the off

position then back to the on position.

See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning

light” (P.2-21) and “Vehicle Dynamic Control

Starting and driving 5-37

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

5-38 Starting and driving

(VDC) off indicator light” (P.2-23).

The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle forward or in

reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test

occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel

a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and

is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

.The VDC system is designed to help

improve driving stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed

and be especially careful when driv-

ing and cornering on slippery sur-

faces and always drive carefully.

.Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs,

stabilizer bars, bushings and

wheels are not NISSAN recom-

mended for your vehicle or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC

system may not operate properly.

This could adversely affect vehicle

handling performance, and the VDC

warning light may illuminate.

.If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are extre-

mely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and the

VDC warning light may illumi-

nate.

.If engine control related parts are

not NISSAN recommended or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC

warning light may illuminate.

.When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked

corners, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the VDC warn-

ing light may illuminate. Do not

drive on these types of roads.

.When driving on an unstable sur-

face such as a turntable, ferry,

elevator or ramp, the VDC warning

light may illuminate. This is not

a malfunction. Restart the engine

after driving onto a stable surface.

.If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the VDC warn-

ing light may illuminate.

.The VDC system is not a substitute

for winter tires or tire chains on a

snow covered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes

frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the

key hole or use the Intelligent Key system.

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

outside temperature will drop below 328F(08C),

check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter

protection. For additional information, see “En-

gine cooling system” (P.8-4).

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the battery

fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To

maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should

be checked regularly. For additional information,

see “Battery” (P.8-10).

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system, including the

engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

For details, see “Engine cooling system” (P.8-4).

TIRE EQUIPMENT

SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide

superior performance on dry pavement. How-

ever, the performance of these tires will be

substantially reduced in snowy and icy condi-

tions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy

roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &

SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

It is recommended you consult a NISSAN dealer

for the tire type, size, speed rating and

availability information.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S. states

and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.

Check local, state and provincial laws before

installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow

tires.

Tire chains may be used. For details, see “Tire

chains” (P.8-37) of this manual.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model

If you install snow tires, they must also be the

same size, brand, construction and tread pattern

on all four wheels.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

.A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

.A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

.A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-

drifts.

.Extra window washer fluid to refill the

reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

.Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick

and very hard to drive on. The

vehicle will have much less traction

or “grip”under these conditions. Try

to avoid driving on wet ice until the

road is salted or sanded.

.Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels

will lose even more traction.

Starting and driving 5-39

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-40 Starting and driving

.Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pave-

ment.

.Allow greater following distances

on slippery roads.

.Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a

patch of ice is seen ahead, brake

before reaching it. Try not to brake

while on the ice, and avoid any

sudden steering maneuvers.

.Do not use cruise control on slip-

pery roads.

.Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist in cold

temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when

the outside temperature is 208F(í78C) or lower.

To use the engine block heater

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine

block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-

volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in

for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on

outside temperatures, to properly warm the

engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to

turn the engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and

properly store the cord to keep it away from

moving parts.

WARNING

.Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical sys-

tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You can

be seriously injured by an electrical

shock if you use an ungrounded

connection.

.Disconnect and properly store the

engine block heater cord before

starting the engine. Damage to the

cord could result in an electrical

shock and can cause serious injury.

.Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged

extension cord rated for at least

10A. Plug the extension cord into a

Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-

tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.

Failure to use the proper extension

cord or a grounded outlet can result

in a fire or electrical shock and

cause serious personal injury.

6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch .............................................. 6-2
Roadside assistance program ............................................... 6-2
Emergency engine shut off ..................................................... 6-3
Flat tire ......................................................................................... 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .................... 6-3
Changing a flat tire ............................................................. 6-4
Jump starting ............................................................................. 6-9
Push starting ........................................................................... 6-11
If your vehicle overheats ...................................................... 6-11
Towing your vehicle .............................................................. 6-13
Towing recommended by NISSAN ........................... 6-14
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ............... 6-15

6-2 In case of emergency

SIC2574

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights will flash.

WARNING

.If stopping for an emergency, be

sure to move the vehicle well off the

road.

.Do not use the hazard warning

flashers while moving on the high-

way unless unusual circumstances

force you to drive so slowly that

your vehicle might become a hazard

to other traffic.

.Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are

on.

The flasher can be actuated with the ignition

switch in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

In the event of a roadside emergency, Roadside

Assistance Service is available to you. Please

refer to your Warranty Information Booklet (U.S.)

or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Information

Booklet (Canada) for details.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE

PROGRAM

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving, perform the following procedure:

.Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch

3 consecutive times in less than 1.5

seconds, or

.Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire

pressure of all tires except the spare. When

the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the

CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning mes-

sage is displayed in the vehicle information

display, one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with

low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and

warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning

light. This system will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25

km/h). For more details, see “Warning lights,

indicator lights and audible reminders” (P.2-15)

and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

(P.5-3).

WARNING

.If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull

off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possi-

ble. Driving with under-inflated tires

may permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire

failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in serious

personal injury. Check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD

tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as possi-

ble.

.Since the spare tire is not equipped

with the TPMS, when a spare tire is

mounted or a wheel is replaced, the

TPMS will not function and the low

tire pressure warning light will flash

for approximately 1 minute. The

light will remain on after 1 minute.

Have your tires replaced and/or

TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for these

services.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

In case of emergency 6-3

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

6-4 In case of emergency

.Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction of

the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake.

4. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)

position.

5. Turn off the engine.

6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

7. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

.Make sure the parking brake is

securely applied and the Manual

Transmission is shifted into R (Re-

verse), or the Continuously Variable

Transmission into P (Park).

.Never change tires when the vehicle

is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.

This is hazardous.

.Never change tires if oncoming

traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait

for professional road assistance.

MCE0001A

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks *

1at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat

tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is

jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the

vehicle may move and result in personal

injury.

JVE0354X

Jacking tools

Getting the spare tire and tools

Open the liftgate. Raise the cargo floor board

1. Remove jacking tools located behind the

spare tire.

SCE0947

The spare tire is located under the cargo floor

board.

Loosen the clamp *

2and remove the spacer

1and take out the spare tire.

Jacking up the vehicle and removing the

damaged tire

WARNING

.Never get under the vehicle while it

is supported only by the jack. If it is

necessary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

.Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use

the jack provided with your vehicle

on other vehicles. The jack is de-

signed for lifting only your vehicle

during a tire change.

.Use the correct jack-up points.

Never use any other part of the

vehicle for jack support.

.Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

.Never use blocks on or under the

jack.

.Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack, as it may

cause the vehicle to move. This is

especially true for vehicles with

limited slip differentials.

In case of emergency 6-5

6-6 In case of emergency

.Do not allow passengers to stay in

the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label attached

to the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

SCE0948

Jack-up point

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Align the jack head between the two

notches in the front or the rear as shown.

Also fit the groove of the jack head between

the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on level firm

ground.

SCE0504

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning it counterclockwise with the wheel

nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel

nuts until the tire is off the ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever

and rod with both hands as shown above.

Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears

the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and

then remove the tire.

SCE0933

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. (See specific instructions under the

heading “Wheels and tires” (P.8-28).)

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight. Check that all the

wheel nuts contact the wheel surface

horizontally.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence

illustrated (*

1,*

2,*

3,*

4,*

5), more

than 2 times, until they are tight.

In case of emergency 6-7

6-8 In case of emergency

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely

in the sequence illustrated. Lower the

vehicle completely.

WARNING

.Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

.Do not use oil or grease on the

wheel studs or nuts. This could

cause the nuts to become loose.

.Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600

miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a

flat tire, etc.).

.As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened

to specifications at all times. It is

recommended that the wheel nuts be

tightened to specifications at each

lubrication interval.

.Adjust tire pressure to the COLD

pressure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked for 3

hours or more or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label

affixed to the driver side center pillar.

Stowing the damaged tire and the tools

1. Securely store the jack, tools and the

damaged tire in the storage area.

2. Replace the cargo floor box and board.

3. Close the liftgate.

WARNING

.Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly

secured after use. Such items can

become dangerous projectiles in an

accident or sudden stop.

.The spare tire and small size spare

tire are designed for emergency use.

See specific instructions under the

heading “Wheels and tires”(P.8-28).

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be

followed.

WARNING

.If done incorrectly, jump starting

can lead to a battery explosion,

resulting in severe injury or death.

It could also damage your vehicle.

.Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away

from the battery.

.Do not allow battery fluid to come

into contact with eyes, skin, clothing

or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is

a corrosive sulfuric acid solution

which can cause severe burns. If

the fluid should come into contact

with anything, immediately flush the

contacted area with water.

.Keep the battery out of the reach of

children.

.The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

.Whenever working on or near a

battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors (for example, goggles or

industrial safety spectacles) and

remove rings, metal bands, or any

other jewelry. Do not lean over the

battery when jump starting.

.Do not attempt to jump start a

frozen battery. It could explode

and cause serious injury.

.Your vehicle has an automatic en-

gine cooling fan. It could come on at

any time. Keep hands and other

objects away from it.

In case of emergency 6-9

JUMP STARTING

6-10 In case of emergency

SCE0981

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the charging system and cause

personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle

B, position the two vehicles (*

Aand *

to bring their batteries into close proximity to

each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position.

4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems

(headlights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

5. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly

wrung out moist cloth to reduce explosion

hazard.

6. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as

illustrated (*

1?*

2?*

3?*

4).

If the battery is discharged, the ignition

switch cannot be moved from the OFF

position. Connect the jumper cables to

the booster vehicle *

Bbefore pushing

the ignition switch.

CAUTION

.Always connect positive (+) to posi-

tive (+) and negative (í) to body

ground (for example, as illustrated),

not to the battery.

.Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine

compartment and that the cable

clamps do not contact any other

metal.

7. Start the engine of the booster vehicle *

and let it run for a few minutes.

8. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle *

Bat about 2,000 rpm, and start

the engine of the vehicle *

Abeing jump

started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged

for more than 10 seconds. If the engine

does not start right away, place the

ignition switch in the OFF position and

wait 10 seconds before trying again.

9. After starting your engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable (*

4?*

3?*

2?*

1).

10. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover

the vent holes as it may be contaminated

with corrosive acid.

Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.

CAUTION

.Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models cannot be push-

started or tow-started. Attempting

to do so may cause transmission

damage.

.Three-way catalyst equipped mod-

els should not be started by pushing

since the three way catalyst may be

damaged.

.Never try to start the vehicle by

towing it; when the engine starts,

the forward surge could cause the

vehicle to collide with the tow

vehicle.

CAUTION

.Do not continue to drive if your

vehicle overheats. Doing so could

cause engine damage or a vehicle

fire.

.To avoid the danger of being

scalded, never remove the radiator

cap while the engine is still hot.

When the radiator cap is removed,

pressurized hot water will spurt out,

possibly causing serious injury.

.Do not open the hood if steam is

coming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by the

high temperature warning light (if so equipped)

or an extremely high temperature gauge reading

(if so equipped)), or if you feel a lack of engine

power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the

following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road and

apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

In case of emergency 6-11

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-12 In case of emergency

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position.

Do not stop the engine.

3. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).

Open all the windows, move the heater or air

conditioner temperature control to maximum

hot and fan control to high speed.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. (If steam or

coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.)

Do not open the hood further until no steam

or coolant can be seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

6. Visually check the drive belt for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is

running. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or

the cooling fan does not run, stop the

engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or

the engine cooling fan. The engine

cooling fan can start at any time.

7. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the reservoir with the engine

running. Add coolant to the reservoir if

necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in

Canada) and local regulations for towing must

be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could

damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are

available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service

operators are familiar with the applicable laws

and procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage to

your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you

have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is

advisable to have the service operator carefully

read the following precautions.

WARNING

.Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

.Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

.When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working con-

dition. If any unit is damaged, dol-

lies must be used.

.Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For information about towing your vehicle behind

a recreational vehicle (RV), see “Flat towing”

(P.10-18) of this manual.

In case of emergency 6-13

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-14 In case of emergency

SCE0950

Two-wheel drive models

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (front) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as

illustrated.

CAUTION

.Never tow CVT models with the front

wheels on the ground or four

wheels on the ground (forward or

backward), as this may cause ser-

ious and expensive damage to the

transmission. If it is necessary to

tow the vehicle with the rear wheels

raised, always use towing dollies

under the front wheels.

.When towing CVT models with the

front wheels on towing dollies:

Push the ignition switch to the

ACC or ON position, and secure

the steering wheel in a straight-

ahead position with a rope or simi-

lar device. Move the shift lever to

the N (Neutral) position.

.When towing a CVT model with the

rear wheels on the ground (if you do

not use towing dollies): Always

release the parking brake.

SCE0952

All-wheel drive models

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be

used when towing your vehicle or the vehicle be

placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow AWD models with any of the

wheels on the ground as this may cause

serious and expensive damage to the

powertrain.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-

sonal injury or death when recovering a

stuck vehicle:

.Contact a professional towing ser-

vice to recover the vehicle if you

have any questions regarding the

recovery procedure.

.Tow chains or cables must be at-

tached only to main structural mem-

bers of the vehicle.

.Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to

tow or free a stuck vehicle.

.Only use devices specifically de-

signed for vehicle recovery and

follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

.Always pull the recovery device

straight out from the front of the

vehicle. Never pull at an angle.

.Route recovery devices so they do

not touch any part of the vehicle

except the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use a tow strap or other device designed

specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow

the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery

device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

In case of emergency 6-15

6-16 In case of emergency

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

.Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)

and D (Drive) (Continuously Variable

Transmission models) or 1st and R

(Reverse) (Manual Transmission models).

.Apply the accelerator as little as possible

to maintain the rocking motion.

.Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R and D (Continuously

Variable Transmission models) or 1st and

R (Manual Transmission models).

.Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55

km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing service

to remove the vehicle.

7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ....................................................................... 7-2
Washing ................................................................................. 7-2
Waxing ................................................................................... 7-3
Removing spots ................................................................... 7-3
Underbody ............................................................................. 7-3
Glass ...................................................................................... 7-3
Wheels ................................................................................... 7-4
Aluminum alloy wheels ....................................................... 7-4
Chrome parts ....................................................................... 7-4
Tire dressing ......................................................................... 7-4
Cleaning interior ....................................................................... 7-5
Air fresheners ..................................................................... 7-5
Floor mats ........................................................................... 7-5
Seat belts ............................................................................ 7-7
Corrosion protection ................................................................ 7-7
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion ............................................................... 7-7
Environmental factors influence the rate
of corrosion ........................................................................ 7-7
To protect your vehicle from corrosion ....................... 7-8

7-2 Appearance and care

In order to maintain the appearance of your

vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle

as soon as you can:

.after a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain

.after driving on coastal roads

.when contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs

get on the paint surface

.when dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and

plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly

using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or

general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with

clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

.Do not use car washes that use acid

in the detergent. Some car washes,

especially brushless ones, use some

acid for cleaning. The acid may react

with some plastic vehicle compo-

nents, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and

also could cause them not to func-

tion properly. Always check with

your car wash to confirm that acid

is not used.

.Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical

detergents, gasoline or solvents.

.Do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or while the vehicle body is

hot, as the surface may become

water-spotted.

.Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean

water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface

by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

JVA0014X

Model with rear spoiler

CAUTION

Do not use an automatic car wash for

model with rear spoiler. The rear spoiler

may be damaged.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing

is recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

reapplying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

proper product.

.Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions supplied

with the wax.

.Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a

base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible

from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage

or staining. Special cleaning products are

available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive

accessory stores.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, the

underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will

prevent dirt and salt from building up and

causing the acceleration of corrosion on the

underbody and suspension. Before the winter

period and again in the spring, the underseal

must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust

film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass

to become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,

abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based

disinfectant cleaners. They could da-

mage the electrical conductors, radio

antenna elements or rear window

defroster elements.

Appearance and care 7-3

7-4 Appearance and care

WHEELS

Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to

maintain their appearance.

.Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

.Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

.NISSAN recommends that the road wheels

be waxed to protect against road salt in

areas where it is used during winter.

CAUTION

Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a

mild soap solution, especially during winter

months in areas where road salt is used. Salt

could discolor the wheels if not removed.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

.Do not use a cleaner that uses

strong acid or alkali contents to

clean the wheels.

.Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The

wheel temperature should be the

same as ambient temperature.

.Rinse the wheel to completely re-

move the cleaner within 15 minutes

after the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSING

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the

rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it

may react with the coating and form a com-

pound. This compound may come off the tire

while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

.Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-

ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an

oil-based tire dressing.

.Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire tread/

grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

.Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is

completely removed from the tire tread/

grooves.

.Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dam-

pened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean

with a dry soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric

protectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifica-

tion sensors. This can also affect the

operation of the air bag system and

result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

.Never use benzine, thinner, or any

similar material.

.For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dam-

pened with water. Never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or

any kind of solvent or paper towel

with a chemical cleaning agent.

They will scratch or cause discolora-

tion to the lens.

.Do not spray any liquid such as

water on the meter lens. Spraying

liquid may cause the system to

malfunction.

.Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to the leather sur-

faces and should be removed

promptly. Do not use saddle soap,

car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning

fluids, solvents, detergents or am-

monia-based cleaners as they may

damage the leather’s natural finish.

.Never use fabric protectors unless

recommended by the manufacturer.

.Do not use glass or plastic cleaner

on meter or gauge lens covers. It

may damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could

affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air

freshener, take the following precautions:

.Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they contact

vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air

freshener in a location that allows it to hang

free and not contact an interior surface.

.Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on

the vents. These products can cause

immediate damage and discoloration when

spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s

instructions before using air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference

that may result in a collision, injury or

death:

.NEVER place a floor mat on top of

another floor mat in the driver front

position or install them upside

down or backwards.

Appearance and care 7-5

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-6 Appearance and care

.It is recommended that you use only

genuine NISSAN floor mats specifi-

cally designed for use in your vehi-

cle model and model year.

.Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat posi-

tioning hooks. See “Floor mat in-

stallation”(P.7-6).

.Make sure the floor mat does not

interfere with pedal operation.

.Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly in-

stalled.

.After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure

they are properly installed.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. Mats should be

maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if

they become excessively worn.

SAI0050

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat position-

ing hook(s). The number and shape of the floor

mat positioning hook(s) for each seating position

varies depending on the vehicle.

When installing genuine NISSAN floor mats,

follow the installation instructions provided with

the floor mat and the following:

1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so that

the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with

the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s)

and ensure that the floor mat is properly

positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere

with pedal operation. With the ignition in the

OFF position and the shift lever in the P

(Park) position (Continuously Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) models) or the shift lever in

the N (Neutral) position (Manual Transmis-

sion (MT) models), fully apply and release all

pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with

pedal operation or prevent the pedal from

returning to its normal position. It is recom-

mended you see a NISSAN dealer for

details about installing the floor mats in your

vehicle.

JVA0024X

Positioning hook(s)

The illustration shows the location of the floor

mat positioning hook(s).

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap

solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in

the shade before using them.

See “Seat belts” (P.1-10).

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or

chemical solvents to clean the seat

belts, since these materials may se-

verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRI-

BUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION

.The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas.

.Damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU-

ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the

vehicle body underside can accelerate corro-

sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely

inside the vehicle, and should be removed for

drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing where

atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt

is used.

Appearance and care 7-7

CORROSION PROTECTION

7-8 Appearance and care

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate the rate

of corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will

accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will

also accelerate the disintegration of paint

surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

.Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

.Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

.Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

.Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CAUTION

.NEVER remove dirt, sand or other

debris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

.Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic

components inside the vehicle as

this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some areas,

it is recommended you consult a NISSAN

dealer.

8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions ........................................................ 8-2
Engine compartment check locations .................................. 8-3
MR16DDT engine ............................................................... 8-3
Engine cooling system ............................................................. 8-4
Checking engine coolant level ......................................... 8-5
Changing engine coolant .................................................. 8-5
Engine oil .................................................................................... 8-5
Checking engine oil level .................................................. 8-5
Changing engine oil and filter .......................................... 8-6
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ............... 8-8
For NISMO RS models ..................................................... 8-8
Except for NISMO RS models ........................................ 8-8
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ............................... 8-9
Window washer fluid ............................................................... 8-9
Battery ....................................................................................... 8-10
Jump starting ..................................................................... 8-12
Variable voltage control system .......................................... 8-12
Drive belt .................................................................................. 8-12
Spark plugs ............................................................................. 8-13
Replacing spark plugs .................................................... 8-13
Air cleaner ................................................................................ 8-14
Windshield wiper blades ..................................................... 8-15
Cleaning ........................................................................... 8-15
Replacing ......................................................................... 8-15
Rear window wiper blade ................................................... 8-16
Brakes ...................................................................................... 8-16
Self-adjusting brakes .................................................... 8-16
Brake pad wear warning .............................................. 8-16
Fuses ........................................................................................ 8-17
Engine compartment ..................................................... 8-17
Passenger compartment .............................................. 8-19
Intelligent Key battery replacement ................................... 8-20
Lights ........................................................................................ 8-23
Headlights ........................................................................ 8-23
Exterior and interior lights ............................................ 8-26
Wheels and tires ................................................................... 8-28
Tire pressure ................................................................... 8-28
Tire labeling ..................................................................... 8-34
Types of tires ................................................................... 8-36
Tire chains ....................................................................... 8-37
Changing wheels and tires .......................................... 8-38

8-2 Do-it-yourself

When performing any inspection or mainte-

nance work on your vehicle, always take care

to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or

damage to the vehicle. The following are general

precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

.Park the vehicle on a level surface,

apply the parking brake securely

and block the wheels to prevent

the vehicle from moving. Move the

shift lever to the P (Park) position

(CVT model) or the shift lever to the

N (Neutral) position (MT model).

.Be sure the ignition switch is in the

OFF or LOCK position when per-

forming any parts replacement or

repairs.

.If you must work with the engine

running, keep your hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from moving

fans, belts and any other moving

parts.

.It is advisable to secure or remove

any loose clothing and remove any

jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.

before working on your vehicle.

.Always wear eye protection when-

ever you work on your vehicle.

.If you must run the engine in an

enclosed space such as a garage, be

sure there is proper ventilation for

exhaust gases to escape.

.Never get under the vehicle while it

is supported only by a jack. If it is

necessary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

.Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from fuel tank and the

battery.

.Because the fuel lines are under

high pressure even when the engine

is off, it is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for service of the

fuel filter or fuel lines.

CAUTION

.Do not work under the hood while

the engine is hot. Turn the engine

off and wait until it cools down.

.Avoid direct contact with used en-

gine oil and coolant. Improperly

disposed engine oil, and engine

coolant and/or other vehicle fluids

can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations

for disposal of vehicle fluid.

.Never leave the engine or the CVT

related component harnesses dis-

connected while the ignition switch

is in the ON position.

.Never connect or disconnect the

battery or any transistorized com-

ponent while the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

.Your vehicle is equipped with an

automatic engine cooling fan. It may

come on at any time without warn-

ing, even if the ignition key is in the

OFF position and the engine is not

running. To avoid injury, always

disconnect the negative battery

cable before working near the fan.

This “8. Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-

tions regarding only those items which are

relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also

available. (See “Owner’s manual/service manual

order information” (P.10-22).)

You should be aware that incomplete or

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

improper servicing may result in operating

difficulties or excessive emissions, and could

affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt

about any servicing, it is recommended

you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

JVC0747X

MR16DDT ENGINE

1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Radiator filler cap

3. Brake and clutch* fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Window washer fluid reservoir

6. Engine drive belt location

7. Engine oil dipstick

8. Engine coolant reservoir

9. Fuse/fusible link holder

10. Battery

*: for Manual Transmission (MT) models

Do-it-yourself 8-3

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

8-4 Do-it-yourself

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and

50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze

and coolant protection. The anti-freeze solution

contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional

engine cooling system additives are not neces-

sary.

WARNING

.Never remove the radiator or cool-

ant reservoir cap when the engine is

hot. Wait until the engine and

radiator cool down. Serious burns

could be caused by high pressure

fluid escaping from the radiator.

See precautions in “If your vehicle

overheats”(P.6-11) of this manual.

.The radiator is equipped with a

pressure type radiator cap. To pre-

vent engine damage, use only a

genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

.If the engine was stopped soon

when the engine is hot, the cooling

fan may operate for approximately

10 minutes after the engine was

stopped to cool the components in

the engine compartment. When the

cooling fan is operating, be sure

that hands or other items do not get

caught in it.

CAUTION

.Never use any cooling system ad-

ditives such as radiator sealer. Ad-

ditives may clog the cooling system

and cause damage to the engine,

transmission and/or cooling sys-

tem.

.When adding or replacing coolant,

be sure to use only Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-

ant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-

ant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide

antifreeze protection to -348F

(-378C). If additional freeze protec-

tion is needed due to weather where

you operate your vehicle, add Gen-

uine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) concentrate follow-

ing the directions on the container.

If an equivalent coolant other than

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-

freeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-

low the coolant manufacture’s

instructions to maintain minimum

antifreeze protection to -348F

(-378C). The use of other types of

coolant solutions other than Genu-

ine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) or equivalent may

damage the engine cooling system.

.The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000

km) or 7 years. Mixing any other

type of coolant other than Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-

ant (blue), including Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-

ant (green), or the use of non-

distilled water will reduce the life

expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. Refer to the “9. Maintenance

and schedules” section of this man-

ual for more details.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

SDI2641

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below

the MIN level *

2, open the reservoir cap and

add coolant up to the MAX level *

1. If the

reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the

radiator when the engine is cold. If there is

insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator

with coolant up to the filler opening and also add

it to the reservoir up to the MAX level *

Tighten the cap securely after adding engine

coolant.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

It is recommended that major cooling system

repairs be performed by a NISSAN dealer. The

service procedures can be found in the appro-

priate NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheat-

ing.

WARNING

.To avoid the danger of being

scalded, never change the coolant

when the engine is hot.

.Never remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. Serious burns

could be caused by high pressure

fluid escaping from the radiator.

.Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made,

wash thoroughly with soap or hand

cleaner as soon as possible.

.Keep coolant out of reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

SDI1993

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating

temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be within the range *

C. If the

oil level is below *

A, remove the oil filler

cap and pour recommended oil through the

Do-it-yourself 8-5

ENGINE OIL

8-6 Do-it-yourself

opening. Do not overfill *

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the break-

in period, depending on the severity of

operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the

engine, and such damage is not cov-

ered by the warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches the operating

temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a

suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.

.Place the safety jack stands under the

vehicle jack-up points.

.A suitable adapter should be attached to

the jack stand saddle.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and sup-

port points are used to avoid vehicle

damage.

SDI2652

For NISMO RS models

JVM0518X

Except for NISMO RS models

SDI2651

1. Oil filler cap

2. Oil drain plug

3. Oil filter

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and

completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the

engine oil is hot.

.Waste oil must be disposed of

properly.

.Check your local regulations.

(Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the engine

oil filter change is needed.)

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.

Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface

with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket

material remaining on the mounting

surface of the engine. Failure to do so

could lead to engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight

resistance is felt, then tighten additionally

more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb

(14.7 to 20.5 N·m)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a

new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug

with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb

(29 to 39 N·m)

Do not use excessive force.

9. Refill the engine with the recommended oil

through the oil filler opening, and install the

oil filler cap securely.

See “Capacities and recommended fluids/

lubricants” (P.10-2) for drain and refill

capacity. The drain and refill capacity

depends on the oil temperature and drain

time. Use these specifications for reference

only. Always use the dipstick to determine

the proper amount of oil in the engine.

10. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the drain plug and the oil filter.

Correct as required.

11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.

Add engine oil if necessary.

After the operation

1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.

2. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

Do-it-yourself 8-7

8-8 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

.Prolonged and repeated contact

with used engine oil may cause skin

cancer.

.Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made,

wash thoroughly with soap or hand

cleaner as soon as possible.

.Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

When checking or replacement is required, we

recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

FOR NISMO RS MODELS

CAUTION

.NISSAN recommends using Genu-

ine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 (or

equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs.

Do not mix with other fluids.

.Do not use Automatic transmission

fluid (ATF) or Manual transmission

fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may

damage the CVT. Damage caused by

the use of fluids other than as

recommended is not covered by

the NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

.Using fluids that are not equivalent

to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2

may also damage the CVT. Damage

caused by the use of fluids other

than as recommended is not cov-

ered by the NISSAN’s New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

EXCEPT FOR NISMO RS MODELS

CAUTION

.NISSAN recommends using Genu-

ine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or

equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs.

Do not mix with other fluids.

.Do not use Automatic transmission

fluid (ATF) or Manual transmission

fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may

damage the CVT. Damage caused by

the use of fluids other than as

recommended is not covered by

the NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

.Using fluids that are not equivalent

to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

may also damage the CVT. Damage

caused by the use of fluids other

than as recommended is not cov-

ered by the NISSAN’s New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

For additional brake and clutch fluid information,

see “Capacities and recommended fluids/lubri-

cants” (P.10-2) of this manual.

WARNING

.Use only new fluid from a sealed

container. Old, inferior or contami-

nated fluid may damage the brake

and clutch systems. The use of

improper fluids can damage the

brake and clutch systems, and affect

the vehicle’s stopping ability.

.Clean the filler cap before removing.

.Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous

and should be stored carefully in

marked containers out of the reach

of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted

surfaces. This will damage the paint. If

fluid is spilled, immediately wash the

surface with water.

SDI2655

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is

below the MIN line *

2or the brake warning

light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super

Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3

fluid up to the MAX line *

1. If fluid must be

added frequently, the system should be

checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

SDI2429

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the

cap and pour the window washer fluid into the

reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better

cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield

washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s

instructions for the mixture ratio.

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodi-

cally.

Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning

light illuminates (if so equipped).

Do-it-yourself 8-9

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so

equipped) FLUID WINDOW WASHER FLUID

8-10 Do-it-yourself

To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug

the center hole *

1of the cap/tube assembly,

then remove it from the reservoir. If there is no

fluid in the tube, add fluid.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of

window washer fluid.

Recommended fluid:

Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concen-

trate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

CAUTION

.Do not substitute engine anti-freeze

coolant for window washer solution.

This may result in damage to the

paint.

.Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based washer fluid

concentrates may permanently stain

the grille if spilled while filling the

window washer reservoir tank.

.Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s

recommended levels before pouring

the fluid into the window washer

reservoir tank. Do not use the

window washer reservoir tank to

mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

.Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking

soda and water.

.Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

.If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the negative 7battery

terminal cable to prevent discharging it.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electro-

nic accessories that consume battery

power when the engine is not running

(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,

etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

.Do not expose the battery to flames

or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas

generated by the battery is explo-

sive. Do not allow battery fluid to

BATTERY

contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or

painted surfaces. After touching a

battery or battery cap, do not touch

or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash

your hands. If the acid contacts your

eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15

minutes and seek medical attention.

.Do not operate the vehicle if the

fluid in the battery is low. Low

battery fluid can cause a higher load

on the battery which can generate

heat, reduce battery life, and in

some cases lead to an explosion.

.When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

.Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

.Keep the battery out of the reach of

children.

DI0137MA

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be

between the UPPER LEVEL *

1and LOWER

LEVEL *

2lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level to the indicator in each

filler opening. Do not overfill.

SDI1480C

1. Remove the cell plugs *

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL

1line.

If the side of the battery is not clear, check

the distilled water level by looking directly

above the cell; the condition *

1indicates

OK and the condition *

2needs more to be

added.

3. Tighten cell plugs *

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

8-12 Do-it-yourself

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”

(P.6-9). If the engine does not start by jump

starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

CAUTION

.Do not ground accessories directly

to the battery terminal. Doing so will

bypass the variable voltage control

system and the vehicle battery may

not charge completely.

.Use electrical accessories with the

engine running to avoid discharging

the vehicle battery.

The variable voltage control system measures

the amount of electrical discharge from the

battery and controls voltage generated by the

generator.

SDI1881

1. Alternator

2. Drive belt auto-tensioner

3. Crankshaft pulley

4. Air conditioner compressor

5. Water pump

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

or LOCK position before servicing drive

belts. The engine could rotate unex-

pectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM DRIVE BELT

in poor condition or loose, have it replaced

or adjusted. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

2. Have the belt condition checked regularly.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch

are off and that the parking brake is

engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to

remove the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs. SDI2670

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, it is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Iridium platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the iridium

platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently as

the conventional type spark plugs since they will

last much longer. Follow the maintenance

schedule shown in the “9. Maintenance and

schedules” section. Do not reuse the iridium

platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or

regapping.

Always replace spark plugs with recom-

mended or equivalent ones.

Do-it-yourself 8-13

SPARK PLUGS

8-14 Do-it-yourself

SDI2667

To remove the filter, pull the air duct *

1upward

to remove it. Pull the tabs *

2, then pull the

cover *

3upward.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the maintenance

schedule shown in the “9. Maintenance and

schedules” section. When replacing the filter,

wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and

the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING

.Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or

others to be burned. The air cleaner

not only cleans the air, it stops

flame if the engine backfires. If it

is not there, and the engine back-

fires, you could be burned. Do not

drive with the air cleaner removed,

and be careful when working on the

engine with the air cleaner removed.

.Never pour fuel into the throttle

body or attempt to start the engine

with the air cleaner removed. Doing

so could result in serious injury.

AIR CLEANER

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your

windshield is clean if beads do not form when

rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent.

Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your

windshield is still not clear after cleaning the

blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

SDI1803

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

Before replacing the wiper blades, the wiper

should be in the fully up position to avoid

scratching the engine hood or damaging the

wiper arm. To pull up the wiper arm, see “Wiper

and washer switch” (P.2-36).

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push and hold the release tab *

A, and

move the wiper blade down the wiper arm

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until a click sounds.

4. Rotate the wiper blade so that the dimple is

in the groove.

CAUTION

.After wiper blade replacement, re-

turn the wiper arm to its original

position; otherwise it may be da-

maged when the hood is opened.

.Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arm may be

damaged from wind pressure.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-16 Do-it-yourself

SDI2693

Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle *

This may cause improper windshield washer

operation. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any

objects with a needle or small pin *

B.Be

careful not to damage the nozzle.

It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer

if checking or replacement is required.

If the brakes do not operate properly, it is

recommended you have the brakes checked by

a NISSAN dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the

brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the

brake pedal height does not return to

normal. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-

ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it

will make a high pitched scraping sound when

the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will

first occur only when the brake pedal is

depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,

the sound will always be heard even if the brake

pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the wear warning

sound is heard.

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE BRAKES

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise

may be heard. Occasional brake noise during

light to moderate stops is normal and does not

affect the function or performance of the brake

system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information, see the

maintenance schedule shown in the “9. Main-

tenance and schedules” section.

JVM0620X

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are turned off.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover by

pushing the tab *

1and lifting the cover

from the right side *

2, then the left side

4. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

5. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller

located in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

Do-it-yourself 8-17

FUSES

8-18 Do-it-yourself

SDI1754

6. If the fuse is open *

A, replace it with a new

fuse *

7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

The holder *

4also contains the fuses. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

checking and/or replacing.

JVM0621X

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not operate and

the fuses are in good condition, check the

fusible links in the holders *

1and *

2. If any of

these fusible links are melted, replace only with

genuine NISSAN parts.

For checking and replacing the fusible links in

the holders *

2, it is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

JVM0622X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are turned off.

2. Remove the fuse box cover *

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller *

SDI1754

4. If the fuse is open *

A, replace it with a new

fuse *

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

Do-it-yourself 8-19

8-20 Do-it-yourself

SDI2705

Extended storage fuse switch (if so

equipped)

To reduce battery drain, the extended storage

fuse switch comes from the factory switched off.

Prior to delivery of your vehicle, the switch is

pushed in (switched on) and should always

remain on.

If the extended storage fuse switch is not

pushed in (switched on), the meter may display

a warning message. See “Extended storage fuse

warning message” (P.2-9).

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

remove the extended storage fuse switch and

check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

If the extended storage fuse switch mal-

functions or if the fuse is open, it is not

necessary to replace the switch. In this

case, remove the extended storage fuse

switch and replace it with a new fuse of the

same rating.

How to remove the extended storage fuse

switch:

1. To remove the extended storage fuse switch,

be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF

position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the storage fuse switch and pull it in

the direction illustrated.

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to

swallow the battery and removed parts.

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

REPLACEMENT

SDI2451

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as

follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the In-

telligent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the

corner and twist it to separate the upper part

from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect

the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery:

CR2025 or equivalent

.Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so could

cause a malfunction.

.Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points will

seriously deplete the storage capacity.

.Make sure that the +side faces the

bottom of the case.

SDI2452

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts

1, and then push them together *

2until it

is securely closed.

5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.

If you need any assistance for replacement, it is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

Do-it-yourself 8-21

8-22 Do-it-yourself

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation

of the device.

JVM0505X

1. Map light

2. Front fog light (if so equipped)

3. Headlight (high-beam/low-beam)

4. Front parking light

5. Front turn signal light/Front side marker light

6. Side turn signal light

7. Daytime running light (NISMO models)

8. High-mounted stop light

9. Reverse light

10. Rear turn signal light

11. Stop/tail light

12. License plate light

13. Cargo light

14. Tail light (LED)

HEADLIGHTS

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the

exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A

temperature difference between the inside and

the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is

not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect

inside the lens, it is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for servicing.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

LIGHTS

8-24 Do-it-yourself

Replacing

Xenon headlight model:

If replacement is required, it is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent an

electric shock, never attempt to modify

or disassemble. It is recommended to

have your xenon headlights replaced at

a NISSAN dealer. For additional infor-

mation, see “Headlight and turn signal

switch”(P.2-39).

Halogen headlight model:

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which

uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb.

CAUTION

.Do not leave the bulb out of the

headlight reflector for a long period

of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc.

entering the headlight body may

affect bulb performance.

.High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb

may break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

.Only touch the base when handling

the bulb. Never touch the glass

envelope. Touching the glass envel-

ope could significantly affect bulb

life and/or headlight performance.

.Aiming is not necessary after repla-

cing the bulb. When aiming adjust-

ment is necessary, it is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Use the same number and wattage as originally

installed as shown in the chart.

JVM0488X

Left side of the vehicle

Disconnect the battery negative cable before

replacing bulbs.

1. Remove clip *

2. Pull up part *

Bof the air duct, and then

move part *

Csideways.

3. Remove the air duct *

4. Remove back cover *

5. Disconnect connector *

6. Turn and pull out socket *

G, and then

remove the bulb.

JVM0489X

Right side of the vehicle

Disconnect the battery negative cable before

replacing bulbs.

1. Remove clip *

2. Remove washer inlet *

3. Remove back cover *

4. Disconnect connector *

5. Turn and pull out socket *

E, and then

remove the bulb.

Do-it-yourself 8-25

8-26 Do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight high/low beams (Xenon)* 60/35 HB3/D2S

Headlight high/low beams (Halogen) 60/55 HB3/H11

Front turn signal light* 21 WY21W

Front parking light* LED -

Front side marker light* 5 W5W

Front fog light (if so equipped)* 55 H11

Side turn signal light* LED -

Daytime running light (for NISMO models)* LED -

Rear combination light*

turn signal light 21 WY21W

stop/tail light 21/5 W21/5W

tail light (LED) LED —

back-up 16 W16W

License plate light* 5 W5W

Map light 5 —

High-mounted stop light* LED —

Cargo light 5 —

Glove box light* 1.4 —

*: It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts.

SDI2306

: REMOVE

: INSTALL

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C, D or E.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens

and/or cover.

SDI2391

Map light

SDI2653

Cargo light

Do-it-yourself 8-27

8-28 Do-it-yourself

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” (P.6-3).

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire

pressure of all tires except the spare. When

the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the

CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning mes-

sage is displayed in the vehicle information

display, one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).

Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop

in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while

driving).

For more details, see “Low tire pressure warning

light” (P.2-18), “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS)” (P.5-3) and “Tire Pressure Mon-

itoring System (TPMS)” (P.6-3).

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure of the tires (including

the spare) often and always prior to long

distance trips. The recommended tire

pressure specifications are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label under

the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The

Tire and Loading Information label is

affixed to the driver side center pillar.

Tire pressures should be checked reg-

ularly because:

.Most tires naturally lose air over time.

.Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects

or if the vehicle strikes a curb while

parking.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or

driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at

moderate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including

under inflation, may adversely affect

tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

.Improperly inflated tires can

fail suddenly and cause an

accident.

.The Gross Vehicle Weight rat-

ing (GVWR) is located on the F.

M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight

capacity is indicated on the

Tire and Loading Information

label. Do not load your vehicle

beyond this capacity. Over-

loading your vehicle may re-

sult in reduced tire life, unsafe

operating conditions due to

premature tire failure, or un-

favorable handling character-

istics and could also lead to a

serious accident. Loading be-

yond the specified capacity

may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

.Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load

your vehicle, use a tire pres-

sure gauge to ensure that the

tire pressures are at the spe-

cified level.

WHEELS AND TIRES

.For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion”(Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

8-30 Do-it-yourself

SDI2503

Tire and Loading Information label

1Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can be

seated in the vehicle.

2Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle

loading information” (P.10-15).

3Original size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to

this pressure when the tires are

cold. Tires are considered COLD

after the vehicle has been parked for

3 or more hours, or driven less than

1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

The recommended cold tire inflation

is set by the manufacturer to provide

the best balance of tire wear, vehicle

handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,

up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

5Tire size — see “Tire labeling” (P.8-

34).

6Spare tire size or compact spare tire

size (if so equipped)

SDI1949

Checking the tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too

hard or force the valve stem side-

ways, or air will escape. If the hissing

sound of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pressure,

reposition the gauge to eliminate this

leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare it to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of

the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or

release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

8-32 Do-it-yourself

Except for NISMO and NISMO RS models:

SIZE COLD TIRE INFLATION

PRESSURE

FRONT ORIGINAL

TIRE P215/55R17 93V

230 kPa, 33 PSI (2WD

MT models)

250 kPa, 36 PSI (2WD

CVT models)

240 kPa, 35 PSI (AWD

models)

REAR ORIGINAL TIRE P215/55R17 93V

230 kPa, 33 PSI (2WD

MT models)

250 kPa, 36 PSI (2WD

CVT models)

240 kPa, 35 PSI (AWD

models)

SPARE TIRE

T135/80D16 101M (2WD

models)

T135/90D16 102M (AWD

models)

420 kPa, 60 PSI

For NISMO models:

SIZE COLD TIRE INFLATION

PRESSURE

FRONT ORIGINAL

TIRE 225/45R18 95Y

230 kPa, 33 PSI (2WD

MT models)

240 kPa, 35 PSI (AWD

models)

REAR ORIGINAL TIRE 225/45R18 95Y

230 kPa, 33 PSI (2WD

MT models)

240 kPa, 35 PSI (AWD

models)

SPARE TIRE

T135/80D16 101M (2WD

models)

T135/90D16 102M (AWD

models)

420 kPa, 60 PSI

Do-it-yourself 8-33

8-34 Do-it-yourself

For NISMO RS models:

SIZE COLD TIRE INFLATION

PRESSURE

FRONT ORIGINAL

TIRE 225/45R18 95Y

230 kPa, 33 PSI (2WD

MT models)

240 kPa, 35 PSI (AWD

models)

REAR ORIGINAL TIRE 225/45R18 95Y

230 kPa, 33 PSI (2WD

MT models)

240 kPa, 35 PSI (AWD

models)

SPARE TIRE T135/70D17 92M 420 kPa, 60 PSI

SDI1575

Example

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers

to place standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This information

identifies and describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also

provides the tire identification number

(TIN) for safety standard certification.

The TIN can be used to identify the tire

in case of a recall.

SDI1606

Example

1Tire size (example: P215/60R16

94H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is

designed for passenger vehicles.

(Not all tires have this information.)

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimeters of

the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall

edge.

3. Two-digit number (60): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (16): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not

find this information on all tires

because it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

JVM0694X

Example

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment of Transportation”. The symbol

can be placed above, below or to the

left or right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s iden-

tification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

Do-it-yourself 8-35

8-36 Do-it-yourself

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)

5. Four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For

example, the numbers 3103 means

the 31st week of 2003. If these

numbers are missing, then look on

the other sidewall of the tire.

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire.

Tire manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tire, which include steel,

nylon, polyester, and others.

4Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure

This number is the greatest amount of air

pressure that should be put in the tire.

Do not exceed the maximum permissible

inflation pressure.

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load

in kilograms and pounds that can be

carried by the tire. When replacing the

tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that

has the same load rating as the factory

installed tire.

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an

inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tube-

less”).

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown, if the tire has

radial structure.

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall

that contains a whitewall, bears white

lettering or bears manufacturer, brand

and/or model name molding that is

higher or deeper than the same molding

on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the

outward facing sidewall of an asymme-

trical tire that has a particular side that

must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

.When changing or replacing tires,

be sure all four tires are of the same

type (Example: Summer, All Season

or Snow) and construction. A

NISSAN dealer may be able to help

you with information about tire type,

size, speed rating and availability.

.Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

.For additional information regard-

ing tires, refer to “Important Tire

Safety Information”(US) or “Tire

Safety Information”(Canada) in the

Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some

models to provide good performance all year,

including snowy and icy road conditions. All

Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON

and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire

sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction

than All Season tires and may be more appro-

priate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance on dry

roads. Summer tire performance is substantially

reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not

have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire

sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or

icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speed

ratings than factory equipped tires and may not

match the potential maximum vehicle speed.

Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the

tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all

four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S. states

and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.

Check local, state and provincial laws before

installing studded tires. Skid and traction cap-

abilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry

surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-

studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according

to location. Check the local laws before instal-

ling tire chains. When installing tire chains, make

sure they are the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are

designed to meet the SAE standard minimum

clearances between the tire and the closest

vehicle suspension or body component required

to accommodate the use of a winter traction

device (tire chains or cables). The minimum

clearances are determined using the factory

equipped tire size. Other types may damage

your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when re-

commended by the tire chain manufacturer to

ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire

chain must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage to the

fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully

loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In

addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,

your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle

handling and performance may be adversely

affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

tire chains in such conditions can cause damage

to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

Do-it-yourself 8-37

8-38 Do-it-yourself

some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

SDI1662

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires

every 5,000 miles (8,000 km). (See “Flat

tire” (P.6-3) for tire replacing proce-

dures.)

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-

tened to the specification at all

times. It is recommended that wheel

nuts be tightened to the specifica-

tion at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

.After rotating the tires, check

and adjust the tire pressure.

.Retighten the wheel nuts

when the vehicle has been

driven for 600 miles (1,000

km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

.Do not include the spare tire or

any other small size spare tire

in the tire rotation.

.For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion”(Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

SDI1663

1. Wear indicator

2. Wear indicator location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

.Tires should be periodically

inspected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in

the tread. If excessive wear,

cracks, bulging or deep cuts

are found, the tire(s) should be

replaced.

.The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When

wear indicators are visible,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

.Tires degrade with age and

use. Have tires, including the

spare, over 6 years old

checked by a qualified techni-

cian, because some tire da-

mage may not be obvious.

Replace the tires as necessary

to prevent tire failure and

possible personal injury.

.Improper service of the spare

tire may result in serious per-

sonal injury. If it is necessary

to repair the spare tire, it is

recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

.For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion”(Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. (See “Specifications”

(P.10-9) for recommended types and sizes of

tires and wheels.)

WARNING

.The use of tires other than those

recommended or the mixed use of

tires of different brands, construc-

tion (bias, bias-belted or radial), or

tread patterns can adversely affect

the ride, braking, handling, ground

clearance, body-to-tire clearance,

tire chain clearance, speedometer

calibration, headlight aim and bum-

per height. Some of these effects

may lead to accidents and could

result in serious personal injury.

.For Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models,

if your vehicle was originally

equipped with 4 tires that were the

same size and you are only repla-

cing 2 of the 4 tires, install the new

tires on the rear axle. Placing new

tires on the front axle may cause

loss of vehicle control in some

Do-it-yourself 8-39

8-40 Do-it-yourself

driving conditions and cause an

accident and personal injury.

.If the wheels are changed for any

reason, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear,

degrade vehicle handling character-

istics and/or interference with the

brake discs/drums. Such interfer-

ence can lead to decreased braking

efficiency and/or early brake pad/

shoe wear. See “Wheels and tires”

(P.10-9) of this manual for wheel off-

set dimensions.

.Since the spare tire is not equipped

with the TPMS, when a spare tire is

mounted or a wheel is replaced, the

TPMS will not function and the low

tire pressure warning light will flash

for approximately 1 minute. The

light will remain on after 1 minute.

Have your tires replaced and/or

TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for these

services.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

.The TPMS sensor may be damaged

if it is not handled correctly. Be

careful when handling the TPMS

sensor.

.When replacing the TPMS sensor,

the ID registration may be required.

It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for ID registration.

.Do not use a valve stem cap that is

not specified by NISSAN. The valve

stem cap may become stuck.

.Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve

may be clogged up with dirt and

cause a malfunction or loss of

pressure.

.Do not install a damaged or de-

formed wheel or tire even if it has

been repaired. Such wheels or tires

could have structural damage and

could fail without warning.

.The use of retread tire is not re-

commended.

.For additional information regard-

ing tires, refer to “Important Tire

Safety Information”(US) or “Tire

Safety Information”(Canada) in the

Warranty Information Booklet.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

CAUTION

.Always use tires of the same size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-

belted or radial), and tread pattern

on all four wheels. Failure to do so

may result in a circumference differ-

ence between tires on the front and

rear axles which will cause exces-

sive tire wear and may damage the

transmission, transfer case and rear

differential gears.

.Only use spare tires specified for

each AWD model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced with tires

of the same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment

should also be checked and corrected as

necessary. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can

get out of balance. Therefore, they should be

balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires, refer

to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War-

ranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

See “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2) for details about

care of the wheels.

Spare tire

Since the spare tire is not equipped with the

TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted (TEMPOR-

ARY USE ONLY), the TPMS will not function.

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used,

otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or

involved in an accident.

WARNING

.The TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire should be used for emergency

use. It should be replaced with the

standard tire at the first opportunity

to avoid possible tire or differential

damage.

.Drive carefully while the TEMPOR-

ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-

stalled. Avoid sharp turns and

abrupt braking while driving.

.Periodically check spare tire infla-

tion pressure. Always keep the

pressure of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa,

4.2 bar).

.With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire installed do not drive your

vehicle at speeds faster than 50

MPH (80 km/h).

.When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on

the rear wheels and original tire

used on the front wheels (drive

wheels). Use tire chains only on

the front (original) tires.

.Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster

rate than the standard tire. Replace

the spare tire as soon as the tread

wear indicators appear.

.Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

.Do not use more than one spare tire

at the same time.

CAUTION

.Do not use tire chains on a TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire

chains will not fit properly and may

cause damage to the vehicle.

.Because the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire is smaller than the

original tire, ground clearance is

reduced. To avoid damage to the

vehicle, do not drive over obstacles.

Also do not drive the vehicle

through an automatic car wash

since it may get caught.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

8-42 Do-it-yourself

MEMO

9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirement ........................................................ 9-2
General maintenance ......................................................... 9-2
Scheduled maintenance .................................................... 9-2
Where to go for service .................................................... 9-2
General maintenance ............................................................... 9-2
Explanation of general maintenance items ................... 9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items .................... 9-5
Emission control system maintenance ........................... 9-5
Chassis and body maintenance ...................................... 9-6
Maintenance schedules .......................................................... 9-7
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions ......................................................... 9-7
Standard maintenance ............................................................ 9-7
Emission control system maintenance ........................ 9-8
Chassis and body maintenance ................................. 9-11
Maintenance under severe driving conditions ............... 9-14
Maintenance log .................................................................... 9-15

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is

essential to maintain your vehicle good mechan-

ical condition, as well as its emission and engine

performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper

maintenance care. You are a vital link in the

maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal day-

to-day operation. They are essential for proper

vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to

perform these procedures regularly as pre-

scribed.

Performing general maintenance checks re-

quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few

general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by

yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a

NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this section are

required to be serviced at regular intervals.

However, under severe driving conditions, addi-

tional or more frequent maintenance will be

required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and serviced. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

and are kept up-to-date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips, and training programs. They are completely

qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before

work begins.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s

service department performs the best job to

meet the maintenance requirements on your

vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smell, be sure to check for the cause or it is

recommended to have a NISSAN dealer do it

promptly. In addition, it is recommended you visit

a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are

required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, see “Maintenance precautions” (P.8-2).

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAIN-

TENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found in the “8. Do-it

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors

and the engine hood operate properly. Also

ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate

hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if

necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch

keeps the hood from opening when the primary

latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or other

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking

the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,

and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if

necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If

necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires,

including the spare, to the pressure specified.

Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive

wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the TPMS

transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap

when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle

should pull to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or

abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for

wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal

highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires, refer

to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the

NISSAN Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a

damaged windshield repaired by a qualified

repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks

or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when

performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning

the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the pedal

does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep

the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes

down further than normal, the pedal feels

spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to

stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service. Keep the floor mat away from the

pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

P (Park) mechanism: On a fairly steep hill,

check that the vehicle is held securely with the

shift lever in the P (Park) position without

applying any brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the

parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs

adjusted, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt

webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliners, etc. to ensure

they operate smoothly and that all latches lock

securely in every position. Check that the head

restraints move up and down smoothly and that

the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all

latched positions.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering conditions, such as excessive free play,

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that

all warning lights and chimes are operating

properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and

in sufficient quantity when operating the heater

or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that

the wipers and washers operate properly and

that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.

It should be between the MAX and MIN lines.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe condition require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electro-

nic accessories that consume battery

power when the engine is not running

(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,

etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

Brake and clutch fluid level*: Make sure that

the brake and clutch fluid level is between the

MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belt*: Make sure that the drive

belt is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking

the vehicle on a level surface and turning off the

engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust

system inspected. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. (See “Precau-

tions when starting and driving” (P.5-2) for

exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,

oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected

immediately.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose

connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances, other-

wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and around the exhaust system. At the end

of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly

flushed with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accumu-

late. For additional information, see “Cleaning

exterior” (P.7-2).

Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is

adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to give

you a better understanding of the scheduled

maintenance items that should be regularly

checked or replaced. The maintenance sche-

dule indicates at which mileage/time intervals

each item requires service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance, your

vehicle requires that some items be checked

during normal day-to-day operation. Refer to

“General maintenance” (P.9-2).

Items marked with “*” are recommended by

NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are

not required to perform maintenance on these

items in order to maintain the warranties which

come with your vehicle. Other maintenance

items and intervals are required.

When applicable, additional information can be

found in the “8. Do-it yourself” section of this

manual.

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use of non-

OEM approved aftermarket flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against per-

forming these services on a NISSAN

product. Many of the aftermarket flushing

systems use non-OEM approved chemicals

or solvents, the use of which has not been

validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,

grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Capaci-

ties and recommended fluids/lubricants”

(P.10-2) of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAIN-

TENANCE

Drive belts*:

Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or

cracking and for proper tension. Replace any

damaged drive belts.

Engine air filter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driving for

prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/

replace the filter more frequently.

Engine coolant*:

Replace coolant at the specified interval. When

adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture.

(Refer to “Engine cooling system” (P.8-4) to

determine the proper mixture for your area.)

NOTE:

Mixing any other type of coolant or the use

of non-distilled water may reduce the

recommended service interval of the cool-

ant.

Engine oil and oil filter:

Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified

intervals. For recommended oil grade and vis-

cosity refer to “Capacities and recommended

fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2).

Engine valve clearance*:

Inspect only if valve noise increases.

Adjust valve clearance if necessary.

Evaporative emissions control vapor

lines*:

Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness.

Tighten connections or replace parts as neces-

sary.

Fuel filter

Periodic maintenance is not required (in-tank

type filter).

Fuel lines*:

Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections

for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

Spark plugs:

Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs

of the type as originally equipped.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE

Brake lines and cables:

Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for

chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of

leaking. Replace any deteriorated or damaged

parts immediately.

Brake pads and rotors:

Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks.

Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts

immediately.

Exhaust system:

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and

hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and

damage. Tighten connections or replace parts

as necessary.

In-cabin microfilter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driving for

prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace

the filter more frequently.

Propeller shaft(s):

Check for damage, looseness, and grease

leakage. (AWD)

Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-

pension parts, drive shaft boots:

Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil

or grease. Under severe driving conditions,

inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation:

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles

(8,000 km) according to the instructions under

“Explanation of general maintenance items”

(P.9-2). When rotating tires, check for damage

and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil and

transfer case oil:

Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified

intervals.

If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or

muddy roads:

.Replace the manual transmission gear oil

every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24

months.

.Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles

(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect

the fluid deterioration data using a CON-

SULT. If the deterioration data is more than

210,000, replace the CVT fluid.

Off-road maintenance:

Check the following items frequently whenever

you drive off-road through deep sand, mud or

water:

.Brake pads and rotors

.Brake linings and drums

.Brake lines and hoses

.Differential, transmission and transfer case

oil

.Steering linkage

.Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts

.Engine air filter

.Clutch housing drain (AWD only)

To help ensure smooth, safe and economical

driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance

schedules that may be used, depending upon

the conditions in which you usually drive. These

schedules contain both distance and time

intervals, up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/

144 months. For most people, the odometer

reading will indicate when service is needed.

However, if you drive very little, your vehicle

should be serviced at the regular time intervals

shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144

months, continue maintenance at the

same mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDI-

TIONS

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions; should be performed

on vehicles that are driven under especially

demanding conditions. Additional maintenance

items should be performed if you primarily

operate your vehicle under the following condi-

tions:

.Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8

km).

.Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles

(16 km) with outside temperatures remain-

ing below freezing.

.Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go

“rush hour” traffic.

.Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for

long distances, such as police, taxi or door-

to-door delivery use.

.Driving in dusty conditions.

.Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

.Using a car-top carrier.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, both

standard and severe maintenance items

should be performed at every interval.

The following tables show the standard main-

tenance schedule. Depending upon weather

and atmospheric conditions, varying road sur-

faces, individual driving habits and vehicle

usage, additional or more frequent maintenance

may be required.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144

months, continue maintenance at the

same mileage/time intervals.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES STANDARD MAINTENANCE

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilo-

meters or months, whichever

comes first.

Miles 61,000

(km 61,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R

Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R

Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clear-

ance*

See NOTE (7)

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles,

kilometers or months, whichever

comes first.

Miles 61,000

(km 61,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R

Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R

Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clear-

ance*

See NOTE (7)

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

NOTE:

(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48

months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000

km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts

if found damaged.

(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions,

more frequent maintenance may be re-

quired.

(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.

(4) First replacement interval is 105,000

miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first

replacement, replace every 75,000 miles

(120,000 km) or 60 months.

(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

with proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-

freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled

water. Mixing any other type of coolant or

the use of non-distilled water may reduce

the life expectancy of the factory fill cool-

ant.

(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap

exceeds 0.043 in (1.1 mm) even if within

specified replacement mileage.

(7) Periodic maintenance is not required.

However, if valve noise increases, inspect

valve clearance.

*: Maintenance items and intervals with “*”

are recommended by NISSAN for reliable

vehicle operation. The owner does not

need to perform such maintenance in

order to maintain the emission warranty

or manufacturer recall liability. Other

maintenance items and intervals are re-

quired.

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first.

Miles 61,000

(km 61,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Brake lines and cables I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors$II I I I I

Brake fluid$RR R

CVT fluid See NOTE (1) II I I I I

Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I

Transfer fluid and differential gear

oil

See NOTE (2) I I I I I I

Steering gear and linkage, axle

and suspension parts$

II I

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft (AWD) and drive

shaft boots$

II I I I I

Exhaust system$II I

In-cabin microfilter R R R R

Intelligent Key battery R R R R

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first.

Miles 61,000

(km 61,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Brake lines and cables I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors$II II I I

Brake fluid$RR R

CVT fluid See NOTE (1) II II I I

Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I

Transfer fluid and differential gear

oil

See NOTE (2) I I I I I I

Steering gear and linkage, axle

and suspension parts$

II I

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft (AWD) and drive

shaft boots$

II II I I

Exhaust system$II I

In-cabin microfilter R R R R

Intelligent Key battery R R R R

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “$”should be

performed more frequently according to

“Maintenance under severe driving condi-

tions”(P.9-14).

(1) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on

rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid

deterioration at NISSAN dealer every

60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change

CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspec-

tion is not performed, change (not just

inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles

(96,000 km).

(2) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on

rough or muddy roads, change (not just

inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000

km) or 24 months.

(3) Refer to “Tire rotation”under “General

maintenance”(P.9-2).

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

The maintenance intervals shown on the pre-

ceding pages are for normal operating condi-

tions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under

severe driving conditions as shown below, more

frequent maintenance must be performed on the

following items as shown in the table.

Severe driving conditions

.Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8

km).

.Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles

(16 km) with outside temperatures remain-

ing below freezing.

.Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go

“rush hour” traffic.

.Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for

long distances, such as police, taxi or door-

to-door delivery use.

.Driving in dusty conditions.

.Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread

roads.

.Using a car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and

correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12

months

Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear & linkage, axle &

suspension parts

Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Propeller shaft (AWD) and drive

shaft boots

Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE

DRIVING CONDITIONS

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

MAINTENANCE LOG

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 120 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-17

9-18 Maintenance and schedules

MEMO

10 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants ............. 10-2
Fuel information ................................................................ 10-4
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation .................... 10-7
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations ............................................ 10-8
Specifications .......................................................................... 10-9
Engine ................................................................................. 10-9
Wheels and tires .............................................................. 10-9
Dimensions and weights ............................................. 10-10
When traveling or registering in another country ....... 10-10
Vehicle identification ........................................................... 10-11
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate ............... 10-11
Vehicle identification number (chassis number) .... 10-11
Engine serial number .................................................... 10-11
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ................. 10-12
Emission control information label ............................ 10-12
Tire and Loading Information label ........................... 10-12
Air conditioner specification label ............................. 10-13
Installing front license plate .............................................. 10-13
Vehicle loading information .............................................. 10-15
Terms .............................................................................. 10-15
Vehicle load capacity ................................................. 10-15
Loading tips .................................................................. 10-17
Measurement of weights ........................................... 10-17
Towing a trailer .................................................................... 10-18
Flat towing ............................................................................ 10-18
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) .......... 10-18
Manual Transmission .................................................. 10-18
Uniform tire quality grading .............................................. 10-19
Treadwear ..................................................................... 10-19
Traction AA, A, B and C ........................................... 10-19
Temperature A, B and C ........................................... 10-19
Emission control system warranty .................................. 10-20
Reporting safety defects .................................................. 10-20
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ...... 10-21
Event Data Recorders (EDR) .......................................... 10-22
Owner’s manual/service manual order information ..... 10-22

10-2 Technical and consumer information

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

instructed in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type

Capacity (Approximate)

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Fuel 2WD model 50 13-1/4 gal 11 gal ÂSee “Fuel information” (P.10-4).

AWD model 45 11-7/8 gal 9-7/8 gal

Engine oil

With oil filter change For NISMO RS model 4.3 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt For NISMO RS models

ÂGenuine “Nissan Motor Oil 5W-30 SN” is recommended.

ÂIf the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor oil that matches the above

grade and viscosity. For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation”

(P.10-7).

Except for NISMO RS models

ÂGenuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.

ÂIf the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor oil that matches the above

grade and viscosity. For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation”

(P.10-7).

Drain and refill

: For additional in-

formation, see

“Changing engine

oil and filter” (P.8-6).

Except for NISMO RS model 4.5 4-3/4 qt 4 qt

Without oil filter

change

For NISMO RS model 4.1 4-3/8 qt 3-5/8 qt

Except for NISMO RS model 4.3 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt

Engine coolant With reservoir For NISMO

RS model

CVT model 8.1 8-5/8 qt 7-1/8 qt ÂPre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

MT model 7.9 8-3/8 qt 7 qt

Except for

NISMO RS

model

CVT model 8.7 9-1/4 qt 7-5/8 qt

MT model 8.5 8-3/8 qt 7 qt

Reservoir 0.6 5/8 qt 1/2 qt

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — For NISMO RS models

ÂGenuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2

ÂNISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 (or equivalent) ONLY in

NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine

NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other

than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Except for NISMO RS models

ÂGenuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

ÂNISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in

NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine

NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other

than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS

Fluid type

Capacity (Approximate)

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Manual Transmission (MT) gear oil — — — For NISMO RS models

ÂGenuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or equivalent

ÂIf Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi is not available, API GL-4,

Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine

NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi as soon as it is available.

Except for NISMO RS models

ÂGenuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type 75W-80 or equivalent

ÂIf Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type is not available, API GL-4+,

Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine

NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type as soon as it is available.

Differential gear oil — — — ÂGenuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or equivalent conventional

(non-synthetic) oil

Transfer fluid — — —

Brake and clutch fluid Refill to the proper oil level according

to the instructions in the “8. Do-it-

yourself” section.

ÂGenuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid

or equivalent DOT 3

: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.

Multi-purpose grease — — — ÂNLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — ÂFor additional information, see “Vehicle identification” (P.10-11) for air conditioner

specification label.

ÂHFC-134a (R-134a)

Air conditioning system lubricants — — — ÂNISSAN A/C System Oil Type R or exact equivalent

Window washer fluid 4.5 1-1/4 gal 1 gal ÂGenuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3

10-4 Technical and consumer information

FUEL INFORMATION

Except for NISMO RS models:

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded

premium gasoline with an octane rating of at

least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re-

search octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,

you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 87 AKI number

(Research octane number 91), but you may

notice a decrease in performance.

For NISMO RS models:

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

number (Research octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,

unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating

of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane

number 91) may be temporarily used, but only

under the following precautions:

.Have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium gasoline as soon as

possible.

.Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-

eration.

Use unleaded premium gasoline for max-

imum vehicle performance.

CAUTION

.Using a fuel other than that speci-

fied could adversely affect the emis-

sion control system, and may also

affect warranty coverage.

.Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because

this will damage the three-way cat-

alyst.

.Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed

to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-

15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not

specifically designed for E-15 or E-

85 fuel can adversely affect the

emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN new vehicle limited war-

ranty.

.Do not use fuel that contains the

octane booster methylcyclopenta-

dienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT). Using fuel containing MMT

may adversely affect vehicle perfor-

mance and vehicle emissions. Not

all fuel dispensers are labeled to

indicate MMT content, so you may

have to consult your gasoline retai-

ler for more details. Note that Fed-

eral and California laws prohibit the

use of MMT in reformulated gaso-

line.

.U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be

identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate per-

centage for that region.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) speci-

fications where it is available. Many of the

automobile manufacturers developed this spe-

cification to improve emission control system

and vehicle performance. Ask your service

station manager if the gasoline meets the

WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor-

mulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha-

nol with or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels

of which the oxygenate content and the fuel

compatibility for your vehicle cannot be readily

determined. If in doubt, ask your service station

manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

.The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

.If an oxygenate-blend, other than

methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

.E-15 fuel contains more than 10%

oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely

affect the emission control devices

and systems of the vehicle and should

not be used. Damage caused by such

fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new

vehicle limited warranty.

.If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable amount

of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors, such methanol

blends may cause fuel system damage

and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not

available to ensure that all methanol

blends are suitable for use in NISSAN

vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine

stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced

after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately

change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a

low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during

refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates

can cause paint damage.

E-15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel

ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can

only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-

15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S.

government regulations require fuel ethanol

dispensing pumps to be identified with small,

square, orange and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern-

ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified by a small, square,

orange and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese

tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel

containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect

vehicle performance, including the emissions

control system. Note that while some fuel pumps

label MMT content, not all do, so you may have

Technical and consumer information 10-5

10-6 Technical and consumer information

to consult your gasoline retailer for more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel

injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve

deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commer-

cially. Many of these additives intended for gum,

varnish or deposit removal may contain active

solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful

to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy “spark knock”. (Spark

knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If

severe, this can lead to engine damage. If

you detect a persistent heavy spark knock

even when using gasoline of the stated

octane rating, or if you hear steady spark

knock while holding a steady speed on

level roads, it is recommended you have a

NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Fail-

ure to correct the condition is misuse of

the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not

responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in spark

knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may

cause excessive fuel consumption or engine

damage. If any of the above symptoms are

encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

JVT0159X

For NISMO RS models

JVT0351X

Except for NISMO RS models

1API certification mark

2API service symbol

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE-

COMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance, see

“Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants”

(P.10-2). NISSAN recommends the use of an

energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel

economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-

cosity standard. These oils have the API

certification mark on the front of the container.

Oils which do not have the specified quality

label should not be used as they could cause

engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used and

maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has

been previously used should not be used.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

10-8 Technical and consumer information

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

to select the engine oil viscosity based on the

temperatures at which the vehicle will be

operated before the next oil change. Choosing

an oil viscosity other than that recommended

could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in “Change

intervals”.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Using an engine oil and

filter other than the specified quality, or exceed-

ing recommended oil and filter change intervals

could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine

caused by improper maintenance or use of

incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is

not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited

warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE-

FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE-

COMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in your

NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the

refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil,

NISSAN A/C system oil Type R or the exact

equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil

may cause severe damage to the air

conditioning system and may require

the replacement of all air conditioner

system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect

the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental

regulations require the recovery and recycling of

any refrigerant during automotive air condition-

ing system service. A NISSAN dealer has the

trained technicians and equipment needed to

recover and recycle your air conditioning system

refrigerant.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

when servicing your air conditioning system.

ENGINE

Model MR16DDT

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, in-line

Bore 6Stroke in (mm) 3.138 63.193 (79.7 681.1)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 98.78 (1,618)

Firing order 1-3-4-2

Idle speed rpm No adjustment is necessary.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

Spark plug Standard DILKAR7C9H (for NISMO RS models)

DILKAR7E9HS (except for NISMO RS models)

Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.035 (0.9)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Type Size Offset in

(mm)

Conven-

tional

17 67J 1.85 (47)

NISMO

models

18 67J 1.85 (47)

Spare 16 64T 1.18 (30)

NISMO RS

models

17 64T 1.18 (30)

Technical and consumer information 10-9

SPECIFICATIONS

10-10 Technical and consumer information

Tire

Type Size

Pressure

PSI (kPa)

[Cold]

Conven-

tional

P215/55-

R17 93V

33 (230)*1

36 (250)*2

35 (240)*3

NISMO

models

225/45R18

95Y

33 (230)*1

35 (240)*3

Spare

T135/80-

D16

101M*1*2

60 (420)

T135/90-

D16

102M*3

NISMO RS

models

T135/70-

D17 92M

*1: 2WD MT model

*2: 2WD CVT model

*3: AWD model

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 162.8 (4,135)*1

162.4 (4,125)*2

164.0 (4,165)*3

163.8 (4,160)*4

Overall width in (mm) 69.5 (1,765)

69.7(1,770)*5

Overall height in (mm) 61.8 (1,570)

Front tread in (mm) 60.0 (1,525)

Rear tread in (mm) 60.0 (1,525)*6

59.3 (1,505)*7

Wheelbase in (mm) 99.6 (2,530)

Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating

(GVWR) lb (kg)

See the F.M.V.S.S. or

C.M.V.S.S. certification

label on the driver’s

side center pillar.

Gross Axle

Weight Rating

(GAWR)

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

*1: With front license plate bracket

*2: Without front license plate bracket

*3: With front license plate bracket (NISMO mod-

els)

*4: Without front license plate bracket (NISMO

models)

*5: NISMO models

*6: for 2WD model

*7: for AWD model

When planning to travel in another coun-

try, you should first find out if the fuel available is

suitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low

may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline.

Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas

where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

emission control and safety standards vary

according to the country, state, province or

district; therefore, vehicle specifications may

differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into

another country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, transpor-

tation, and registration are the responsi-

bility of the user. NISSAN is not

responsible for any inconvenience that

may result.

WHEN TRAVELING OR

REGISTERING IN ANOTHER

COUNTRY

STI0787

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is at-

tached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

STI0778

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as

shown.

Remove the cover to access the number.

STI0785

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

10-12 Technical and consumer information

STI0814

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification

label is affixed as shown. This label contains

valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross

Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of

manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

JVO0181X

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

STI0775

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as

shown.

STI0776

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is at-

tached to the engine compartment as shown.

JVT0347X

Technical and consumer information 10-13

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Use the following steps to mount the license

plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that

the following parts are enclosed in the plastic

bag.

.License plate bracket

.J-nut 62

.Screw 62

.Screw grommet 62

1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.

2. Locate the center position *

Aas illustrated.

Make sure the side end surface of the

license plate bracket is aligned with the

bumper *

3. Mark the center of the holes *

Cwith a felt-

tip pen.

4. Carefully drill the two pilot holes using a

0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked

locations. (Be sure that the drill only

goes through the bumper fascia.)

5. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.

6. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the

grommet hole to add a 908turn onto the

part *

7. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket

before placing the license plate bracket on

the fascia.

8. Install the license plate bracket with the

screws.

9. Install the license plate with bolts that are

not longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING

.It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside the

vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more

likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

.Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

seat belts.

.Be sure everyone in your ve-

hicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with

the following terms before loading your

vehicle:

.Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment,

fluids, emergency tools, and spare

tire assembly. This weight does not

include passengers and cargo.

.GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

.GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-

sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue

load and any other optional equip-

ment. This information is located on

the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

.GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This informa-

tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.

V.S.S. label.

.GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

Rating) - The maximum total weight

rating of the vehicle, passengers,

cargo, and trailer.

.Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the vehi-

cle. This is the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo that

can be loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load. This

information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

.Cargo capacity - permissible weight

of cargo, the subtracted weight of

occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not exceed

the number of occupants shown as

“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

occupants, then add the total luggage

weight. Examples are shown in the

following illustration.

Technical and consumer information 10-15

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

10-16 Technical and consumer information

STI0447

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX kg or XXX

lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg

or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the XXX

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there

will be five 150 lb. passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 í750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) or

(640 í340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calculated

in Step 4.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your

vehicle. (See “Measurement of weights”

(P.10-17).)

Also check tires for proper inflation

pressures. See the Tire and Loading

Information label.

LOADING TIPS

.The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.

S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

.Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

.Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do

not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden

stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal

injury.

.Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of

your vehicle can break, tire

damage could occur, or it can

change the way your vehicle

handles. This could result in

loss of control and cause per-

sonal injury.

.Overloading not only can

shorten the life of your vehicle

and the tire, but can cause

unsafe vehicle handling and

longer braking distances. This

may cause a premature tire

failure, which could result in a

serious accident and personal

injury. Failures caused by

overloading are not covered

by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of

your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded,

drive to a scale and weigh the front and

the rear wheels separately to determine

axle loads. Individual axle loads should

not exceed either of the Gross Axle

Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of

the axle loads should not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

These ratings are given on the vehicle

certification label. If weight ratings are

exceeded, move or remove items to bring

all weights below the ratings.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a

vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a

motor home.

CAUTION

.Failure to follow these guidelines

can result in severe transmission

damage.

.Whenever flat towing your vehicle,

always tow forward, never back-

ward.

.DO NOT tow any Continuously Vari-

able Transmission (CVT) vehicle

with all four wheels on the ground

(flat towing). Doing so WILL DA-

MAGE internal transmission parts

due to lack of transmission lubrica-

tion.

.DO NOT tow an All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) vehicle with any of the

wheels on the ground. Doing so

may cause serious and expensive

damage to the powertrain.

.For emergency towing procedures

refer to “Towing your vehicle” (P.6-

13).

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-

MISSION (CVT)

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models:

Do not tow an AWD vehicle with any of the

wheels on the ground.

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models:

To tow a vehicle equipped with a Continuously

Variable Transmission (CVT), an appropriate

vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed

vehicle’s driving wheels. Always follow the dolly

manufacturer’s recommendations when using

their product.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

.Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

.Your vehicle speed should never exceed 70

MPH (112 km/h) when flat towing your

vehicle.

.After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and

idle the engine with the transmission in

Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle the

engine after every 500 miles (805 km) of

towing may cause damage to the transmis-

sion’s internal parts.

TOWING A TRAILER FLAT TOWING

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable

on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified

government test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one-half

(1 1/2) times as well on the government course

as a tire graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon actual conditions of their

use, however, and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road char-

acteristics and climate.

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as

measured under controlled conditions on spe-

cified government test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include

acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C

The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and

C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions on

a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-

tained high temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent

higher levels of performance on the laboratory

test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat build-up and

possible tire failure.

Technical and consumer information 10-19

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

10-20 Technical and consumer information

Your vehicle is covered by the following emis-

sion warranties.

For USA:

.Emission Defects Warranty

.Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-

formation Booklet which comes with your

vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty

Information Booklet, or it has become lost, you

may obtain a replacement by writing to:

.Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your vehicle. If you

did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet,

or it has become lost, you may obtain a

replacement by writing to:

.Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario,

L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot

become involved in individual problems

between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go

to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh

Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from http://

www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting

our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-

free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform Transport Canada in

addition to notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a group

of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN

conduct a recall campaign. However,

Transport Canada cannot become in-

volved in individual problems between

you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s

Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi-

sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You

may also report safety defects online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/ PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

Additional information concerning motor

vehicle safety may be obtained from

Transport Canada’s Road Safety Infor-

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

mation Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or

online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (Eng-

lish speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiter-

outiere (French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns

please contact our Consumer Informa-

tion Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) should never be tested using a

two wheel dynamometer (such as the

dynamometers used by some states for

emissions testing), or similar equip-

ment. Make sure you inform test facility

personnel that your vehicle is equipped

with AWD before it is placed on a

dynamometer. Using the wrong test

equipment may result in transmission

damage or unexpected vehicle move-

ment which could result in serious

vehicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states/areas

or provinces, your vehicle may be required to be

in what is called the “ready condition” for an

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emis-

sion control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when

it is driven through certain driving patterns.

Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained

by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking

the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/

maintenance test readiness condition. Place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and

then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not

blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is

“ready”.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer to

set “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle

for testing.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

10-22 Technical and consumer information

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is

to record, in certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems

for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds

or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

.How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

.Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

.How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

.How fast the vehicle was traveling.

.Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which crashes

and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data

are recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g. name,

gender, age and crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, could combine the EDR data with the type

of personally identifying data routinely acquired

during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the vehicle

or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle

manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will

only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or

permitted by law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for your

vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the

factory trained technicians working at a NISSAN

dealer. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can

also be purchased.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals contact:

1-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this

model year and prior please contact a NISSAN

dealer. For the phone number and location of a

NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN

Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a

bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

11 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............................ 5-36

Adjusting the screen.................................................. 4-11

Advanced air bag system......................................... 1-44

Air bag system

Advanced air bag system.................................. 1-44

Front passenger air bag and status light ...... 1-46

Front-seat mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system............................ 1-51

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag system............................ 1-51

Air bag warning labels .............................................. 1-54

Air bag warning light ..................................... 1-54, 2-20

Air cleaner housing filter........................................... 8-14

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ................................... 4-28

Air conditioner service ....................................... 4-35

Air conditioner specification label ................. 10-13

Air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations .................... 4-35, 10-8

In-cabin microfilter............................................... 4-35

Air conditioner operation .......................................... 4-31

Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle

security system) .......................................................... 2-34

Alcohol, drugs and driving ......................................... 5-7

All-wheel drive (AWD) .............................................. 5-29

Antenna ......................................................................... 4-75

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ............................ 5-36

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light .... 2-16

Appearance care

Exterior appearance care ..................................... 7-2

Interior appearance care....................................... 7-5

Application download ................................................ 4-76

Around View



Monitor .............................................. 4-13

Audible reminders ...................................................... 2-23

Audio operation precautions ................................... 4-35

Audio system ............................................................... 4-35

Steering wheel audio controls ......................... 4-73

Autolight system ......................................................... 2-40

Automatic

Air conditioner ...................................................... 4-32

Door locks ................................................................ 3-5

Average fuel consumption........................................ 2-13

Avoiding collision and rollover .................................. 5-6

Back door (See liftgate) ........................................... 3-16

Battery ........................................................................... 8-10

Battery replacement, Intelligent Key ............... 8-20

Battery saver system .......................................... 2-41

Variable voltage control system ....................... 8-12

Before starting the engine ....................................... 5-12

Bluetooth



Hands-Free Phone System.... 4-80, 4-89

Bluetooth



settings........................................ 4-88, 4-94

Bluetooth



streaming audio......................... 4-60, 4-71

Booster seats .............................................................. 1-34

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..................... 5-36

Brake and clutch fluid ........................................... 8-9

Brake system ........................................................ 5-35

Parking brake operation..................................... 5-25

Warning light ........................................................ 2-16

Break-in schedule....................................................... 5-27

Brightness control

Instrument panel .................................................. 2-43

Bulb check/instrument panel................................... 2-16

Bulb replacement ....................................................... 8-23

Cabin air filter .............................................................. 4-35

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants ............................... 10-2

Car phone or CB radio ............................................. 4-80

Cargo cover ................................................................. 2-49

Cargo floor box ........................................................... 2-48

Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst .................. 5-3

CD/USB memory care and cleaning..................... 4-73

Chassis and body maintenance ............................. 9-11

Check tire pressure warning ..................................... 2-9

Child restraints ............................................................ 1-18

Booster seats ....................................................... 1-34

LATCH system ..................................................... 1-20

Precautions on child restraints ........................ 1-19

Child safety .................................................................. 1-16

Child safety rear door lock ........................................ 3-6

Chimes, Audible reminders...................................... 2-23

Circuit breaker, Fusible link ..................................... 8-18

Cleaning exterior and interior ........................... 7-2, 7-5

Clutch fluid..................................................................... 8-9

Coat hook..................................................................... 2-48

Cockpit............................................................................ 2-3

Cold weather driving ................................................. 5-39

Compact Disc (CD) player (See

audio system) .............................................................. 4-65

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ... 8-8

Control buttons and function .................................... 4-3

Controls, Steering wheel audio controls .............. 4-73

Coolant

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants ........................ 10-2

Changing engine coolant ..................................... 8-5

Checking engine coolant level ............................ 8-5

High temperature warning light ....................... 2-18

11-2

Corrosion protection.................................................... 7-7

Cover, Cargo cover ................................................... 2-49

Cruise control .............................................................. 5-26

Cup holders ................................................................. 2-47

CVT, Driving with CVT (Continuously

Variable Transmission) .............................................. 5-14

Daytime running light system .................................. 2-42

Defroster switch, Rear window and outside

mirror defroster switch .............................................. 2-38

Dimensions and weights ....................................... 10-10

Displaying Climate control ....................................... 4-34

Door open warning light ........................................... 2-17

Drive belt ...................................................................... 8-12

Driving

All-wheel drive (AWD) ....................................... 5-29

Cold weather driving .......................................... 5-39

Driving with CVT (Continuously

Variable Transmission) ....................................... 5-14

Driving with manual transmission .................... 5-19

Precautions when starting and driving ............. 5-2

Safety precautions ................................................. 5-7

Economy, Fuel ............................................................. 5-29

Elapsed time .................................................... 2-13, 2-30

Electric power steering ............................................. 5-34

Electric power steering warning light.................... 2-17

Emission control information label ...................... 10-12

Emission control system maintenance .................... 9-8

Emission control system warranty....................... 10-20

Engine

Before starting the engine ................................ 5-12

Break-in schedule................................................ 5-27

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants ........................ 10-2

Changing engine coolant ..................................... 8-5

Changing engine oil and filter ............................. 8-6

Checking engine coolant level ............................ 8-5

Checking engine oil level ..................................... 8-5

Coolant temperature gauge.............................. 2-10

Emergency engine shut off ...................... 5-11, 6-3

Engine block heater ............................................ 5-40

Engine compartment check locations ............... 8-3

Engine cooling system .......................................... 8-4

Engine oil.................................................................. 8-5

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ....... 10-7

Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-8

Engine serial number ........................................ 10-11

Engine specifications.......................................... 10-9

High temperature warning light ....................... 2-18

If your vehicle overheats .................................... 6-11

Starting the engine ............................................. 5-13

Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................... 10-22

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............................... 5-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ....... 9-5

Extended storage fuse warning ................................ 2-9

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label............ 10-12

Filter

Air cleaner housing filter.................................... 8-14

Changing engine oil and filter ............................. 8-6

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) ...... 6-2

Flat tire ............................................................................ 6-3

Flat towing................................................................. 10-18

Floor mat cleaning........................................................ 7-5

Fluid

Brake and clutch fluid ........................................... 8-9

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants ........................ 10-2

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid ................................................................ 8-8

Engine coolant ........................................................ 8-4

Engine oil.................................................................. 8-5

Window washer fluid............................................. 8-9

FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) player .... 4-45

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)

player (Type A) ............................................................ 4-53

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)

player (Type B) ............................................................ 4-62

Fog light switch .......................................................... 2-44

Front manual seat adjustment ................................... 1-3

Front passenger air bag and status light ............. 1-46

Front seat, Front seat adjustment ............................ 1-3

Front-seat active head restraints.............................. 1-9

Fuel

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants ........................ 10-2

Distance to empty ............................................... 2-13

Fuel economy ....................................................... 5-29

Fuel information.................................................... 10-4

Fuel octane rating ............................................... 10-4

Fuel-filler cap ........................................................ 3-18

Fuel-filler door ...................................................... 3-18

Gauge..................................................................... 2-11

Fuel Efficient Driving Tips ........................................ 5-28

Fuses ............................................................................. 8-17

Fusible links ................................................................. 8-18

Gas cap ........................................................................ 3-18

Gauge.............................................................................. 2-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge ................ 2-10

Fuel gauge ............................................................ 2-11

Odometer ................................................................. 2-7

Speedometer ........................................................... 2-7

Tachometer............................................................... 2-9

Trip computer ....................................................... 2-13

General maintenance .................................................. 9-2

Giving voice commands ........................................... 4-97

Glove box ..................................................................... 2-48

Hazard warning flasher switch .................................. 6-2

Head restraints/headrests .......................................... 1-5

Headlights

Bulb replacement ................................................ 8-23

Headlight switch .................................................. 2-40

Xenon headlights ................................................. 2-39

Heated seats ............................................................... 2-45

Heater

Engine block heater ............................................ 5-40

Heater and air conditioner operation ............. 4-28

Help voice commands ........................................... 4-100

High temperature warning light .............................. 2-18

Hood release ............................................................... 3-15

Horn ............................................................................... 2-44

How to say numbers ................................................. 4-98

How to use brightness control button .................... 4-8

How to use the APPS·i button ................................. 4-5

How to use the back button ..................................... 4-5

How to use the CAMERA button ............................ 4-8

How to use the ON·OFF button/Volume

control knob ................................................................... 4-8

Ignition switch ............................................................... 5-9

Immobilizer system ..................................................... 2-34

In-cabin microfilter...................................................... 4-35

Indicator lights ............................................................. 2-21

Inside mirror ................................................................. 3-21

Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test....................... 10-21

Instrument brightness control.................................. 2-43

Instrument panel ........................................................... 2-4

Integrated control system............................. 2-24, 5-21

Intelligent Key system.................................................. 3-6

Intelligent Key system warning light ............... 2-18

Key operating range .............................................. 3-8

Key operation........................................................... 3-9

P position selecting warning light ................... 2-20

Remote keyless operation ................................. 3-12

Interior light replacement .......................................... 8-26

Interior lights ................................................................ 2-54

iPod



player operation .............................................. 4-68

ISOFIX child restraint ................................................ 1-20

Jump starting ................................................................. 6-9

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system (See Intelligent

Key system) .......................................................... 3-12

Keys ................................................................................. 3-2

For Intelligent Key system .................................... 3-6

Labels

Air bag warning labels ....................................... 1-54

Air conditioner specification label ................. 10-13

Emission control information label ................ 10-12

Engine serial number ........................................ 10-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label...... 10-12

Tire and Loading information label .... 8-30, 10-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) .............. 10-11

LATCH system ............................................................ 1-20

License plate, Installing front license plate....... 10-13

Liftgate .......................................................................... 3-16

Light

Air bag warning light .......................................... 1-54

Bulb replacement ................................................ 8-23

Fog light switch ................................................... 2-44

Headlight switch .................................................. 2-40

Headlights bulb replacement ........................... 8-23

Indicator lights ...................................................... 2-21

Interior lights ......................................................... 2-54

Map lights.............................................................. 2-54

Replacement ......................................................... 8-23

Warning/indicator lights and

audible reminders ................................................ 2-16

Xenon headlights ................................................. 2-39

Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement .... 8-26

Loading information (See vehicle

loading information) ................................................ 10-15

Lock

Automatic door locks ............................................ 3-5

Door locks ................................................................ 3-4

Liftgate lock .......................................................... 3-16

Power door lock ..................................................... 3-4

Loose fuel cap warning ................................... 2-8, 3-19

Low fuel warning light ............................................... 2-18

Low tire pressure warning light .............................. 2-18

Low tire pressure warning system (See tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) ..................... 5-3

Maintenance

Battery .................................................................... 8-10

General maintenance ............................................ 9-2

11-3

11-4

Inside the vehicle.................................................... 9-3

Maintenance log .................................................. 9-15

Maintenance precautions ..................................... 8-2

Maintenance requirements ................................... 9-2

Maintenance schedules ........................................ 9-7

Maintenance under severe

driving conditions ................................................ 9-14

Outside the vehicle ................................................ 9-2

Seat belt maintenance ....................................... 1-15

Standard maintenance .......................................... 9-7

Maintenance schedules .............................................. 9-7

Making a call................................................................ 4-92

Malfunction indicator light (MIL) ............................. 2-22

Manual air conditioner ............................................... 4-29

Manual front seat adjustment .................................... 1-3

Map lights..................................................................... 2-54

Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system) ................. 3-3

Meter

Trip computer ....................................................... 2-13

Meters and gauges ...................................................... 2-5

Instrument brightness control........................... 2-43

Mirror

Inside mirror .......................................................... 3-21

Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-22

Vanity mirror .......................................................... 3-23

Monitor, RearView Monitor ........................................ 4-8

Moonroof ...................................................................... 2-52

Moving Object Detection (MOD) ........................... 4-24

Navigation system voice commands ..................... 4-99

New vehicle break-in ................................................. 5-27

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .................... 2-34

NISSAN Voice Recognition System...................... 4-96

NissanConnect App smartphone integration ...... 4-75

Odometer ....................................................................... 2-7

Off-road recovery ......................................................... 5-6

Oil

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants ........................ 10-2

Changing engine oil and filter ............................. 8-6

Checking engine oil level ..................................... 8-5

Engine oil.................................................................. 8-5

Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-8

One Shot Call ............................................................. 4-91

Outside air temperature display.............................. 2-12

Outside mirrors ........................................................... 3-22

Overheat, If your vehicle overheats ....................... 6-11

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual

order information...................................................... 10-22

Panic alarm .................................................................. 3-13

Parking

Brake break-in ...................................................... 5-35

Parking brake operation..................................... 5-25

Parking on hills..................................................... 5-33

Phone

Car phone or CB radio ...................................... 4-80

Phone settings ............................................................ 4-96

Power

Electric power steering ...................................... 5-34

Moonroof ............................................................... 2-52

Power door lock ..................................................... 3-4

Power outlet.......................................................... 2-46

Power windows.................................................... 2-50

Precautions

Audio operation.................................................... 4-35

Braking precautions ............................................ 5-35

Child restraints ..................................................... 1-19

Cruise control ....................................................... 5-26

Driving safety ........................................................... 5-7

Maintenance............................................................. 8-2

Seat belt usage.................................................... 1-10

Supplemental restraint system......................... 1-38

When starting and driving.................................... 5-2

Push starting................................................................ 6-11

Push-button ignition switch ............................ 5-9, 5-10

Radio ............................................................................. 4-35

Car phone or CB radio ...................................... 4-80

Steering wheel audio controls ......................... 4-73

Rapid air pressure loss ............................................... 5-6

Readiness for inspection/maintenance

(I/M) test .................................................................... 10-21

Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock .......... 3-6

Rear seats ...................................................................... 1-4

Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch .......................................................... 2-38

Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 2-37

RearView Monitor ......................................................... 4-8

Recorders, Event data............................................ 10-22

Registering in another country ............................. 10-10

Registering with NissanConnect App................... 4-75

Remote keyless entry function, For Intelligent

Key system ................................................................... 3-12

Reporting safety defects ....................................... 10-20

Roadside assistance program................................... 6-2

Rollover ........................................................................... 5-6

Roof, Moonroof ........................................................... 2-53

Safety

Child seat belts.................................................... 1-16

Reporting safety defects ................................. 10-20

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment ............................. 1-3

Front seats ............................................................... 1-3

Seat belt(s)

Child safety ........................................................... 1-16

Infants ..................................................................... 1-17

Injured persons .................................................... 1-12

Larger children ..................................................... 1-17

Precautions on seat belt usage ....................... 1-10

Pregnant women.................................................. 1-12

Seat belt cleaning .................................................. 7-7

Seat belt extenders ............................................. 1-15

Seat belt hooks.................................................... 1-15

Seat belt maintenance ....................................... 1-15

Seat belt warning light ....................................... 2-20

Seat belts .............................................................. 1-10

Seat belts with pretensioners .......................... 1-52

Shoulder belt height adjustment ..................... 1-14

Small children....................................................... 1-17

Three-point type .................................................. 1-12

Seat(s)

Heated seats ........................................................ 2-45

Seats.......................................................................... 1-2

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), Engine start ................................................ 2-34

Security system, Vehicle security system............. 2-33

Servicing air conditioner ........................................... 4-35

Setting climate eco .................................................... 4-34

Shift lever

Shift lock release ................................................. 5-18

Shift lock release

Transmission ......................................................... 5-18

Shifting

CVT (Continuously Variable Transmission) .... 5-14

Manual transmission ........................................... 5-19

Shoulder belt height adjustment, For

front seats .................................................................... 1-14

Siri



Eyes Free............................................................ 4-76

SOURCE select switch ............................................ 4-73

Spare tire.......................................................... 8-41, 10-9

Spark plugs.................................................................. 8-13

Speedometer ................................................................. 2-7

Standard maintenance ................................................ 9-7

Starting

Before starting the engine ................................ 5-12

Jump starting ........................................................... 6-9

Precautions when starting and driving ............. 5-2

Push starting......................................................... 6-11

Starting the engine ............................................. 5-13

Status light, Front passenger air bag.................... 1-46

Steering

Electric power steering ...................................... 5-34

Steering wheel switch for audio controls ..... 4-73

Tilting steering column ....................................... 3-20

Storage ......................................................................... 2-47

Sun visors..................................................................... 3-21

Supplemental air bag warning labels .................... 1-54

Supplemental air bag warning light ........... 1-54, 2-20

Supplemental restraint system................................ 1-38

Precautions on supplemental

restraint system .................................................... 1-38

Switch

Audio control steering wheel switch .............. 4-73

Autolight switch ................................................... 2-40

Fog light switch ................................................... 2-44

Hazard warning flasher switch ............................ 6-2

Headlight switch .................................................. 2-40

Power door lock switch ........................................ 3-5

Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch ................................................... 2-38

Turn signal switch................................................ 2-43

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch .... 2-44

Tachometer..................................................................... 2-9

Temperature display ................................................... 2-12

Temperature gauge, Engine coolant

temperature gauge..................................................... 2-10

Text messaging ........................................................... 4-93

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

Engine start .................................................................. 2-34

Three-way catalyst ....................................................... 5-3

Tilt steering column.................................................... 3-20

Tire pressure, Low tire pressure warning light .... 2-18

Tires

Flat tire ...................................................................... 6-3

Low tire pressure warning system ..................... 5-3

Tire and Loading information label .... 8-30, 10-12

Tire chains ............................................................. 8-37

Tire dressing ............................................................ 7-4

Tire pressure......................................................... 8-28

Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) .............................................. 5-3, 6-3

Tire rotation ........................................................... 8-38

Types of tires ........................................................ 8-36

Uniform tire quality grading............................. 10-19

Wheel/tire size ..................................................... 10-9

Wheels and tires ................................................. 8-28

Tonneau cover (see cargo cover) .......................... 2-49

Touch screen ................................................................. 4-4

Towing

Flat towing........................................................... 10-18

Tow truck towing ................................................. 6-13

Towing a trailer................................................... 10-18

11-5

11-6

TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system ................ 5-3

TPMS, Tire pressure warning system ..................... 6-3

Trailer towing ............................................................ 10-18

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid ................................................................ 8-8

Driving with CVT (Continuously

Variable Transmission) ....................................... 5-14

Driving with manual transmission .................... 5-19

Transmission shift lever lock release .............. 5-18

Transmitter, With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system) .................................... 3-12

Traveling or registering in another country........ 10-10

Trip computer .............................................................. 2-13

Turn signal switch....................................................... 2-43

Underbody cleaning..................................................... 7-3

Uniform tire quality grading................................... 10-19

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

connection port ............................................... 4-57, 4-67

Vanity mirror ................................................................. 3-23

Variable voltage control system .............................. 8-12

Vehicle

Dimensions and weights ................................. 10-10

Identification number (VIN) ............................. 10-11

Information display.................................... 2-11, 2-12

Loading information .......................................... 10-15

Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).................. 6-15

Security system.................................................... 2-33

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch .... 2-44

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system ......... 5-37

Ventilators ..................................................................... 4-27

Voice command .......................................................... 4-91

Voice Prompt Interrupt .............................................. 4-91

Warning

Hazard warning flasher switch ............................ 6-2

Lights ...................................................................... 2-16

Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) .............................................. 5-3, 6-3

Warning lights, indicator lights and

audible reminders ................................................ 2-15

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels................ 1-54

Warning light

Air bag warning light ............................... 1-54, 2-20

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

warning light ......................................................... 2-16

AWD warning light.............................................. 5-31

Brake warning light ............................................. 2-16

Door open warning light .................................... 2-17

Electric power steering warning light............. 2-17

Intelligent Key system warning light ............... 2-18

Low fuel warning light ........................................ 2-18

Low tire pressure warning light ....................... 2-18

Seat belt warning light ....................................... 2-20

Warranty, Emission control system warranty.... 10-20

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer switch ........ 2-37

Wiper and washer switch ................................. 2-36

Washing.......................................................................... 7-2

Waxing ............................................................................ 7-3

Weights (See dimensions and weights) ........... 10-10

Wheel/tire size ............................................................ 10-9

Wheels and tires ........................................................ 8-28

Care of wheels........................................................ 7-4

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels......................... 7-4

Window washer fluid................................................... 8-9

Window(s)

Cleaning.................................................................... 7-3

Power windows.................................................... 2-50

Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer switch ........ 2-37

Rear window wiper blade ................................. 8-16

Wiper and washer switch ................................. 2-36

Wiper blades ........................................................ 8-15

Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 2-36

Xenon headlights ........................................................ 2-39

MEMO

11-7

FUEL INFORMATION:

Except for NISMO RS models:

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded

premium gasoline with an octane rating of at

least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re-

search octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,

you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 87 AKI number

(Research octane number 91), but you may

notice a decrease in performance.

For NISMO RS models:

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

number (Research octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,

unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating

of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane

number 91) may be temporarily used, but only

under the following precautions:

.Have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium gasoline as soon as

possible.

.Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-

eration.

Use unleaded premium gasoline for max-

imum vehicle performance.

CAUTION

.Using a fuel other than that speci-

fied could adversely affect the emis-

sion control system, and may also

affect warranty coverage.

.Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because

this will damage the three-way cat-

alyst.

.Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed

to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-

15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not

specifically designed for E-15 or E-

85 fuel can adversely affect the

emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN new vehicle limited war-

ranty.

.U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be

identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate per-

centage for that region.

For additional information, see “Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2).

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

For NISMO RS models:

.Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 5W-30 SN”

Except for NISMO RS models:

.Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”

See “Capacities and recommended fluids/lubri-

cants” (P.10-2) for engine oil and oil filter

recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

The label is typically located on the driver side

center pillar. For additional information, see

“Wheels and tires” (P.8-28).

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE-

DURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of

vehicle use, follow the recommendations out-

lined in the “Break-in schedule” (P.5-27) of this

Owner’s Manual. Follow these recommenda-

tions for the future reliability and economy of

your new vehicle.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

F15-D

Printing : August 2016 (34)

Publication No.: OM15E0 0F15U0

Printed in U.S.A.

TOOUM-3PU0D

OM17E0 0F15U0

2017 Nissan Juke | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation